E

v
a
l
u
a
t
i
o
n
:

N
o
t

T
o

B
e

U
s
e
d

f
o
r

T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g


C CC C
C CC C
o oo o
o oo o
u uu u
u uu u
r rr r
r rr r
s ss s
s ss s
e ee e
e ee e
w ww w
w ww w
a aa a
a aa a
r rr r
r rr r
e ee e
e ee e
E EE E
E EE E
v vv v
v vv v
a aa a
a aa a
l ll l
l ll l
u uu u
u uu u
a aa a
a aa a
t tt t
t tt t
i ii i
i ii i
o oo o
o oo o
n nn n
n nn n

A FREE Preview of Our Complete Courses


EVALUATION USE ONLY: NOT TO BE USED FOR TRAINING


Terms and Conditions:
This version of CustomGuides courseware is for preview/evaluation purposes only and must
under no circumstances be used for training purposes or distributed as user reference. Viewing
this content indicates your acceptance of these restrictions and any violation will be prosecuted to
the fullest extent of the law. This material is copyrighted by CustomGuide, Inc. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transcribed, or translated into any language or computer
language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical,
manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of CustomGuide, Inc.


A Note About Print Quality:
These evaluation materials are saved in Adobe Acrobat format and print/reproduction quality will
be less than perfect. The original CustomGuide courseware comes in Microsoft Word 97/2000
format and will print in at a much higher quality.



Please Show This Material to Your Training or IT DepartmentIt
Could Save Them a Lot of Time and Money!

Custo Custo Custo Customizable Print On mizable Print On mizable Print On mizable Print On- -- -Demand Courseware Demand Courseware Demand Courseware Demand Courseware
1502 Nicollet Avenue, Suite 1, Minneapolis, MN 55403, USA
Tel. (888) 903-2432 www.customguide.com
Your Organizations Name Here
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
B
B
a
a
s
s
i
i
c
c
s
s
Student Edition
Computer Courseware
2003 by CustomGuide, Inc. 1502 Nicollet Avenue South, Suite 1; Minneapolis, MN 55403
This material is copyrighted and all rights are reserved by CustomGuide, Inc. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
CustomGuide, Inc.
We make a sincere effort to ensure the accuracy of the material described herein; however, CustomGuide makes no warranty,
expressed or implied, with respect to the quality, correctness, reliability, accuracy, or freedom from error of this document or the
products it describes. Data used in examples and sample data files are intended to be fictional. Any resemblance to real
persons or companies is entirely coincidental.
The names of software products referred to in this manual are claimed as trademarks of their respective companies.
CustomGuide is a registered trademark of CustomGuide, Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 7
Chapter One: The Essentials ............................................................................................ 11
Lesson 1-1: Hardware, Software, and Information Technology (IT)................................... 12
Lesson 1-2: Computer Overview......................................................................................... 14
Lesson 1-3: The Front of a Computer and Peripheral Devices............................................ 16
Lesson 1-4: The Inside of a Computer................................................................................. 18
Lesson 1-5: The Back of a Computer (Ports) ...................................................................... 20
Lesson 1-6: System Bus and Expansion Cards.................................................................... 22
Lesson 1-7: Memory Cache................................................................................................. 24
Lesson 1-8: Computer Performance .................................................................................... 26
Lesson 1-9: Buying a Desktop Computer............................................................................ 28
Lesson 1-10: Buying a Notebook Computer ....................................................................... 30
Lesson 1-11: Upgrading a Computer ................................................................................... 32
Chapter One Review............................................................................................................ 34
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware........................................................................ 37
Lesson 2-1: Central Processing Unit (CPU) ........................................................................ 38
Lesson 2-2: Memory............................................................................................................ 40
Lesson 2-3: RAM and ROM................................................................................................ 42
Lesson 2-4: Mouse............................................................................................................... 44
Lesson 2-5: Keyboard.......................................................................................................... 46
Lesson 2-6: Digital Cameras and Web Cams....................................................................... 48
Lesson 2-7: Other Input Devices ......................................................................................... 50
Lesson 2-8: Monitor ............................................................................................................ 52
Lesson 2-9: Graphics Card .................................................................................................. 54
Lesson 2-10: Printer Basics ................................................................................................. 56
Lesson 2-11: Types of Printers............................................................................................. 58
Lesson 2-12: Sound and Speakers ....................................................................................... 60
Lesson 2-13: Modem........................................................................................................... 62
Lesson 2-14: Input/Output Devices ..................................................................................... 63
Lesson 2-15: Hard Drive ..................................................................................................... 64
Lesson 2-16: Hard Drive Maintenance................................................................................ 66
Lesson 2-17: CD-ROM Drive ............................................................................................. 68
Lesson 2-18: DVD Drive..................................................................................................... 70
Lesson 2-19: Floppy Drive .................................................................................................. 72
Lesson 2-20: Zip and Jaz Drives ......................................................................................... 73
Lesson 2-21: Other Storage Devices.................................................................................... 74
Lesson 2-22: Formatting a Disk .......................................................................................... 75
Chapter Two Review........................................................................................................... 76
Chapter Three: Understanding Software......................................................................81
4 Microsoft Windows XP
2002 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 3-1: Understanding Graphical User Interfaces.........................................................82
Lesson 3-2: Types of Software.............................................................................................83
Lesson 3-3: Operating Systems............................................................................................84
Lesson 3-4: Word Processing...............................................................................................86
Lesson 3-5: Spreadsheets.....................................................................................................87
Lesson 3-6: Databases..........................................................................................................88
Lesson 3-7: Presentation Software.......................................................................................90
Lesson 3-8: Accounting .......................................................................................................91
Lesson 3-9: Web Browsing..................................................................................................92
Lesson 3-10: Web Authoring ...............................................................................................93
Lesson 3-11: Programming Languages................................................................................94
Lesson 3-12: Systems Development ....................................................................................96
Chapter Three Review .........................................................................................................98
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP................................................................101
Lesson 4-1: Starting and Logging On to Windows ............................................................102
Lesson 4-2: Understanding the Windows XP Screen.........................................................104
Lesson 4-3: Using the Mouse: Pointing, Clicking, and Double-clicking...........................106
Lesson 4-4: Using the Mouse: Dragging and Dropping.....................................................108
Lesson 4-5: Using the Mouse: Right-clicking ...................................................................110
Lesson 4-6: Using the Keyboard........................................................................................112
Lesson 4-7: Exiting Windows and Turning off Your Computer.........................................114
Chapter Four Review.........................................................................................................116
Chapter Five: Working with a Window..........................................................................119
Lesson 5-1: Starting a Program..........................................................................................120
Lesson 5-2: Understanding the Parts of a Window............................................................122
Lesson 5-3: Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring a Window......................................124
Lesson 5-4: Closing a Window..........................................................................................126
Lesson 5-5: Moving a Window..........................................................................................127
Lesson 5-6: Sizing a Window............................................................................................128
Lesson 5-7: Switching Between Windows.........................................................................130
Chapter Five Review..........................................................................................................132
Chapter Six: Working with Programs........................................................................... 135
Lesson 6-1: How to Use Menus.........................................................................................136
Lesson 6-2: How to Use Toolbars......................................................................................138
Lesson 6-3: Filling Out a Dialog Box................................................................................140
Lesson 6-4: Entering Text in the WordPad Program..........................................................142
Lesson 6-5: Editing Text ....................................................................................................144
Lesson 6-6: Saving and Opening a File .............................................................................146
Lesson 6-7: Selecting, Replacing, and Deleting Text.........................................................148
Lesson 6-8: Using Undo ....................................................................................................150
Lesson 6-9: Printing a File.................................................................................................151
Lesson 6-10: Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text..............................................................152
Lesson 6-11: Changing the Font Type and Size.................................................................154
Lesson 6-12: Using Bold, Italics, and Underline ...............................................................156
Lesson 6-13: Changing Paragraph Alignment ...................................................................157
Lesson 6-14: Getting Help by Contents.............................................................................158
Lesson 6-15: Getting Help with the Help Index and Search..............................................160
Lesson 6-16: Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations ........................................162
Chapter Six Review...........................................................................................................164
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders ........................................................171
Lesson 7-1: Understanding Storage Devices, Folders, and Files .......................................172
Lesson 7-2: Using My Computer to See Whats in Your Computer ..................................174
Lesson 7-3: Opening a Folder............................................................................................176
Introduction 5
Your Organizations Name Here
Lesson 7-4: Creating and Renaming a Folder.................................................................... 178
Lesson 7-5: Copying, Moving, and Deleting a Folder....................................................... 180
Lesson 7-6: Opening, Renaming, and Deleting a File ....................................................... 182
Lesson 7-7: Copying and Moving a File ........................................................................... 184
Lesson 7-8: Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin............................... 186
Lesson 7-9: A Closer Look at Files and Folders ................................................................ 188
Lesson 7-10: Changing How Information is Displayed..................................................... 190
Lesson 7-11: Selecting Multiple Files and Folders............................................................ 192
Lesson 7-12: Finding a File Using the Search Companion ............................................... 194
Lesson 7-13: Using the Folders Pane (Windows Explorer)............................................... 196
Lesson 7-14: File Management Using the Folders Pane.................................................... 198
Chapter Seven Review....................................................................................................... 200
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet .......................................................................207
Lesson 8-1: Introduction to the Internet ............................................................................ 208
Lesson 8-2: Connecting to the Internet.............................................................................. 210
Lesson 8-3: Displaying a Specific Web Page .................................................................... 212
Lesson 8-4: Browse the Web ............................................................................................. 214
Lesson 8-5: Search the Web............................................................................................... 216
Lesson 8-6: Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing your Home Page ................. 218
Lesson 8-7: Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages ................................................... 220
Lesson 8-8: Saving Pictures and Files to Disk (Downloading) ......................................... 222
Lesson 8-9: Introduction to E-mail .................................................................................... 224
Lesson 8-10: Composing and Sending E-mail................................................................... 226
Lesson 8-11: Adding a Name to the Address Book ........................................................... 228
Lesson 8-12: Receiving E-mail.......................................................................................... 230
Lesson 8-13: Replying to a Message ................................................................................. 232
Lesson 8-14: Forwarding and Deleting a Message............................................................ 233
Chapter Eight Review........................................................................................................ 234
Index...................................................................................................................................239
Introduction
Welcome to CustomGuide: Computer Basics. CustomGuide courseware allows instructors to
create and print manuals that contain the specific lessons that best meet their students needs.
In other words, this book was designed and printed just for you.
Unlike most other computer-training courseware, each CustomGuide manual is uniquely
designed to be three books in one:
Step-by-step instructions make this manual great for use in an instructor-led class or as a
self-paced tutorial.
Detailed descriptions, illustrated diagrams, informative tables, and an index make this
manual suitable as a reference guide when you want to learn more about a topic or
process.
The handy Quick Reference box, found on the last page of each lesson, is great for when
you need to know how to do something quickly.
CustomGuide manuals are designed both for users who want to learn the basics of the
software and those who want to learn more advanced features.
Heres how a CustomGuide manual is organized:
Chapters
Each manual is divided into several chapters. Arent sure if youre ready for a chapter? Look
at the prerequisites that appear at the beginning of each chapter. They will tell you what you
should know before you start the chapter.
Lessons
Each chapter contains several lessons on related topics. Each lesson explains a new skill or
topic and contains a step-by-step exercise to give you hands-on-experience.
Chapter Reviews
A review is included at the end of each chapter to help you absorb and retain all that you have
learned. This review contains a brief recap of everything covered in the chapters lessons, a
quiz to assess how much youve learned (and which lessons you might want to look over
again), and a homework assignment where you can put your new skills into practice. If youre
having problems with a homework exercise, you can always refer back to the lessons in the
chapter to get help.
8 Microsoft Windows XP
2002 CustomGuide, Inc.
How to Use the Lessons
Every topic is presented on two facing pages, so that you can concentrate on the lesson
without having to worry about turning the page. Since this is a hands-on course, each lesson
contains an exercise with step-by-step instructions for you to follow.
To make learning easier, every exercise follows certain conventions:
Anything youre supposed to click, drag, or press appears like this.
Anything youre supposed to type appears like this.
This book never assumes you know where (or what) something is. The first time youre
told to click something, a picture of what youre supposed to click appears either in the
margin next to the step or in the illustrations at the beginning of the lesson.
Lesson 4-2: Formatting Values
Figure 4-3
The Numbers tab of the
Format Cells dialog box.
Figure 4-4
The Expense Report
worksheet values before
being formatted.
Figure 4-5
The Expense Report
worksheet values after being
formatted.
Select a number
category
Select a number
format
Preview of the
selected number
format
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5
In this lesson, you will learn how to apply number formats. Applying number formatting changes
how values are displayedit doesnt change the actual information in any way. Excel is often
smart enough to apply some number formatting automatically. For example, if you use a dollar
sign to indicate currency (such as $548.67), Excel will automatically apply the currency number
format for you.
The Formatting toolbar has five buttons (Currency, Percent, Comma, Increase Decimal, and
Decrease Decimal) you can use to quickly apply common number formats. If none of these buttons
has what youre looking for, you need to use the Format Cells dialog box by selecting Format
Cells fromthe menu and clicking the Number tab. Formatting numbers with the Format Cells
dialog box isnt as fast as using the toolbar, but it gives you more precision and formatting options.
Well use both methods in this lesson.
Comma Style
button
1. 1. Select the cell range D5:D17 and click the Comma Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
Excel adds a hundreds separator (the comma) and two decimal places to the selected cell
range.
You can also format
values by using the
Formatting toolbar
or by selecting
Format Cells
from the menu and
clicking the
Number tab.
24 24 Microsoft Excel 2000
Lesson 4-2: Formatting Values
Figure 4-3
The Numbers tab of the
Format Cells dialog box.
Figure 4-4
The Expense Report
worksheet values before
being formatted.
Figure 4-5
The Expense Report
worksheet values after being
formatted.
Select a number
category
Select a number
format
Preview of the
selected number
format
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4 Figure 4-5
In this lesson, you will learn how to apply number formats. Applying number formatting changes
how values are displayedit doesnt change the actual information in any way. Excel is often
smart enough to apply some number formatting automatically. For example, if you use a dollar
sign to indicate currency (such as $548.67), Excel will automatically apply the currency number
format for you.
The Formatting toolbar has five buttons (Currency, Percent, Comma, Increase Decimal, and
Decrease Decimal) you can use to quickly apply common number formats. If none of these buttons
has what youre looking for, you need to use the Format Cells dialog box by selecting Format
Cells fromthe menu and clicking the Number tab. Formatting numbers with the Format Cells
dialog box isnt as fast as using the toolbar, but it gives you more precision and formatting options.
Well use both methods in this lesson.
Comma Style
button
1. 1. Select the cell range D5:D17 and click the Comma Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
Excel adds a hundreds separator (the comma) and two decimal places to the selected cell
range.
You can also format
values by using the
Formatting toolbar
or by selecting
Format Cells
from the menu and
clicking the
Number tab.
24 24 Microsoft Excel 2000
Illustrations show what your
screen should look like as you
follow the lesson. They also
describe controls, dialog boxes,
and processes.
An easy-to-understand
introduction explains the task or
topic covered in the lesson and
what youll be doing in the
exercise.
Clear step-by-step instructions
guide you through the exercise.
Anything you need to click
appears like this.
Icons and pictures appear in the
margin, showing you what to
click or look for.
Tips and traps appear in the
margin.
Introduction 9
Your Organizations Name Here
When you see a keyboard instruction like press <Ctrl> + <B>, you should press and
hold the first key (<Ctrl> in this example) while you press the second key (<B> in this
example). Then, after youve pressed both keys, you can release them.
There is usually more than one way to do something in Word. The exercise explains the
most common method of doing something, while the alternate methods appear in the
margin. Use whatever approach feels most comfortable for you.
Important terms appear in italics the first time theyre presented.
Whenever something is especially difficult or can easily go wrong, youll see a:
NOTE:
immediately after the step, warning you of pitfalls that you could encounter if youre not
careful.
Our exclusive Quick Reference box appears at the end of every lesson. You can use it to
review the skills youve learned in the lesson and as a handy referencewhen you need
to know how to do something fast and dont need to step through the sample exercises.
Currency Style
button
Other Ways to Apply
Currency Formatting:
Type the dollar sign ($)
before you enter a number.
2. 2. Click cell A4 and type Annual Sales.
The numbers in this column should be formatted as currency.
3. 3. Press <Enter> to confirm your entry and overwrite the existing
information.
4. 4. Select the cell range G5:G17 and click the Currency Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
A dollar sign and two decimal places are added to the values in the selected cell range.
5. 5. Select the cell range F5:F17 and click the Percent Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
Excel applies percentage style number formatting to the information in the Tax column.
Notice there isnt a decimal placeExcel rounds any decimal places to the nearest whole
number. That isnt suitable hereyou want to include a decimal place to accurately show
the exact tax rate.
6. 6. With the Tax cell range still selected, click the Increase Decimal
button on the Formatting toolbar.
Excel adds one decimal place to the information in the tax rate column.
Next, you want to change the date format in the date column. There isnt a Format Date
button on the Formatting toolbar, so you will have to format the date column using the
Format Cells dialog box.
The Formatting toolbar is great for quickly applying the most common formatting options to
cells, but it doesnt offer every available formatting option. To see and/or use every possible
character formatting option you have to use the Format Cells dialog box. You can open the
Format Cells dialog box by either selecting Format Cells from the menu or right-clicking
and selecting Format Cells from the shortcut menu.
7. 7. With the Date cell range still selected, select Format Cells from
the menu, select 4-Mar-97 from the Type list box and click OK.
Formatting a Worksheet 25 25
Table 4-2: Number Formatting Buttons on the Formatting Toolbar
Button Name Example Formatting
Currency
$1,000.00 Adds a dollar sign, comma, and two decimal places.
Percent
100% Displays the value as a percentage with no decimal places.
Comma
1,000 Separates thousands with a comma.
Increase Decimal
1000.00 Increases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
Decrease Decimal
1000.0 Decreases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
Quick Reference
To Apply Number
Formatting:
Select the cell or cell range
you want to format and click
the appropriate number
formatting button(s) on the
Formatting toolbar.
Or...
Select the cell or cell range you
want to format, select Format
Cells from the menu, click
the Number tab, and specify
the number formatting you want
to apply.
Or...
Select the cell or cell range you
want to format, right-click the
cell or cell range and select
Format Cells from the shortcut
menu, click the Number tab,
and specify the number
formatting you want to apply.
Thats all there is to formatting valuesnot as difficult as you thought it would be, was it? The
following table lists the five buttons on the Formatting toolbar you can use to apply number
formatting to the values in your worksheets.
Currency Style
button
Other Ways to Apply
Currency Formatting:
Type the dollar sign ($)
before you enter a number.
2. 2. Click cell A4 and type Annual Sales.
The numbers in this column should be formatted as currency.
3. 3. Press <Enter> to confirm your entry and overwrite the existing
information.
4. 4. Select the cell range G5:G17 and click the Currency Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
A dollar sign and two decimal places are added to the values in the selected cell range.
5. 5. Select the cell range F5:F17 and click the Percent Style button on
the Formatting toolbar.
Excel applies percentage style number formatting to the information in the Tax column.
Notice there isnt a decimal placeExcel rounds any decimal places to the nearest whole
number. That isnt suitable hereyou want to include a decimal place to accurately show
the exact tax rate.
6. 6. With the Tax cell range still selected, click the Increase Decimal
button on the Formatting toolbar.
Excel adds one decimal place to the information in the tax rate column.
Next, you want to change the date format in the date column. There isnt a Format Date
button on the Formatting toolbar, so you will have to format the date column using the
Format Cells dialog box.
The Formatting toolbar is great for quickly applying the most common formatting options to
cells, but it doesnt offer every available formatting option. To see and/or use every possible
character formatting option you have to use the Format Cells dialog box. You can open the
Format Cells dialog box by either selecting Format Cells from the menu or right-clicking
and selecting Format Cells from the shortcut menu.
7. 7. With the Date cell range still selected, select Format Cells from
the menu, select 4-Mar-97 from the Type list box and click OK.
Formatting a Worksheet 25 25
Table 4-2: Number Formatting Buttons on the Formatting Toolbar
Button Name Example Formatting
Currency
$1,000.00 Adds a dollar sign, comma, and two decimal places.
Percent
100% Displays the value as a percentage with no decimal places.
Comma
1,000 Separates thousands with a comma.
Increase Decimal
1000.00 Increases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
Decrease Decimal
1000.0 Decreases the number of digits after the decimal point by one
Quick Reference
To Apply Number
Formatting:
Select the cell or cell range
you want to format and click
the appropriate number
formatting button(s) on the
Formatting toolbar.
Or...
Select the cell or cell range you
want to format, select Format
Cells from the menu, click
the Number tab, and specify
the number formatting you want
to apply.
Or...
Select the cell or cell range you
want to format, right-click the
cell or cell range and select
Format Cells from the shortcut
menu, click the Number tab,
and specify the number
formatting you want to apply.
Thats all there is to formatting valuesnot as difficult as you thought it would be, was it? The
following table lists the five buttons on the Formatting toolbar you can use to apply number
formatting to the values in your worksheets.
Anything you need to type
appears like this.
Whenever there is more than
one way to do something, the
most common method is
presented in the exercise and
the alternate methods are
presented in the margin.
Tables provide summaries of the
terms, toolbar buttons, or
shortcuts covered in the lesson.
CustomGuides exclusive Quick
Reference is great for when you
need to know how to do
something fast. It also lets you
review what youve learned in
the lesson.
Chapter One: The
Essentials
Chapter Objectives:
Learn the difference between hardware and software
Discover the various types of computers and their roles
See whats on the front, back, and inside of a computer
Learn about the various ports on a computer
Understand what determines a computers performance
See what you should look for when buying a computer
Computers are useful: they help us write letters, find information on the Internet, and
even create our own music CDs. Some people love computersthey speak a different
language that includes nonsensical words like IP Address and Gigabytes. But most of us
are somewhat clueless when it comes to computers. We know how to turn our computer
how, how to surf the Internet (maybe), and maybe write a quick letter on a word
processor. But thats about itwe have to ask our kids or friends for help when
something goes wrong, which is all the time.
This guide takes some of the mystery out of computers. In this chapter well take a good
hard look at a computer from the front, back, and yes, even inside. Youll understand
what all those confusing ports on the back of the computer are for and why its important
for your computer to have a fast CPU. Best of all, well explain all of this in human
terms, so you wont need an engineering degree to understand everything.
Ready to tackle your computer? Greatturn the page and lets get started
; Prerequisites
A desire to learn about
computers.
The ability to read.
12 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-1: Hardware,
Software, and Information
Technology (IT)
Your desk probably contains a jumble of equipment commonly known as a computer. But
what is all that stuff? What does a computer do? Unlike many other tools or appliances
that have definite purposes, a computer can do any number of things:
Write letters
Browse the Internet
Send e-mail messages to people around the world
Play games
Help you balance your budget
Figure 1-1
A typical computer setup.
Figure 1-2
Comparing a TV to a PC.
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Chapter One: The Essentials 13
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A typical computer
includes the following:
System unit
Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Speakers
Printer
Hardware:
A computer item you can
physically see or touch.
Software:
A computer program that
tells computer hardware
how to operate.
IT:
Information Technology is
the broad subject related
to computers and
managing and processing
information.
and thats not even the beginning of what you can do with a computer!
Two basic things make up a computer: hardware and software. You simply cant have one
without the other. All of parts of a computer that you can physically see or touch are
called hardware. Hardware includes the computers monitor, case, keyboard, mouse, and
printer. Computer programs that tell hardware how to operate are called software. You
may have used software such as Microsoft Excel or Corel WordPerfect in the past. So
breathe a giant sigh of reliefyou dont have to know how to program a computer to use
one. A computer programmer has already done the work for you by writing the program
(software). All you have to do is tell the software what youre trying to do, and the
software then directs the work of the hardware.
Figure 1-1 shows an example of a typical setup and its components, but dont worry if
your computer setup is different. More than likely, you have all the parts that you need,
and those parts are properly connected. In any case, Table 1-1: Parts of a Computer
provides more details about each individual component.
IT, short for Information Technology, is the broad subject related to computers and
managing and processing information, especially within large organizations. Many large
companies have departments full of computer techies called IT departments.
Table 1-1: Parts of a Computer
Component Description
Case or System
Unit
The main computer box, technically known as the system unit, is the most
important part of computer. It contains the guts and brains of the computer
something well talk about later. The system unit contains a lot of holes or ports
where you plug in the rest of the computer system.
Monitor The monitor resembles a television set, and is where the computer displays
information.
Keyboard The keyboard is the thing you type on to tell your computer what to do.
Mouse Like the keyboard, the mouse is another input device that you use to
communicate with your computer.
Speakers Most computers can make sounds, just like a stereo system. In fact, you can
even listen to audio CDs on most computers!
Printer A printer is where a computer writes down information or output, onto paper, or
a hardcopy.
Your computer setup
may differ from the
one shown in Figure
1-1. For example, your
computer might have
freestanding speakers
or a printer.
14 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-2: Computer Overview
Computers are not really as complicated as they initially seem. You just have to learn the
basic functions of the various parts, and then you can separate them into three categories:
Input
Any device that lets you talk to the computer (such as a mouse or keyboard).
Process/Storage
Main functions of a computer, which happen inside the computer case. Not
surprisingly, the Central Processing Unit (CPU) does all the processing; the storage
function is handled by any number of drives (hard, floppy, Zip, tape-backup,
CD/DVD-ROM) or disks (compact discs or floppy diskettes).
Output
Any device that lets the computer talk to you (such as a monitor or speakers).
If you're having trouble understanding this input/output stuff, think of your home
television (TV) set. Televisions and computers are similar in several ways:
The remote control is comparable to the mouse (or any other input device such as a
mouse or joystick).
The cable box (while not nearly as powerful as a computer) is similar to a computer
in that it can process information (such as deciphering which channel you want to
watch) and, if programmable, store information (such as when to show the film using
a built-in timer).
The TV displays the channel much like a monitor displays information.
Figure 1-3
How a computer works.
Figure 1-4
Comparing a TV to a PC.
A remote control
communicates with a
television much like a
mouse communicates
with a computer.
Process/Storage
The cable box deciphers which
channel you want to watch; the
CPU translates your instructions
(via software) to the hardware.
Input
The remote control talks to the TV;
the mouse and the keyboard talk to
the computer.
Output
The television displays the
channel; the monitor displays the
results.
Input
You communicate with the
computer via an input device
such as a mouse, a keyboard,
or a joystick.
Process/Storage
The computer processes data,
makes calculations, directs
the work of the hardware, and
stores your files.
Output
The computer communicates
its results to you via an output
device such as a monitor, a
printer, or speakers.
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Chapter One: The Essentials 15
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
The Basic Computer
Processes Are:
1. Input
2. Processing
3. Output
Different Types of
Computers Include:
Mainframes
PCs
Macs
Servers
Laptops
Palmtops or PDAs
There are several different types of computer systems out there. Here's a very brief
description of the most common ones
Table 1-2: Types of Computers
Computer Description
Mainframe
A mainframe is a big, powerful, expensive computer that can support many users at
the same time. Large businesses and organizations use mainframes.
Capacity: Enormous - the capacity of several hundred or even thousands of PCs
Speed: Very fast - much, much faster than a PC
Cost: Very, very expensive - can usually only be afforded by large organizations
Users: Only used by large businesses and organizations
PC
A PC is a personal computer, designed by IBM way back in 1981. Many different
companies make PCs, but all of them are IBM-compatible. What this means,
according to Bill Gates, is that they will all run Microsoft Windows.
Capacity: Average hard disk size is 20 GB to 80 GB
Speed: Fast. Average speed is from 1 GHz to 3 GHz
Cost: Fairly inexpensive - under $1,000 - and getting cheaper every day!
Users: Just about everyone uses a PC! Homes, offices, schools
Mac
Developed by Apple, a Macintosh is a computer, but it is NOT a PC. Macs have a
different operating system and use their own software and hardware.
Capacity: Average hard disk size is 20 GB to 80 GB
Speed: Fast. Average speed is from 500 MHz to 2 GHz
Cost: Fairly inexpensive, but usually more than an equivalent PC
Users: Just about everyone, especially in the education and design fields
Networked
Computer
A network is a group of computers that are connected so that they can share
equipment and information. Most people on a network use workstations, which are
simply PCs that are connected to the network. A server is a central computer where
users on the network can save their files and information.
Capacity: (Workstation) Same as a PC, only needs an inexpensive network card
(Server) Greater than a PC, often more than 100 GB
Speed: (Workstation) Same as a PC
(Server) Generally faster than a PC, may use multiple CPUs
Cost:(Workstation) Same as a PC
(Sever) More expensive than a PC but not as much as a mainframe
Users: (Workstation) People in a networked office or organization
(Server) Generally a network administrator or engineer
Laptop
A laptop, or notebook, is a lighter and more portable version of a PC or Mac that
can run on batteries.
Capacity: Average hard disk size is 10 GB to 40 GB
Speed: Fast, but slightly less than a PC. Average speed is from 700 MHz to 2 GHz
Cost: Fairly inexpensive, but more than an equivalent PC
Users: People on the move, especially business people and students
Palmtop/PDA
A PDA (Personal Data Assistant) is a handheld computer that is generally used to
keep track of appointments and addresses.
Capacity: Much small than a PC - 8 MB to 64 MB of storage space
Speed: Much slower than a PC - 8 MHz to 266 MHz
Cost: Expensive when compared to the capacities of a PC
Users: Business people and others who need to be organized
16 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-3: The Front of a
Computer and Peripheral Devices
The system unit or computer case is that plastic box that sits under your monitor or desk
and is covered with slots, buttons, and lights. Computer cases come in several shapes and
sizes. Older computers often have the horizontal desktop case, which has gradually been
replaced by the vertical tower case. Manufacturers are now phasing out the tallest towers
because the compact size of the smallest tower, known as a mini-tower, is attractive to
consumers.
Everything outside of and connected to the system unit is called peripherals. You can add
dozens of peripherals and accessories to make it more useful and fun. Common
peripherals include printers, scanners, external hard drives, CD-ROM drives, and digital
cameras. Many peripherals are considered to be input devices, because they allow you to
talk to your computer by inputting information. Other peripherals are output devices,
because they let your computer talk back to you. One more thing: all peripherals are
considered to be part of a computers hardware.
Table 1-3: Whats on the Front or Outside of a Computer Case?
Item Description
System Unit or
Computer Case
A plastic or metal case with slots, buttons, and lights in the front and holes
in the back. This is the most important part of a computer because it
contains the Central Processing Unit (CPU). The system unit directs the
computer, performs calculations, and stores information.
Floppy Drive Reads and writes to 3-inch floppy disks. A floppy disk can store about
1.5 MB of informationabout as much as a novel.
Figure 1-5
The front of a computer
case.
Scanner
Speakers
Keyboard
Mouse
Monitor
Printer
CD-ROM or
DVD player
Floppy drive
Figure 1-5
System unit
Chapter One: The Essentials 17
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Components Visible from
the Outside of the System
Unit May Include:
Floppy drive
CD-ROM or DVD drive
Zip drive or tape backup
Keyboard
Mouse
Scanner
Monitor
Speakers
Printer
Item Description
Hard Drive
(Not shown)
The computers main, long-term store device. Unlike floppy disks and
CD-ROMs, you cannot remove a hard disk.
CD-ROM or DVD Drive CD-ROMs and DVDs for your computer can store lots of information and
look exactly like CDs for your stereo and DVDs for your home DVD
player. In fact, you can listen to audio CDs on a CD-ROM drive and even
watch DVD movies on a DVD drive!
The only real difference between a CD-ROM and a DVD is how much
information they can store. A CD-ROM can store approximately 650MB
(megabytes) of information, while a DVD can store much moreup to
17 GB (gigabytes ) or 17,000MB on a double-sided DVD.
Most CD-ROMs and DVD are read-only, meaning you cant write
information to them. You can buy special CD-ROM and DVD drives that
can write or burn information to special CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, and DVD-
RW discs.
Zip Drive
(Not shown)
A special type of disk drive that can read and write to Zip disks. A Zip disk
is a lot like a floppy disk, although they are faster and can store more
informationfrom 100 to 250MB (megabytes).
Tape Backup
(Not shown)
A device that you can use to store backups, or copy, of the information on
a computers hard drive.
Keyboard The keyboard is the thing you type on to tell your computer what to do.
Mouse Like the keyboard, the mouse is another input device that you use to
communicate with your computer.
I
n
p
u
t

D
e
v
i
c
e
s
Scanner Scanners work like photocopiers, except the image is translated into a
digital image in your computer rather than copied onto paper.
Monitor The monitor resembles a television set, and is where the computer
displays information.
Speakers If visible, your computer speakers are no different than those on a stereo
system (or at least a cheap stereo system) and allow your computer to
play sounds.
O
u
t
p
u
t

D
e
v
i
c
e
s
Printer A printer is where a computer writes down information or output, onto
paper, or a hardcopy.
18 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-4: The Inside of a
Computer
Now that you know whats on the outside, lets crank open that mysterious computer case
and look inside. But no tools requiredweve done all the work for you. Just compare
Figure 1-6 with Table 1-4: Whats Inside a Computer Case? to see whats important.
Table 1-4: Whats Inside a Computer Case?
Item Description
Motherboard The main piece of circuitry in a computer. Everything connects to or is wired
to the motherboard.
Central Processing
Unit (CPU)
The computers brain or heart, the CPU is a computers main chip. The CPU
is really nothing more than an incredibly fast and powerful calculate.
Random Access
Memory (RAM)
A computers temporary storage place, where it gets its work done. For
example, when you use a word processor to type a letter, the letter is stored
in the computers memory.
ROM-BIOS A computers ROM-BIOS (stands for Read Only Memory Basic
Input/Output System) is a special chip with instructions for the computer to
communicate with other hardware parts.
Expansion Slot An expansion slot lets you add more features and capabilities to a computer
by plugging in expansion cards.
Figure 1-6
The side view of the guts
of a tower case.
Everything plugs into a
computers
motherboard.
Figure 1-6
Power supply Central Processing Unit (CPU)
CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive
Floppy disk
drive
Hard disk drive
(HDD)
Ports
Expansion
cards
Expansion
slots
Random-access memory (RAM)
Motherboard
ROM-BOIS
Chapter One: The Essentials 19
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Components Inside the
System Unit May Include:
Motherboard
CPU (Central Processing
Unit)
Random Access Memory
(RAM)
ROM-BIOS
Expansion slots and
cards
PCMCIA cards (laptops
only)
Item Description
Expansion Card A card that allows you to expand your computers capabilities, such as a
modem card, a network card, a video card, or a sound card.
PCMCIA Cards Notebook computers are too small to use expansion cards, so they use
special credit-card sized PCMCIA cards instead. You plug in a PCMCIA card,
or PC Card, into a notebook computer to give it more features and
capabilities. Nobodys going test on this, but PCMCIA stands for Personal
Computer Memory Card International Association.
20 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-5: The Back of a
Computer (Ports)
When you look at the back of a computer, you may feel a bit overwhelmed by all the slots
and holes. Fortunately, manufacturers have added some fairly standard icons and color
coding to help you identify what should be plugged into your computer and where.
Before long, youll recognize those icons and colors, and the configuration wont seem so
mysterious. Its rather like hooking up cable and a DVD player to the back of your
televisionunless youre one of those people who just wait for the cable guy to take care
of that heinous task. In any case, this lesson will review each item piece by piece so you
wont get completely lost.
Before we begin, lets define a couple of terms. The first thing youll notice is that the
back of your computer has lots of holes. Those holes are called (depending on who you
ask) jacks, ports, or connectors. You may notice that some of the connectors have holes,
but some have what look like stickpins (which are aptly named pins). The ones that have
holes are called female connectors; the ones that have pins are called male connectors.
Lets leave it at that.
Now lets begin. Compare Figure 1-7 to Table 1-5: Whats on the Back of a Computer
Case? The back of your computer may be arranged differently but should include the
same elements.
Figure 1-7
The (somewhat confusing)
back of a computer case.
You may feel a bit
overwhelmed the first
time you look at the
back of a computer.
Figure 1-7
Power receptacle
Keyboard port Mouse port
Line-out jack (speakers/headphone)
Line-in jack
Microphone jack
Air vents
Joystick port
Parallel port (printer)
Serial port (COM1)
Expansion spaces
Phone jack Wall jack
USB ports
Video (monitor)
On/Off switch
Serial port (COM2)
Ethernet connector
Chapter One: The Essentials 21
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Ports on the Back of a
Computer Include:
Keyboard
Mouse
Serial or COM
Printer or parallel
USB
Video or monitor
Line in, line out,
microphone
Joystick or game
Phone or modem
Ethernet or network
SCSI
Firewire
Table 1-5: Whats on the Back of a Computer Case?
Port Icon Description
Keyboard & Mouse
The keyboard and mouse jacks look identical on most
PCs, so look for colors and icons to help you with plugging
in these devices.
Some mice and keyboards use USB ports. Older mice
may use a serial port.
Serial or COM
Serial (or COM) ports are a very versatile type of port.
Some of the things you can plug into a serial port include:
a mouse, modem, scanner, or digital camera. Most
computers have two serial ports: COM1 and COM2.
Parallel or Printer
You plug your printer into (surprise, surprise) the parallel
(or printer) port. Many newer printers may use a USB port.
USB
Designed to replace older Serial and Parallel ports, the
USB (Universal Serial Bus) can connect computers with a
number of devices, such as printers, keyboards, mice,
scanners, digital cameras, PDAs, and more. Better yet, the
USB port supports plug-and-play, so you can simply plug
in a USB device and start using it.
USB 1 ports can transfer information at a speed up to
12 Mbps (Megabytes per Second). Newer USB 2 ports can
transfer information at a speed up to 480 Mbps. Most
computers come with two USB ports.
Video or Monitor
You plug your monitor into the video port.
Line Out
/
Plug in your speakers or headphone into the Line Out jack.
Line In
The Line In jack allows you to listen to your computer
using a stereo system.
Microphone
You can plug a microphone into this jack to record sounds
on your computer.
Joystick or Game
If you have a joystick, musical (MIDI) keyboard, or other
gaming device, this is where you plug it in.
Phone or Modem
The phone or modem jack is where you plug your
computer into a phone line.
Network or Ethernet
< >
You can connect your computer to a network by plugging
in an Ethernet cable in this port.
SCSI
A SCSI port is one of the fastest ways to connect a hard
drive, CD-ROM drive, or other device to a computer.
Firewire
A FireWire (IEEE 1394 or i.LINK) port lets you connect
such devices as hard disks and digital camcorders to a
computer. A FireWire port can transfer information at a
speed up to 400 Mbps (Megabytes per Second).
22 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-6: System Bus and
Expansion Cards
Youre furious! You just bought an expensive digital camcorder only to find out that it
cant connect to your computer because your computer apparently doesnt have a
Firewire port. Dont worryyou can easily add a Firewire port to the computer by
buying an expansion card.
Expansion cards allow you to add more gizmos and capabilities to a computer. You can
also use expansion cards to replace a component of a computer that breaks, like a
modem. Expansion cards plug into expansion slots on a computers motherboard.
A computer talks to its expansion cardsand everything else on the motherboard
through its bus. A computers bus is an electronic pathway that carries information
between devices in a computer. Two factors determine how information flows through the
bus: the bus width and the bus speed.
Bus Width
The bus width determines how many lanes there are on a computers electronic
highway. Actually, the bus width isnt measured in lanes, but in bits. The wider the
bus, the more information can travel across it at the same time.
Bus Speed
The bus speed determines how fast information can travel through the bus. The
higher the bus speed, the faster information can travel through it. Bus speed is
measured in MHz.
Figure 1-8
Expansion cards plug
directly into a computers
motherboard.
Figure 1-9
Most computers have
around six expansion
slots.
Expansion cards plug
directly into the
motherboard.
Expansion
slots
Highway
The number of lanes
determines how many cars can
use the highway at once
The speed limit determines
how fast cars can drive on the
highway
System Bus
The bus width determines
how much information can
flow along the bus at a time
The bus speed determines
how fast information can travel
Chapter One: The Essentials 23
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
An expansion card plugs
into a computers
motherboard to give it
additional capabilities.
A computer
communicates with its
expansion cards and
devices through the
system bus.
How much information
flows through the system
bus depends on the bus
width and bus speed.
There are several bus
types:
1. ISA
2. PCI
3. AGP
As if this werent confusing enough there are several bus types out there. They
include:
ISA
The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) is the original, slowest, and oldest type of
bus. The ISA bus has a width of 16 bits and a speed of 8 MHz. The ISA bus is going
the way of the dinosaurs 8 tracks and is no longer found on newer computers.
PCI
The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus is the main bus found in newer
computers. The PCI bus can have a width of 32 or 64 bits. The PCI bus supports
Plug and Play, which lets you add new devices to a computer without a complicated
installation process.
AGP
An Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) is a blazingly fast bus that is currently only
used for video cards. The AGP port has a width of 64 bits and supports Plug and
Play.
So what kind of expansion cards are out there? Here are some of the more common
expansion cards that you may come across
Table 1-6: Common Types of Expansion Cards
Expansion Card Description
Modem
A modem allows computers to exchange information through ordinary
telephone lines. Almost all computer already come with built-in modems, so
you would probably only want to add a modem expansion card if the original
modem in a computer breaks.
Network
A network interface card (NIC) is an expansion card that connects a computer
to other computers on a network.
Video or Graphics
A video card or adapter is what generates the images and text displayed on a
monitor. Computers come with a built-in video card, but some people like to
upgrade their original video card with faster, more powerful video cards.
Sound
A sound card lets a computer play and record sounds, just like a home stereo
system.
Additional Port(s)
You can use expansion cards to add additional ports to a computer, such as
the newer Firewire or USB 2 ports.
24 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-7: Memory Cache
A memory cache increases a computers performance by storing the most recently used
data. There are two types of cache:
Internal Cache (also called primary or L1 cache)
When the computer needs data it first looks in the internal cache. The internal cache
is inside the CPU and is the fastest possible way for the computer to get information.
The internal cache can normally only contain a very small amount of information.
External Cache (also called secondary or L2 cache)
If the computer doesnt find the data in the internal cache, it then looks in the
external cache. The external cache is slower than the internal cache, but much faster
than the normal RAM memory. The external cache normally holds much more
information than the internal cache, but still not as much as the main memory
(RAM).
Figure 1-10
An illustration of how a
computer searches for
information in a memory
cache.
Figure 1-11
An illustration of how a
police officer looks for a
gun in a weapons cache.
I In nt te er rn na al l
C Ca ac ch he e
E Ex xt te er rn na al l
C Ca ac ch he e
R RA AM M
1. The computer looks
for data in the
internal cache first.
This is the fastest
way the computer
can get information.
3. If the computer
cant find what it
needs in the
internal or external
cache, it looks in
the slower main
memory (RAM).
2. When the computer
does not find what
its looking for in
the internal cache,
it next looks in the
external cache.
H Ha ar rd d D Di is sk k
4. If the computer still
cant find what it
needs, it looks at
the slow as
molasses hard disk
cache.
Figure 1-10
1. Hopefully the officer
has his revolver in
his hand, ready for
action.
3. If the officer cant
find his revolver in
its holster, he next
runs back to see if
he left it in the
squad car.
2. If the officer cant
find his revolver in
his hand, he next
reaches down to
his holster for the
gun.
4. If the officer still
cant find his
revolver, his last
stop is a gun store.
Figure 1-11
Chapter One: The Essentials 25
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Memory Cache:
A special type of memory
that greatly increases a
computers performance.
26 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-8: Computer
Performance
Wondering why your neighbors computer is so much faster than your computer? There
are a number of reasons why a computer may run faster or slower. You learn about each
of them by reading Table 1-7: Factors that Affect Computer Performance.
A much more simple and abbreviated reason that your neighbors computer is faster than
your computer is probably because its newer.
Table 1-7: Factors that Affect Computer Performance
Factor Description
CPU Speed
Arguably the single most important factor that determines a computers
performance is the speed of its CPU. The speed of the CPU is measured in
megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz). The faster the CPU, the faster the
computer. The first PC in 1981 ran at 4.77 MHz, while todays computers can
run at speeds exceeding 3,000 MHz, or 3 GHz.
Amount of RAM
The amount of RAM, or memory, is another very important factor in a
computers performance. Generally, the more RAM a computer has the better
its performanceto a point; you usually wont see much of an improvement
after 1 GB of RAM.
Type of Video Card
Video cards have their own processor and memory, just like the computer
does. The faster the processor and the more memory a video card has, the
faster it can draw images on the monitor. Video card performance is especially
important if youre interested in playing newer, 3D computer games.
Figure 1-12
There are lots of factors
that determine how fast a
computer is. Most of them
are listed in Table 1-7:
Factors that Affect
Computer Performance.
Figure 1-12
Chapter One: The Essentials 27
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Computer Performance is
Determined By:
CPU speed
Amount of memory or
RAM
The type and speed of the
video card
A hard disks speed, free
space, and fragmentation
How many programs are
running, or multitasking,
at the same time
Factor Description
Hard Drive Speed
A hard drives average access time is how fast it can find information. Average
access time is measured in milliseconds (ms), or 1/1000 of a second. The
lower the access speed, the faster the hard drive. Most newer computer have
an average access time of 8 to 15 ms.
Another factor that determines hard drive is how fast it spins, in revolutions per
minute (rpms). Faster IDE hard drives may have speeds as fast as 7,200 rpm,
while high-end SCSI hard drives have speeds of 15,000 rpm.
Free Hard Disk
Space
Not only do you need a fast hard drive, you have to make sure that is has
plenty of free storage space. Microsoft Windows uses this hard disk space to
create a cache on the hard drive where it stores temporary information.
Hard Disk
Fragmentation
Normally a computer stores a file in the same location on a hard drive. Over
time, a hard drive can be come fragmented, and instead of storing a file in the
same location it begins storing parts of it all over. When the computer needs to
read a fragmented file, it must read several different parts of the hard drive
instead of just one. Defragmenting a hard drive puts the fragmented files back
together in one place. You should your computers hard drive about once a
month.
Multitasking
Considerations
Microsoft Windows can multitask, or run more than one program or task at a
timeprobably no different than your job. And, just like your job, the most
programs or tasks you throw at Windows, the longer it takes to complete each
one, and hence a drop in computer performance.
28 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-9: Buying a Desktop
Computer
Nothings worse than going to the computer store and listening to a know-it-all
salesperson explain why should buy the most expensive computer there because it has a
Radon graphics accelerator with 128 megabytes of RAM, which he thinks youre
definitely going to need.
Instead of listening to a nerdy computer salesperson, who may be on commission or a
sales quota, call one of your computer-geek friends or relatives, tell them how youre
going to use your computer, and what they would recommend. If a computer-geek friend
isnt readily available Table 1-8: Desktop Computer Buyers Guide will give you a good
idea of what you should look for when you buy a new computer. Just remember that
computer technology changes about as quickly as the latest fashions, so this information
will be meaningless after December 2003.
Table 1-8: Desktop Computer Buyers Guide
Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End, Gaming
CPU
Duron or Celeron at
2GHz
Pentium 4 at 2GHz,
Athlon at 1.7 GHz
Pentium 4 at 3GHz,
Athlon at 2.1GHz
RAM
256MB 512MB 1GB
Monitor
15-inch or 17-inch CRT 17-inch CRT or
15-inch flat panel/LCD
19-inch CRT or
17-inch flat panel/LCD
Figure 1-13
What should you look for
when youre buying a new
computer? That depends
on what you want it to do.
Table 1-8: Desktop
Computer Buyers Guide
lists some of the more
important factors and
features to be aware of
when buying a new
computer. Just make sure
the information listed isnt
too out of date!
Figure 1-13
Chapter One: The Essentials 29
Your Organizations Name Here
Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End, Gaming
Video Memory
32MB 64MB to 128MB 128MB or more
Hard Drive
40GB to 60GB 80GB 120GB or more
CD or DVD Drive
CD-ROM Drive CD-RW Drive DVD+-R/RW &
CD-R/RW Drive
Ports
USB 1.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0, Firewire
Included Devices
Ethernet, 56K modem Ethernet, 56K modem
* This information was updated May 2003.
30 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-10: Buying a Notebook
Computer

Deciding on which notebook to buy is even more confusing than buying a desktop
computer. Thats because there is a much more variance in features and prices between
various notebook. Notebook computers cant be upgraded as easily as desktop computers,
so your decision is pretty much final.
Table 1-9: Notebook Buyers Guide will give you a good idea of what you should look
for when you buy a new notebook computer. Just remember that notebook technology
changes incredibly fast, so dont use Table 1-9: Notebook Buyers Guide after December
2003.
Some other important factors to consider when buying a notebook include:
Size
Generally speaking, while convenient and cool looking, smaller notebooks arent as
powerful or fast as larger notebook computers. If travel frequently and need to lug
your notebook around with you, you might want to consider a smaller notebook. If
your notebook doesnt move around much youre probably better off with a larger
notebook.
Battery Life
Notebooks battery life can range any where from 2 to 7 hours. Some notebooks can
even accept a second battery for extra long life. Battery life probably isnt much of
an issue if you only use your notebook when its plugged into the wall.
Warrantee
Notebooks computers are notorious for breaking down. Whats worse, theyre not
very easy to open and they have their own unique notebook parts, so theyre much
harder and more expensive to repair than their desktop counterparts. Most of us hate
the old three-year extended warrantee sales pitch, but if youre buying a notebook
computer the cost of the extra warrantee is probably worth it.
Figure 1-14
What should you look for
when youre buying a new
computer? That depends
on what you want it to do.
Table 1-9: Notebook
Buyers Guide lists some
of the more important
factors and features to be
aware of when buying a
new computer. Just make
sure the information listed
isnt too out of date!
Figure 1-14
Chapter One: The Essentials 31
Your Organizations Name Here
Included Devices and Features
Notebook computers usually have several devices and gizmos built-inoften more
than a desktop computer! A modem and Ethernet port are almost a standard part of
most notebooks today. Some notebooks also have memory card readers (especially
useful if you have a digital camera or PDA), Firewire ports, and even wireless
networking, known as WiFi. If youre comparing various notebook models make
sure that you know what device are or arent included.
Table 1-9: Notebook Buyers Guide
Factor Budget Middle of the Road High End
CPU
Duron, Celeron,
Pentium 3 , or Athlon at
700MHz or better
Duron, Celeron,
Pentium 3 or 4, or
Athlon at 1GHz or better
Pentium 4 at 2GHz or
better
RAM
256MB 256MB 512MB
Video Memory
16MB 32MB to 64MB 32MB to 64MB
Hard Drive
20GB 30GB 60GB
CD or DVD Drive
CD-ROM Drive CD-RW Drive DVD & CD-R/RW Drive
Ports
USB 1.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0, Firewire
Included Devices
56K modem Ethernet, possibly WiFi
(wireless networking)
56K modem
Ethernet, WiFi (wireless
networking), 56K
modem, bluetooth (a
next-generation wireless
port)
* This information was updated May 2003.
32 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 1-11: Upgrading a
Computer
When you upgrade a computer you usually replace older components with new
components to improve the performance of a computer. You can also upgrade a computer
by adding additional components, such as more memory or a second hard drive.
Upgrading a computer to improve its performance is often cheaper than buying a new
computer. For most upgrades you will need someone with a lot of computer experience to
do the upgrade for you.
Its often difficult to determine which is betterupgrading an old computer or simply
buying a new computer. If youre an average computer user, plan on buying a new
computer every four or five years (sorrysomeone has to break this news to you.) By
then, the cost of a new computer will be less expensive than any effective upgrades you
do.
Figure 1-15
Computer upgrades can
get expensive! Theres a
fine line between when its
more cost effective to
upgrade an older
computer or to simply buy
a new computer
altogether.
Figure 1-16
Most computer upgrades
require that you, or better
yet someone who actually
knows about computers,
opens up the computer
case.
Figure 1-15 Figure 1-16
Chapter One: The Essentials 33
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Make sure any upgrades
you make to a computer are
worth the costsometimes
its better to simply buy a
new computer.
Upgrades to Improve
Performance Include:
Adding more memory or
RAM
Adding a bigger hard
drive
Adding a new CPU and
motherboard (usually not
recommended)
Adding new devices, such
as a DVD drive
So what can you do to upgrade a computer? The following table lists some of the more
common upgrades.
Table 1-10: Typical Things to Upgrade on a Computer
Upgrade Description
Memory (RAM)
Increasing the amount of memory in a computer is probably the most effective
and inexpensive upgrades you can make. More memory can significantly
increase the performance of your computer. 512MB to 1GB of memory is all you
should ever needfor the next year or so anyway.
Hard Disk
The hard drives in newer computers have become so huge that you may never
need to buy another one. If do somehow run out of room on your hard drive,
you can buy a second one, since most computer can handle two internal hard
drives.
CPU and
Motherboard
Its often better to buy a whole new computer than to upgrade the CPU and
motherboard. That way you get all new components all oncewhich is a lot
cheaper than buying them all individually.
Add Devices and
Peripherals
There are an endless variety of devices that you can add to a computer is
endless. You can add CD-ROM, DVD, and Zip drives, graphics cards, tape
backups, and more.
34 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Chapter One Review
Lesson Summary
Hardware, Software, and Information Technology (IT)
A typical computer includes the system unit, monitor, keyboard, mouse, speakers, and printer.
Hardware: A computer item you can physically see or touch.
Software: A computer program that tells computer hardware how to operate.
Information Technology (IT): The broad subject related to computers and managing and
processing information.
Computer Overview
The basic computer processes are input, processing, and output.
Different types of computers include mainframes, PCs, Macs, servers, laptops, and PDAs.
The Front of a Computer and Peripheral Devices
Components visible from the outside of the system unit may include the floppy drive, CD-ROM
or DVD drive, Zip drive or tape backup, keyboard, mouse, scanner, monitor, speakers, and
printer.
The Inside of a Computer
Components inside the system unit may include the motherboard, CPU (Central Processing
Unit), Random Access Memory (RAM), ROM-BIOS, expansion slots and cards, and PCMCIA
cards in laptops.
The Back of a Computer (Ports)
Ports on the back of a computer include: keyboard, mouse, serial or COM, printer or parallel,
USB, video or monitor, line in, line out, microphone, joystick or game, phone or modem,
Ethernet or network, SCSI, and/or Firewire.
System Bus and Expansion Cards
An expansion card plugs into a computers motherboard to give it additional capabilities.
A computer communicates with its expansion cards and devices through the system bus.
How much information flows through the system bus depends on the bus width and bus
speed.
There are several bus types, including ISA, PCI, and AGP.
Chapter One: The Essentials 35
Your Organizations Name Here
Memory Cache
Memory Cache: A special type of memory that greatly increases a computers performance.
Computer Performance
Computer performance is determined by CPU speed, amount of memory or RAM, the type
and speed of the video card, the hard disk speed, free space, and fragmentation, and the
number of programs running at the same time.
Upgrading a Computer
Make sure any upgrades you make to a computer are worth the costsometimes its better to
simply buy a new computer.
Upgrades to improve performance include adding more memory or RAM, adding a bigger
hard drive, adding a new CPU and motherboard (usually not recommended), and Adding new
devices, such as a DVD drive.
Quiz
1. Hardware is any software that is installed on a computers hard disk.
(True or False?)
2. Laptops are faster than desktop PCs, generally speaking. (True or
False?)
3. Which of the following moves the pointer to another location on-
screen?
A. Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.
B. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
C. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the left mouse
button.
D. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the right mouse
button.
4. Which of the following is NOT a type of computer port?
A. USB
B. Parallel or printer
C. Backup
D. Network or Ethernet
5. When you type a document on a computer, every letter you type is
saved to the computers _______ or temporary storage area.
A. Hard drive
B. RAM
C. ROM
D. CPU
36 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
6. What is the brain or main chip of a computer called?
A. The RAM
B. The ROM-BIOS
C. The motherboard
D. The CPU
7. ROM stands for Read-Only Memory (True or False?)
8. Which of the following does NOT affect a computer s performance.
A. The amount of memory or RAM.
B. The speed of the CPU.
C. The type and speed of the video or graphics card.
D. The horsepower of the motherboard.
Quiz Answers
1. False. Hardware is any physical part of the computer you can see and touch.
2. False. Laptops are generally slower than desktop PCs.
3. B. Move the pointer by moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
4. C. There isnt such as thing as a backup port.
5. B. RAM or Random Access Memory.
6. D. The CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is the main chip in a computer.
7. True. ROM stands for Read-Only Memory.
8. D. Cars and trucks may have horsepower, but not computers.
Chapter Two:
Understanding
Hardware
Chapter Objectives:
Understand what a CPU does
Learn how memory is measured
Learn about input devices: mouse, keyboard, and digital cameras
Learn about output devices: monitor, graphics, and printers
Learn about storage devices: hard drives, CD-ROMs, and DVDs
Hardware is any physical part of a computer that you can see or touch. A computers
monitor, CD-ROM or DVD drive, mouse, keyboard, and printer are all different types of
hardware. This chapter takes a closer look at the physical parts that constitute a computer.
This chapter is broken up into several sections, since there are several different categories
of hardware devices. First well examine processing devices, such as computers CPU
and memory. Youll finally understand what those technical sounding words megahertz
and gigabyte mean. From there well move on to input devices that you use to talk to your
computer, such as the keyboard and mouse and output devices that your computer uses to
talk to you, such as the monitor and printer. The last part of this chapter discusses storage
devices, such as hard drives and CD-ROM drives, where computers store information.
Thats a lot of material to cover, so lets get started!
; Prerequisites
A desire to learn about
computers.
The ability to read.
38 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-1: Central Processing
Unit (CPU)
Inside the computer case, hidden amongst all the wiring and gizmos, is a particularly
important part of the computer known as the central processing unit (or CPU, for short).
The CPU is also known as the computer chip (because thats what it is) or the
microprocessor (or processor, for short).
Some say the CPU is the brain of the computer while others describe it as the heart. In
any case, its the thing that makes your computer a computer. The CPU does all the work:
It calculates, it processes, it keeps things running smoothly. You might think of it as a
talented stage manager. When it does its behind-the-scenes job well, you dont notice it;
you simply enjoy the performance.
Originally, CPUs were given wildly inventive names like Chip. Okay, maybe not. The
names were actually based on numbers like 8088. The next few names in the seriesthe
286, the 386, and the 486were actually just shortened names for 80286, 80386, and
80486. Then, what would have been the 586 was dubbed the Pentium. After that, the
names became rather mysterious: Pentium Pro and Pentium MMX. Finally, the names
returned to a semi-ordered numbering system (albeit a mix of Roman and Arabic
numerals): Pentium 2, Pentium 3, and Pentium 4. And thats where we are at the moment.
Both the Pentium 3 and the Pentium 4 are still quite common.
Intel makes most CPUs. In fact, Intel is the company that came up with the name
Pentium. However, AMD and VIA Technologies are two other well-known CPU
manufacturers. Their CPUs are less expensive and use a different naming system (such as
the AMD Athlon and the AMD Duron). Intel actually makes a less expensive version of
the Pentium as well, which it calls the Celeron. The Celeron does what the Pentium does,
but not as quickly.
Speaking of which, speed is what the CPU is all about, and each successive version of the
CPU gets progressively faster. A CPUs speed is measured in megahertz (MHz) or, for
newer models, in gigahertz (GHz). A megahertz equals millions of cycles per second; a
gigahertz equals billions of cycles per second. Higher numbers equate to higher speeds.
You might see an Intel Pentium 4 at 3.06 GHz, a Pentium III at 1.40 GHz, and a Celeron
at 2.20 GHz.
Figure 2-1
The Intel Pentium 4 is the
fastest and most recent
CPU available.
Figure 2-2
The CPU can get hot!
Most CPUs have a built-in
fan to keep them from
burning out.
A CPUs speed is
measured in
megahertz (MHz) or
gigahertz (GHz).
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
The Central
Processing
Unit (CPU)
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 39
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
The CPU, or Central
Processing Unit, is the
computers main chip. It
calculates and processes
information.
CPU Speed is Measured
In:
Megahertz (MHz).
Gigahertz (GHz).
Common CPUs Include:
Intel Pentium III
Intel Pentium 4
Intel Celeron
AMD Athlon
AMD Duron
Another common measure of a CPU is how many bits it can handle at a time. A bit is the
tiniest piece of information processed by a computer. Eight bits make up one byte, and
one byte equals one character. Computers used to handle 8 or 16 bits; now theyre up to
32 and 64 at a time. Dont worry if all of this seems a bit confusingwell cover bits and
bytes in greater detail in a later lesson.
Table 2-1: Table Name
CPU Speed Description
1 GHz to
3 GHz
Intel Pentium 4 Processor
The Pentium 4 is Intels more recent and fastest generation of CPUs, with
processing speeds over 3 GHz.
450 MHz to
1 GHz
Intel Pentium III Processor
Launched in 1999, Pentium 3 CPUs are still found in some new
computers.
1.06 to
2 GHz
Intel Celeron Processor
Intels Celeron CPU is an inexpensive processor designed for people on
budget. Celeron processors are very similar to Pentium processors, but
they have less built-in memory.
500 MHz to
3 GHz
Intel Xeon Processor
Dont expect to see any Xeon-based computers at your local computer
storeits designed for high end servers.
850 MHz to
1.67 GHz
AMD Athon Processor
The Athlon processor is equivalent to Pentium processorsonly its
lesson expensive.
700 MHz to
800 MHz
AMD Duron Processor
The Duron CPU is AMDs is similar to Intels Celeron processor. It has
lesson built-in memory and is designed for people on a budget.
Older
Processors
Heres a summary of the other most commonand obsoleteprocessors
out there:
Processor Release Date Average Speed
Pentium II 1997 266 MHz
Pentium 1993 133 MHz
486 1989 66 MHz
386 1985 25 MHz
286 1982 12.5 MHz
8088 1979 8 MHz
40 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-2: Memory
Most people know that a computer has memory. But what does that really mean? You
often hear techies toss around numbers like 60GB hard drive. Okay, that sounds
impressive, but what does it tell you? This lesson breaks memory into measurable units.
The first thing you need to know is that, at its most basic level, a computer only
understands the concept of on and off. On is represented by the number one (1); off is
represented by the number zero (0). Everything that a computer does is based on this
combination of ones and zeros, which is known as the binary system. These ones and
zeros are digits, known as bits, which are the smallest memory unit. The term bit is short
for binary digit.
The second thing you need to know is that a computer saves information in bytes, not
bits. So what is a byte? The term byte is short for binary digits eight. So, one byte is made
up of eight bits. And a byte is the equivalent of a character, which can be a letter, a
number, or a symbol. So lets say that youre a self-involved poet whose latest creation is
simply titled I That one-word title would equal one byte.
Of course, it would be fairly tedious if a computer stored everything in single bytes. The
next largest unit is the kilobyte. A kilobyte (abbreviated K or KB) equals 1,024 bytes or
characters. Now lets say youre a short-story writer. The one-page, double-spaced
masterpiece you submit to your editor would be the equivalent of a kilobyte.
After the kilobyte, the next largest unit is the megabyte. A megabyte (abbreviated M or
MB) equals 1,048,576 bytes or characters. If you were a novelist, your latest bestseller
would equal a megabyte.
Figure 2-3
A hard drive might have
60GB of memory.
Figure 2-4
A recordable CD (CD-R)
can have up to 700MB of
memory.
Figure 2-5
A memory chip might have
512MB of memory.
Figure 2-6
A zip disk can have
between 100MB and
250MB of memory.
Everything that a
computer does is
based on a combination
of ones and zeros,
which is known as the
binary system.
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 41
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Computers function based
on the binary system:
On is represented by a
one (1).
Off is represented by a
zero (0).
Ones and zeros are
digits, known as bits.
Bit:
Short for binary digit
Smallest memory unit
Eight bits equal one byte
Byte:
Short for binary digits
eight.
One byte equals one
character (letter, number,
or symbol)
Kilobyte (K or KB):
1,024 bytes
Megabyte (M or MB):
1,048,576 bytes
Gigabyte (G or GB):
1,073,741,824 bytes
Terabyte:
1,099, 511,627,776 bytes
The next unit after the megabyte is the gigabyte. A gigabyte (abbreviated G or GB) equals
1,073,741,824 bytes or characters. Lets pretend you are a researcher. A whole shelf of
books devoted to your favorite subject would be the equivalent of a gigabyte.
Finally, after the gigabyte comes the terabyte. A terabyte (abbreviated T or TB) equals
1,099,511,627,776 bytes or characters. Lets imagine that youre an egomaniac who owns
an entire bookstore filled only with books by authors you like. Such a single-minded
store would be the equivalent of a terabyte.
Okay, lets review. The following table summarizes all the units of memory.
Table 2-2: Bits and Bytes
Unit Abbreviation Size Symbol Equivalent
Bit An atom or speck, the
smallest unit of
memory.
Byte 8 bits A single letter, a
number, or a symbol.
Kilobyte K or KB 1,024 bytes A one-page, double-
spaced letter.
Megabyte M or MB 1,048,576 bytes A best-selling novel.
Gigabyte G or GB 1,073,741,824 bytes An encyclopedia set.
Terabyte T or TB 1,099, 511,627,776
bytes
A bookstore.
MB is an abbreviation
for megabyte. GB is an
abbreviation for
gigabyte.
42 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-3: RAM and ROM
So now you know that computer memory is measured in various byte-sized units:
kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, petrabytes, and philobytes. Okay, those last two were
just made up to see if you were paying attention.
Next you need to know that computers have two major types of memory: random-access
memory (or RAM) and read-only memory (or ROM). Lets discuss these two types of
memory in greater detail.
RAM (random-access memory)
When someone at a computer superstore tells you how much memory a new
computer has, theyre really talking about RAM. RAM is the computers main
memory, which it uses to process information. Whenever you work with a file on
your computer, youre using RAM. And the data in that file is temporarily stored in
RAM. However, RAM is volatile, which means that the data is stored only as long as
the computer has power. Once you shut off your computer, the data is gone.
However, you can and should save your data (read: your file). Thats where storage
comes in, but more on that later. For now, think of RAM like a notebook: You can
read from it and write to it. Technically, it could be called read and write memory.
And, as with a notebook, you can overwrite it many, many timesprovided you
have an eraser!
Figure 2-7
RAM, or Random Access
Memory, works like a
notepad; you can read
from it and write to it.
Figure 2-8
ROM, or Read Only
Memory, works like a
novel, you can read from it
but not write to it.
When you work with a
file on your computer,
youre using RAM.
Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 43
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Computers have two types
of memory:
Random-access memory
(RAM).
Read-only memory
(ROM).
RAM:
Computers main
memory, which is used to
process information
(example: work with a
file).
Volatile: Unless saved,
data disappears when
you shut off computer.
You can read from it and
write to it. Comparable to
a notebook; you can read
and write to it.
ROM:
Computers low-level
memory, which is used to
perform its most basic
functions (example: start
the computer).
Nonvolatile: Data remains
even when you shut off
computer. Its permanent.
You can read from it, but
you cant write to it.
Comparable to a novel;
you can only read it.
ROM (read-only memory)
ROM is the computers low-level memory, which it uses to perform its most basic
functions. This memory is permanent; the data remains even if you shut off the
computer. This only makes sense because ROM is required to restart your computer.
You never hear people discuss how much ROM you have because the manufacturer
usually installs it, and you never touch it. It does all the behind-the-scenes work and
then disappears once youre underway, much like a party planner. You can also think
of ROM like a novel: You can read from it, but you cant write to it (and thus, its
name).
Table 2-3: Comparing RAM and ROM
RAM ROM
Random-access memory Read-only memory
Main memory. Low-level memory.
Necessary to process information (example: work
with a file).
Necessary to perform the most basic functions
(example: start the computer).
Volatile: If not saved, data disappears when you
shut off the computers power. Its temporary.
Nonvolatile: Data remains even when you shut off
the computers power. Its permanent.
Often discussed when buying a computer. Seldom mentioned when buying a computer.
You can read from and write to it. Comparable to a
notepad.
You can read from it, but you cant write to it.
Comparable to a novel.
44 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-4: Mouse

A computer would be useless if you had no way to communicate with it. Thats why you
need an input device. Essentially, an input device lets you talk to your computer. Two
examples of input devices are the keyboard and the mouse. Well discuss keyboards later;
for now lets concentrate on the mouse.
That funny-looking object that, frankly, looks like a mouse (with its oval body and long
tail-like cord connecting it to the computer) is the mouse. Originally, computers only
came with a keyboard. But in 1968 Doug Engelbart invented the mouse. In 1984, Apple
Computers introduced the mouse with its Macintosh computers. Shortly thereafter, the
mouse was standard equipment on all computers.
The mouse acts as a handheld pointing device that allows you to control the actions of
that blinking item on your screen known as a cursor. Depending on the software you are
using and the task you are doing, the cursor may resemble such symbols as a slanted
arrow ( ), an I ( ), or a vertical line (). A cursor is essentially a place-marker that
appears on your computer screen. You move the mouse to place the cursor over an object
on your screen and click the mouse buttons to select that object. Once an object has been
selected, you can move it or manipulate it. Well cover mouse buttons in greater detail in
a later lesson.
The standard mouse has two buttons and a rollerball on the underside, which moves the
cursor on the screen when you move the mouse. A rollerball mouse works best when used
Figure 2-9
Clicking with the mouse.
Figure 2-10
Double-clicking with the
mouse.
Figure 2-11
Right-clicking with the
mouse.
Figure 2-12
Dragging and dropping
with the mouse.
Figure 2-13
Using the scroll wheel.
The underside of a
roller ball mouse.
Some mouse pads have
a wrist rest to help
users keep their hands
and wrists in better
alignment.
Drag and drop
Place the pointer over an object and press and
hold down the left mouse button. While still
holding down the button, move the mouse (and
thus the cursor) to where you want to place the
object and then release the mouse button.
Hold down the
mouse button
while you drag
the mouse across
your desk.
Figure 2-12
Click!
Right-click
Press and
release the
right mouse
button.
Figure 2-11
Click!
Click!
Double-click
Quickly press and
release the left
mouse
button twice, in
rapid succession.
Figure 2-10 Figure 2-9
Click!
Click
Press and
release the
left mouse
button.
Use the
center wheel
to scroll
through
screens of
information.
Figure 2-13
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 45
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Input devices on a
standard computer:
Keyboard.
Mouse.
What a mouse does:
It acts as a handheld
pointing device and
controls the actions of
that blinking item on your
computer screen known
as a cursor.
on a mouse pad, especially one that has a rough texture on its surface. Some mouse pads
now come with a wrist rest to help users keep their hands and wrists in better alignment.
Like other computer components, mice come in several shapes and sizes. Some mice
have three (or more) buttons, which are programmable, and some include a trackball on
the top (instead of a rollerball on the underside). Most new mice include a center scroll
wheel between the two buttons. Not surprisingly, this scroll wheel lets you scroll through
screens of information in a fluid motion. Many new mice are also ergonomically
designed to fit the users hand. And some new mice have Forward and Back buttons off
to the side of the mouse, which help you navigate the Internet.
One of the latest innovations is the optical mouse, which is becoming quite common. An
optical mouse operates by using an infrared sensor, which means it uses neither a
rollerball nor a mouse pad. You can identify an optical mouse by the telltale red glow
emanating from its underside.
One other hot innovation is the wireless mouse (and keyboard). A wireless mouse and
keyboard run on batteries and communicate with the computer the same way a remote
control communicates with a television.
A wireless mouse
works just like a
remote control.
46 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-5: Keyboard
Like the mouse, the keyboard is an input device that allows you to talk to the computer.
The keyboard is easily recognizable because it resembles a typewriter keypad. If the
typewriter predates you, then look for the component thats covered with buttons that
have letters, numbers, and symbols on them.
If youve ever used a typewriter, you probably recognize many of the keys on a keyboard.
In any case, the alphanumeric, symbol, and punctuation keys are self-explanatory. And
well review the rest of the keys that are unique to a (101-key and 104-key) keyboard.
However, we will ignore the three keys found above the numeric keypad (<Print
Screen/Sys Req>, <Scroll Lock>, and <Pause/Break>) because they are all fairly useless
on most computers today.
NOTE: If you keyboard includes multimedia and Internet buttons above the keys,
consult the manual that comes with your keyboard to learn their
functions.
Table 2-4: Special Keys and Their Functions
Key(s) Description
The <Alt> key doesnt do anything by itselfit needs another key to make things
happen. For example, pressing the <Tab> key while holding down the <Alt> key
switches between any programs that are currently running.
Just like the <Alt> key, the <Ctrl> doesnt do anything by itselfyou need to press
another key with it to make things happen. For example, pressing the <X> key
while holding down the <Ctrl> key cuts whatever is selected.
The <F1> key is the help key, and pressing it displays helpful information about
what youre doing.
Figure 2-14
The 101-key enhanced
keyboard
An ergonomic
keyboard is designed
to relieve the stress
of typing for long
periods of time.
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
~
`
!
1
@
2
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
0
+
=
#
3
Q W E R T Y
A S D F G H
Z X C V B
U I O P
J K L
N M
{
[
}
]
:
;
"
'
<
,
>
.
?
/
Tab
Shift
Ctrl Alt
Caps
Lock
Alt Ctrl
Shift
Enter
Backspace
Insert Home Page
Up
Delete End Page
Down
|
\
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
.
Num
Lock
Home PgUp
End PgDn
Ins Del
Enter
/ *
+
Print
Screen
Scroll
Lock
Pause
Scroll
Lock
Caps
Lock
Num
Lock
Shift key
Alt key
Function keys or F keys
Arrow keys Numeric keypad
Ctrl key
Esc key
Figure 2-14
Status lights
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 47
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A keyboard lets you enter
information and
commands into a
computer.
Key(s) Description
The <Esc> (Escape) key is the Wait, Ive changed my mind key and is the same
as clicking Cancel in a dialog box. For example, if you click something and an
unfamiliar dialog box appears, you can close it by pressing the <Esc> key.
The <Enter> key is the Carry out my orders key and is the same as clicking the
OK button in a dialog box. For example, after youve typed the name of a program
you want to run in a dialog box, press <Enter> to run the program. The <Enter>
key also adds new lines and starts new paragraphs if youre entering text.
When youre in a dialog box, pressing the <Tab> key moves to the next field.
When youre using a word processor, the <Tab> key works just like youd think it
would and jumps to the nearest tab stop whenever you press it.

The arrow keys move your computers cursor across the screen.
Nothing surprising here. The <Delete> key deletes or erases whatever you
selectfiles, text, or graphical objects. If youre working with text, the <Delete>
key erases characters to the right of the insertion point.
Use the <Backspace> key to fix your typing mistakesit erases characters to the
left of the insertion point.
The <Home> key jumps to the beginning of the current line when youre working
with text.
The <End> key jumps to the end of the current line when youre working with text.
The <Page Up> key moves up one screen.
The <Page Down> key moves down one screen.
48 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-6: Digital Cameras and
Web Cams
A digital camera lets you take pictures that you can transfer to a computer. Once youve
transferred your pictures you can print them, insert them in word processing document, or
send them in an e-mail message. You can also edit digital photos, to remove such
undesirable objects as redeye or an ex-boyfriend.
The quality of the pictures a digital camera takes depends on its resolution, which is
measured in megapixels. One megapixel is equal to one million, or 1000 1000 pixels.
The higher the number of megapixels, the clearer and more detailed the picture.
Digital cameras dont use filmthey store their pictures on a type of removable memory
called flash cards. Flash cards can store anywhere from a dozen to several hundred
pictures, depending on how much memory they have. There are three different types or
formats of flash cards out there:
CompactFlash: Definitely the most common type of digital film out
there, CompactFlash cards can store anywhere from to 1GB of memory.
CompactFlash sizes range from 8 MB all the way up to 1 GB!
SmartMedia: SmartMedia is another a very popular type of memory card
because of its small size. SmartMedia cards are also widely used in many PDAs.
SmartMedia cards are available in capacities ranging from 2 MB to 128 MB.
Figure 2-15
Figure 1
Figure 2-16
A Web cam usually sits on
top of a computers
monitor.
Figure 2-17
Cameras with more
megapixels can take
sharper and more detailed
pictures.
A megapixel contains
one million pixels.
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 49
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A digital camera lets you
take pictures and transfer
them to a computer.
The quality, or resolution
of the pictures a digital
camera can take are
measured in megapixels,
or millions of pixels (dots).
The more pixels, the
better the resolution.
Memory Stick: Sony makes its this type of memory card for use in its
own products; Sony digital cameras, Sony PDAs, etc. Memory sticks are available in
capacities ranging from 4 MB to 128 MB.
Another popular toy you can add to your computer is a Web cam. A Web cam is a tiny
digital video camera that usually sits on top of a computers monitor. People use Web
cams for videoconferencing and to send live images over the Internet.
Table 2-5: Comparison of Megapixels
Megapixels Image Size Description
Under 1 640480 Entry level and obsolete digital cameras have a measly resolution
of 640x480 pixels. These cameras are fine if you want to e-mail
someone a picture, send someone a photo on a computer, but the
quality of a printed image is terrible when printed as 4x6in photo.
1 1024768 Supposedly 1024768 resolution is this is enough to make sharp
4x6 inch prints. The truth is, at this point it depends more on the
quality of the digital camera than the resolution. Many printed
photos can still look digital or blurry at this resolution.
2 16001200 Two-megapixel cameras can take fine 4x6 inch prints and even
respectable 8x10s, about you'd expect from a low-end film camera.
3 20481536 Once you reach the three-megapixel bracket the quality of print is
normally excellent up to 8x11 prints. If you're looking for a really
good digital camera with strong features and good image quality,
three megapixels is a good range to search in.
4 22721740 Four-megapixel cameras are starting to get into the enthusiast
territory. They take exceptionally sharp photos and can print even
larger prints than 8x11.
5 25601920 Were definitely in enthusiast professional territory now.
Five-megapixel cameras are even used by professional
photographers to take really big prints.
50 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-7: Other Input Devices
The keyboard and mouse are the two most common input devices for a computer, but
there are many more. Most respectable laptops have a built-in touch pad or AccuPoint

Pointing Device or pointing stick that works like a mouse. Other mouse alternatives
include track balls and light pens.
Other common computer input devices include scanners for copying images to a
computer, joysticks for playing games, and microphones for recording sound. You can
learn about these input devices by taking a look at the table on the next page.
Figure 2-18
Theres usually not
enough room to use a
mouse on an airplane or
on the beach. Its for this
reason that most laptops
have built-in touch pads
and AccuPoint

Pointing
Devices.
Figure 2-18
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 51
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Other Input Devices
Include:
Touch pads
AccuPoint

Pointing
Devices
Track balls
Light pens
Scanners
Joysticks
Microphones
Table 2-6: Other Input Devices
Input Device Description
Touch Pad
A touch pad is small, touch-sensitive pad used as a pointing device on some
portable computers. By moving a finger or other object along the pad, you can
move the pointer on the display screen.
AccuPoint

Pointing Device
An Accupoint

Pointing Device, or pointing stick, is another mouse substitute
that is found on many laptop computers. An Accupoint

Pointing Device usually
sits in the middle of the keyboard and resembles an eraser at the end of a
pencil.
Track Ball
A track ball is essentially a mouse lying on its back. To move the pointer, you
rotate the ball with your thumb, your fingers, or the palm of your hand.
Light Pen
A light pen is input device that utilizes a light-sensitive detector to select objects
on a display screen. A light pen is similar to a mouse, except that with a light
pen you can move the pointer and select objects on the display screen by
directly pointing to the objects with the pen.
Scanner
A scanner is a lot like a photocopier. Instead of producing copies, a scanner
converts images into digital information and stores it in a computer.
Joystick
Mostly used for computer games, a joystick is lever that moves in all directions
and usually controls some type of movement on the computer.
Microphone
If your computer has as sound card (and most computer have one) you can
plug in a microphone to digitally record sounds to your computer.
52 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-8: Monitor
A computers monitor looks and works a lot like a TV screen. The monitor is really only
half of makes text and images appear on the screen. The other half is the graphic card, or
video/display adapter. The monitor plugs into the graphics card in the back of the
computer.
Flat panel or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitors, like the one in Figure 2-20, will
eventually replace older CRT monitors, like the one shown in Figure 2-19. A flat panel
monitor is the same type of display that is found in laptop computers. Flat panel monitors
are thin, lightweight, and use a lot less electricity than traditional monitors. Flat panel
monitors are also considerably more expensive than traditional monitors, although the
price is dropping. Flat panel monitors are wider than traditional monitors are; in fact a 15-
inch flat panel monitor has almost the same viewing area as a 17-inch traditional monitor!
Size
The size of a monitor is measured diagonally across the screen, just like TVs.
Common monitor sizes are 15, 17, 19, and 21 inches. The most popular monitor size
is currently 17 inches.
Dot Pitch
Dot pitch refers to the distance between each pixel, or dot, on the screen, as
measured in millimeters (mm). The smaller the dot pitch, the closer the dots, and the
sharper the image is. If youre in the market for a monitor try to find one with a 0.28
mm or less.
Figure 2-19
Similar in appearance to a
television screen, a
monitor displays images
and text on its screen.
Figure 2-20
Flat-panel monitors are
more expensive that
traditional monitors, but
they are take up less
space and use less
electricity.
Figure 2-21
Common controls found
on the front of a monitor.
Dot pitch is the
distance between
pixels or dots on a
screen. Dot pitch is
measured in
millimeters (mm).
0.28 mm
dot pitch
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Move Image
Left-Right
Move Image
Up-Down
Stretch Image
Left-Right
Stretch Image
Up-Down
Pincushion
In-Out
Wider-Narrower
Image
Brightness
Contrast
Figure 2-21
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 53
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
CRT Monitors:
Older type of monitor that
looks like a television
screen.
Flat Panel LCD Monitors:
Newer type of monitor
that is thin, lightweight
and somewhat expensive.
Other Things to Know
about Monitors:
The size of a monitor is
measured diagonally
across the screen.
Average monitor sizes
range from 15-inches to
21-inches.
The monitor refresh rate
determines how quickly
the monitor redraws, or
updates, the image on the
screen. Most monitors
have a refresh rate of
72MHz or better.
A screen saver is a
moving picture that
appears on your
computer screen when
you dont use your
computer for a while.
Refresh Rate
The refresh rate determines how quickly the monitor redraws, or updates, the image
on the screen. Higher refresh rates are better, since they flicker less and are easier on
the eyes. The refresh rate is measured in herz (Hz), or the number of times per
second the monitor redraws the entire screen. If youre buying a new monitor, make
sure to get one with a refresh rate of 72 Hz or better.
Screen Savers and Energy Star Compliance
A screen saver is a moving picture that appears on your computer screen when you
dont use your computer for a while. Screen savers originally prevented phosphor
burn, which occurred when a static image became etched onto the screen after a long
period of time. Todays monitors arent susceptible to phosphor burn, but some
people still use screen savers for fun.
Most monitors are Energy Star compliant. This means they automatically turn
themselves off after a period of time to save electricity. You turn the monitor back
only by simply moving the mouse or pressing a key on the keyboard.
The Energy Star
Logo
54 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-9: Graphics Card
The second part of a computers video system is the graphic card or video adapter. A
graphics card is an expansion card that plugs into a computers motherboard and is
responsible for all the text and pretty images that appear on your computers monitor.
Many computers dont have a graphics card at allall the video capabilities are instead
built into the computers motherboard.
Graphics cards come in many models and prices. More expensive graphics cards are
faster and can display more complex, 3D graphicssomething especially useful if youre
into computer games. Here are the basics about graphic cards:
Screen Resolution
Resolution has to do with how much information can fit on the computer screen.
Obviously you cant adjust how large or small your computers monitor is (without
buying a new one that is), but you can make all the images on your screen larger or
smaller so you can see more information at once. You can adjust the screen
resolution to suit your needs and preferences. For more information about screen
resolution see Table 2-7: Common Screen Resolutions.
Color Depth
Color depth is the number of colors that are displayed on the screen at once. So why
would you want to change the number of colors displayed on your screen? Perhaps
you want to use higher color depth settings to make videos and photographs more
realistic. Or some finicky games also require you to use a specific color depth. For
more information about color depth see Table 2-8: Common Color Depths.
Graphics Card Memory
Graphics cards have their own memory, or RAM, just like a computer. Youll need
more memory to display higher screen resolutions and color depths. Video cards can
have anywhere from 1 MB all the way up to 128 MB of memory. If youre buying a
new computer make sure it has at least 64 MB of memory.
3D Graphics Accelerator
A 3D graphics accelerator card has its own CPU that is used to create 3D graphics. If
youre even considering playing any games on your computer you should have a
3D graphics accelerator card, as most newer games require one.
Figure 2-22
A computers monitor
plugs into the graphic
card; an expansion slot
that plugs into a
computers motherboard.
Figure 2-23
Newer computer games
have fantastic graphics
but youll need a
3D graphics accelerator
card to see them.
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 55
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Screen Resolution:
Determines how much
information can fit on the
computer screen at once.
Common screen
resolutions include
800 by 600 and
124 by 768.
Color Depth:
Color depth is the number
of colors that are
displayed on the screen
at once. Common color
depths include 16-bit and
24-bit color.
Video Cards:
Have their own memory
and processor. Generally
speaking, the more
memory a video card has,
the higher the resolution
and color depth it can
display.
Table 2-7: Common Screen Resolutions
Resolution Description
640 by 480
No longer supported in most computers, 640 by 480 use to be the lowest
resolution setting. Larger and cheaper monitors have made 640 by 480
resolution effectively obsolete.
800 by 600
This has been the standard resolution setting for most computers, and is the
lowest setting on newer monitors. This is a good in-between resolution,
allowing you to display quite a bit of information on the screen without having
to use a magnifying glass to read it. Use this setting if you have a 15-inch or
17-inch monitor.
1024 by 768
The new standard, 1024 by 768 puts a lot of information on your screen, but
the images can start getting small and difficult to read at this point (unless you
have a large monitor). Use this setting if you have a 17-inch or larger monitor
or when you want to see a lot of information at the same time, for example if
youre working on a large spreadsheet, graphic files, or multiple windows.
Higher
resolutions
Depending on how expensive the graphics card in your computer is, there may
be several higher modes of resolution which continue to display more and
more information and smaller and smaller images.
Table 2-8: Common Color Depths
Color Depth Description
256 Colors
No longer supported on many computers, 256 colors was the standard color
depth years ago, but most computers and video cards are fast enough to run with
more colors without taking a performance hit, making this color depth almost
obsolete.
16-bit
16-bit color displays roughly 65,000 colors at once. This is the point where
pictures become photo-realistic. This is a good color depth setting because it can
display photo-realistic images without slowing your computer down. You have to
really squint to see much difference between 16-bit color and higher levels of
color depth.
24-bit
24-bit color displays 16.7 million of colors at once. Depending on how expensive
the graphics card in your computer is there may be several higher modes of color
depth, which continue to display more and more colors on the screen.
32-bit
32-bit color displays 16.7 million of colors at once. 32-bit color is faster and more
efficient than 24-bit color.
H
i
g
h
e
r

R
e
s
o
l
u
t
i
o
n
s

R
e
q
u
i
r
e

M
o
r
e

S
p
e
e
d

a
n
d

V
i
d
e
o

M
e
m
o
r
y
M
o
r
e

C
o
l
o
r
s

R
e
q
u
i
r
e

M
o
r
e

S
p
e
e
d

a
n
d

V
i
d
e
o

M
e
m
o
r
y
56 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-10: Printer Basics
A printer is an output device that puts text and graphics on paper. Using the printer is
often the last step in creating something on a computer, whether its a letter, spreadsheet,
or digital photograph.
Unfortunately, theres a lot to know about printersespecially if youre buying one. Here
are the main printer concepts you should know:
Type of Printer
There are several different types of printers out there: InkJet and Laser printers are
the most common. InkJet printers are the cheapest and most common type of printer
and can be found in both homes and businesses. Laser printers are usually faster than
InkJet printers, but they normally can only print in black and white. Laser printers
are used mainly by businesses.
Color vs. Black and White
Color use to be an expensive option for printers, but not any more. Most InkJet
printers can print in color and so can an increasing number of laser printers. Most
laser printers still print in black in whitegreat for text but not for images and
graphics.
Resolution
A printers resolution helps determine the quality of the images it can produce.
Higher resolution means higher quality images. Printer resolution is measured in dots
per inch (dpi). Generally, 600-dpi resolution works great for text documents, while
you will probably want 1200 dpi or better resolution for printing images. See Figure
2-25 for a good illustration of varying resolutions.
Figure 2-24
InkJet printers are the
most inexpensive and
popular type of printer sold
today.
Figure 2-25
A printers resolution
determines the quality of
the images it can produce.
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-24
300 dpi 600 dpi
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 57
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
InkJet and Laser printers
are the most common
printer types.
Printer resolution
determines the quality of
the images a printer can
produce. Printer
resolution is measured in
dots per inch (dpi).
A printers speed
determines how quickly it
can print pages.
Printers get their ink from
expensive cartridges
(InkJet printers) and
toners (laser printers)
Many printers have their
own memory, which is
required for printing more
complex images.
A print spooler or buffer
temporary stores large
print jobs and releases
them when the printer is
able to actually print
them.
Speed
A printers speed determines how quickly it can print pages. Speed is measured two
ways: in characters per second (cps) or in pages per minute (ppm). Either way you
want a higher number if you want to have a faster printer. Printers usually slow
down quite a bit when printing pages with a lot of complicated graphics, or color
images.
Ink Cartridges and Toner
Today many InkJet printers are cheapabout as much as dinner for two at a very
fancy restaurant. Sound too good too be true? Heres the catch: the ink for most
printers costs a lot of money. InkJet printers use ink cartridges that seem to run dry at
an alarming speed. Laser printers user toner cartridges filled with the same messy
black powder that is found in copy machines. Laser toner cartridges last a lot longer
than InkJet cartridges, but they also cost significantly more.
Memory
Laser printers have their own memory, or RAM, just like a computer. This memory
is used to store pages before they are printed. Memory is important for printing
complex or high-resolution images. Most laser printers have anywhere from 2 MB to
8 MB of memory.
Print Buffer and Spooler
Computers are a lot faster than most printers are, so they can send information faster
than the printer can accept it. A printer buffer or spooler fixes this problem. A print
buffer works like a dam: it holds back the information and releases it at a rate that the
printer can handle.
58 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-11: Types of Printers
Leonardo da Vinci didnt limit himself by using only paint and brushes to create his
masterpieces; he also used chalk to make sketches and a chisel and hammer to make
sculptures. Maybe Leonardo would have used an airbrush or spray paint if they had been
invented yet. Hmm maybe not. Because there are different types of print jobs there are
different types of printers. Are you a home user that prints an occasional letter or two?
Youll probably want to buy a cheap InkJet printer. Are you a busy office that has lots of
people who need to print lots of documents? Youre probably looking at getting a Laser
printer.
The following table describes the main types of printers out there and how or why you
would use them, so youll have no excuse for buying the wrong kind of printer when you
get around to buying one.
Table 2-9: Types of Printers
Printer Type Description
Ink Jet
Inkjet printers are easily the most popular and inexpensive type of printer out
there. If you have a printer for your home computer, chances are its an InkJet
printer. InkJet printers create images by spraying ink onto a page. The
inexpensive InkJet printer gets its ink from very expensive InkJet cartridges.
Most InkJet printers can print in color, and their speeds vary from 2 to 16 pages
per minute (ppm).
Figure 2-26
There are many different
types of printers available,
with an enormous range of
prices and features.
Figure 2-26
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 59
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Print Types Include:
InkJet
Laser and color laser
Multifunction
Dot matrix
Plotter
Printer Type Description
Laser
Laser printers have blazing speedanywhere from 4 to 20 pages per minute
(ppm), great resolutionanywhere from 300 to 1,200 dots per inch (dpi), and
recently have become relatively inexpensive. Laser printers are great for
businesses and people who need to produce large amounts of text documents or
correspondence.
Laser printers use the same technology as photocopy machines to create images
blank and white images on paper. Laser printers use powdered black ink, called
toner, just like photocopy machines do. When the toner cartridge runs out, you
have to replace it with a new toner cartridge. Toner cartridges cost a lot more
than InkJet cartridges do, but they also last a lot longer.
Color Laser
A color laser printer works just like an ordinary laser printer, except that it can
print in color, of course. Color laser printers are quite expensive and the color
toner cartridges for them are even worse.
Multifunction
As its name implies, a multifunction printer can perform more than one task.
Multifunction printers can usually operate as a fax machine, copier, and scanner
in addition to their traditional printing duties.
Dot Matrix
Popular in the 1980s, noisy dot-matrix printers have gone the way of the
dinosaurs, except in businesses that need to print on carbon copies.
Dot matrix printers usually use a type of paper with holes punched along each
side called continuous form paper, and loads it through something called a tractor
feed. Dot-matrix printers range in speed from 25 to 450 characters per second
(cps), or 1 to 18 pages per minute (ppm).
Resolution is measured differently with dot-matrix printers. Instead of using dot
per inch (dpi) dot matrix resolution is measured by how many little pins are on the
dot-matrix print head. Dot-matrix printers are available with 9-pin (terrible quality)
and 24-pin (higher quality) print heads.
Plotter
Dont expect to find a plotter at your local computer store. Plotters are special,
very expensive printers that are used to create posters and blueprints.
60 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-12: Sound and
Speakers
The term sound card is a little misleading; sounds cards used to be expansion cards that
plugged into a computers motherboard. Although such sound cards still exist, today most
computers have sound capabilities built-it to their motherboards. Either way, a sound card
basically does two things: play and record digital sounds.
The types of sounds your computer can play range from the sounds you here when you
turn on your computer, to explosions in a computer game. A sound card can also play
MP3 music files. An MP3 is a highly compressed sound file that lets you play CD quality
music on your computer.
While its not nearly as important, sound cards also let you record sounds if you plug in a
stereo or microphone. For example, you could use a sound card to record your aging
cassette tape collection to MP3 files. Newer speech recognition software also requires
that you have a microphone plugged into your computer.
Sound cards have the most confusing ports or jacks on the entire computer. Most of them
look almost exactly the sameespecially if youre crouched in the dark under a desk
trying to plug in a pair of speakers to your computer. The table on the following page
might make things a little easier by describing each of these ports.
Figure 2-27
Older computers had a
sound card, which
plugged into the
motherboard of the
computer. Newer
computers have sound
capabilities built-in to the
motherboard.
Figure 2-28
Youll need to connect a
pair of speakers or
headphones to your
computer if you want to
hear sound.
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 61
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Sound Cards:
Allow computer to play
and record digital sounds.
Table 2-10: Sound Card Jacks and Ports
Jack Description
Speaker

This is the main jack where you connect your speakers
or headphones to hear the sounds produced by the
sound card.
Microphone
This jack lets you connect a microphone to your computer so that
you record sounds and use speech recognition software.
Line Out
You can listen to your computer through your home stereo
system if you plug it into this jack. This is especially useful if
you want to play MP3 files on your stereo.
Line In
You can record a cassette, audio CD, or the radio by
plugging a stereo system into this jack.
Game Port
This port lets you connect a joystick, used for playing games, to your
computer.
62 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
Standard Modems:
Transmit information over
standard phone lines to
other computers.
Maximum speed is
56K bps.
Broadband and Digital
Modems:
Much faster than standard
modems, with speeds up
to 4,000K bps. Broadband
modems include ISDN,
DSL, and Cable.
Lesson 2-13: Modem
Just about every new computer comes with a built-in modem. A modem translates a
computers ones and zeros into audio tones, so that it can transmit information over the
phone lines to other modems. The speed of a modem is measured by fast it can transmit
information in bits per second (bps). Modems can be either internal or external
Internal: Most computers have an internal modem, like the one shown in Figure
2-29. Internal modems often plug into an expansion slot and are cheaper than
external modems.
External: An external modem, like the one shown in Figure 2-30, plugs in to a
computers serial port. Newer, broadband modem may plug into the USB or Ethernet
port. A broadband modem transmits information directly over a connection, unlike
older traditional modems that have to convert the information to tones or sounds
first. Because of this, broadband modems are very, very fastmuch faster than
standard modems. DSL and Cable are the most common types of broadband
connections.
Heres a quick overview of the major types of modems that are available:
Table 2-11: Modem Types and Speeds
Type Speed (in bps) Description
Standard 56K Standard modems connect to a standard telephone line
and are used for dial-up connections to the Internet.
ISDN 56K to 128K One of the older broadband connections. Its only twice
as fast as a traditional modem and pretty much obsolete.
DSL 256K to 6,000K DSL modems take advantage of unused frequencies in
the phone line, such as a pause in conversation. DSL
modems are very fast; the problem is that you have to be
close to a phone company in order to get DSL service.
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

/

B
r
o
a
d
b
a
n
d
Cable 640K to 4,000K A cable modem is the fastest modem you can buy for
home use. The problem is your cable company has to
offer cable Internet access in order to use it.
Figure 2-29
An internal modem plugs
into an expansion slot
inside a computer.
Figure 2-30
An external modem plugs
into a serial port and sits
outside a computer.
Figure 2-31
Most laptops have a
built-in modem.
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 63
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Some computer devices
have both input and
output functions.
Examples include touch
screen monitors and
multifunction printers.
Lesson 2-14: Input/Output
Devices
Some computer devices can be categorized as both an input device and an output device.
For example, a multifunction printer, like the one shown in Figure 2-33 has a scanner
(input) and a printer (output). Fancy touch screen monitors are another example of an
input/output device; they display images (output) and also let users interact with the
computer by pressing areas of the screen (input).
Figure 2-32
A touch screen monitor is
an example of an
input/output device.
Figure 2-33
A multifunction printer is
another example of an
input (scanner)/output
(printer) device.
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33
64 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-15: Hard Drive
A hard drive or hard disk is a computers main storage device. Most hard drives are
tucked away in the system unit of a computer and hidden from view. Although you
normally cant see a computers internal hard drive you can usually hear it whirring
inside when you start the computer or a program. An external hard drive sit outside the
computers system unit and plugs into a USB, Firewire, or SCSI port.
The hard drive is like the file-cabinet portion of your desk. And files really are saved in
folders on a computer, so this really is the perfect analogy. Most computers have a single
hard drive located inside of the computer case labeled C. When a computer has more than
one hard drive they are labeled D, then E, and so on. Unlike RAM, a hard drive retains its
information even when you turn the computer off.
So whats stored on a hard drive? Lets take a look
Operating System Files
A computers operating system, like Windows XP, is stored on the hard drive.
Program Files
Program files are the programs you work with, like your word processor, your
Internet software, or your games. Programs usually comes on floppy disks or CD-
ROMs, to use it first install, or copy, it to your hard drive in order to use the
program.
Data Files
Whenever you create a document or data file on your computer, like a word
processing document, the computer stores it in its temporary memory (RAM.) You
must save your documents to the hard drive or they will be lost when you turn off
your computer.
Figure 2-34
How information is stored
in a file cabinet.
Figure 2-35
How information is stored
on a hard disk.

Storage Notes:
Internal Hard Disk
Speed: Very fast. Most hard
disks have an average
access speed of between 8
to 15 milliseconds (ms).
Capacity: Enormous. Many
hard disks have more than
200 Gigabytes (GB) of
storage.
Cost: Hard disks are
becoming more and more
inexpensive. Byte for byte
they are the most
inexpensive way to store
data.
Unlike floppy disks and
CD-ROMs, most hard
disks reside inside of
the computer or
system unit and cannot
be easily removed.
Information on a hard disk is
organized and grouped into
folders or directories.
Taxes
Investments
Letters
Love Letters
Letter to Bill
Letter to Mary
A file cabinets information is
organized and grouped into
folders.
A folder may contain several
files and even several
subfolders.
A computer stores
information on a hard disk.
A folder may contain several
files and subfolders.
Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 65
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Hard Drive:
A computers main
storage device, usually
labeled C.
Modern hard drives can
store anywhere from
20GB to 250GB of
information.
Average access time is
how fast a hard drive can
find information.
Hard drives are
connected to a computer
through either an IDE or
SCSI interface.
Most hard drives are connected to a computers motherboard through something called an
IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) connection. You can also connect CD-ROM and DVD
drives to an IDE connection. A slight problem with IDE is that it only supports a total of
four devices or drives. This isnt a big deal for most home users, but it is if youre a
business and need a server with lots of hard drives. So theres another way to connect
hard drives to a computer: through a SCSI (pronouncedget thisscuzzy) port. SCSI
connections are often faster than IDE and they can connect up to seven devices instead of
four.
OK, so what else do you need to need to know about hard drives?
Hard Disk Size (or Capacity)
How much information (how many programs and data) a hard drive can store is
measured in bytes, just like RAM. Hard drive sizes in newer computers range from
20 Megabytes (MB) all the way up to 200 Gigabytes (GB)! How big a hard drive
should you get when you buy a computer? Normally try to get at least 40 Gigabytes
if youre a home or small business user. More is better in hard drives, because
programs keep getting bigger.
Average Access Time
A hard drives average access time is how fast it can find information. Average access
time is measured in milliseconds (ms), or 1/1000 of a second. The lower the access
speed, the faster the hard drive. Most newer computer have an average access time of
8 to 15 ms.

Storage Notes:
External Hard Disk
Speed: Very fast, though
normally slower than internal
hard disks.
Capacity: Enormous same
as internal hard disks.
Cost: Slightly more
expensive than internal hard
disks.
66 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-16: Hard Drive
Maintenance
Cars require maintenance to keep them running at their peak performance. Some car
maintenance tasks are simple and routine, such as changing oil every 3,000 miles. Others
are more complicated, such as installing a new radio. Hard drives are no differentthey
require routine maintenance to prevent and/or correct problems and to keep them running
at their best performance.
Figure 2-36
Routine hard drive
maintenance keeps
computers happy and run
smoothly.
Figure 2-37
Most hard disk repair tools
can be found in Microsoft
Windows by right-clicking
the hard drive, selecting
Properties from the
shortcut menu, and
clicking the Tools tab.
Figure 2-38
Hard drives need to be
defragmented periodically
to make them more
efficient.
Create a
fragmentation report
on the selected drive
Figure 2-38
Defragment the
selected drive
Figure 2-36
Figure 2-37
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 67
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Hard Drive Repair and
Fragmentation:
Over time, small errors
and fragmentation can
degrade the performance
of a hard drive. These
problems can be
corrected by a hard drive
utility program.
Hard Drive Backups:
Should be preformed to
give you an extra copy of
your files if your hard
drive becomes damaged.
Virus Protection:
Software should be
installed on every
computer to protect
against malicious
computer viruses.
Compression:
Increases the space on a
hard drive by
compressing, or
squeezing together, its
files.
By now youre probably wondering How does one maintain a hard drive? There are
quite a few ways:
Repair a Hard Drive
Over time, hard drives can become damaged, effecting their performance.
Fortunately most of the hard drive damage is caused by normal wear and tear is not
serious. You can diagnose and correct most hard drive problems with a hard drive
repair program. Microsoft Windows comes with a built-in hard drive repair program.
Defragmenting a Hard Drive
Normally a computer stores a file in the same location on a hard drive. Over time, a
hard drive can be come fragmented, and instead of storing a file in the same location
it begins storing parts of it all over. When the computer needs to read a fragmented
file, it must read several different parts of the hard drive instead of just one.
Defragmenting a hard drive puts the fragmented files back together in one place. You
should your computers hard drive about once a month.
Backing up a Hard Drive
A computers hard drive keeps information even when the computer is turn off, but
you still should backup the documents you create to some type of removable storage,
like a CD-RW or tape backup. This will give you an extra copy of your files in case
your hard drive becomes damaged.
Virus Protection
A computer virus is actually a small computer program written by a malicious person
with the purpose of vandalizing computers by erasing information on their hard drive
and causing other problems. Anti-Virus programs that protect computers against
viruses, like Norton AntiVirus or McAfee VirusScan, are available at most computer
stores. If you even thinking about connecting to the Internet, and if you have a
computer you probably are, you need to have AntiVirus software installed on your
computer.
Hard Drive Compression
A computer can increase space on a hard drive by using a special program to
compress, or squeeze together, the files stored on a hard drive. Most data
compression programs can effectively double the amount of information a hard drive
can store. Sounds great, so why dont many people use disk compression? First, data
compression slows your hard drive because the computer has to uncompress files
before it can read them. Second, data compression often causes more problems in
hard drives. Third, several programs wont run on computer with compressed hard
drives. Dont compress your hard drive unless you absolutely have to, and even then
it might be better to start looking for a new, larger hard drive than to use data
compression.
Make sure you install
AntiVirus software on
your computer to
prevent malicious
computer viruses.
68 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-17: CD-ROM Drive
Another type of drive almost all computers have is a CD-ROM drive (CD-ROM stands
for Compact Disc-Read Only Memory). CD-ROM drives play CD-ROM discsthe same
kind of compact discs you can play in your stereo system. CD-ROMs can store lots of
information: a single CD-ROM can hold more than 600 Megabytes (MB) of datamore
than an encyclopedia set! Unlike a hard drive, most CD-ROMs can only read
informationyou cant save, or record anything on them (thats what the ROM in CD-
ROM stands for: Read Only Memory!) On the other hand, CD-RW drives can read and
write (or burn) to special CD-R and CD-RW discs (the RW in CD-RW stands for
ReWritable.) The CD-ROM drive is usually labeled D on most computers.
The speed of a CD-ROM drive determines how quickly the computer can read
information stored on the CD-ROM. The faster a CD-ROM drive spins, the faster your
computer can run programs, and the better the programs will run and videos and sound
will be. The original CD-ROM drive was no faster than an audio CD player, so the speed
of all subsequent CD-ROM drives is measured by how many times faster they are than
the original, 1x CD-ROM drive. Todays CD-ROM drives are up to sixty times (60x)
faster than original.
Figure 2-39
A typical CD-ROM drive.
Figure 2-40
A CD-ROM drive can also
play the same, great audio
CDs that a stereo system
does.
Figure 2-41
CD-ROM speeds are
measured by how many
times faster they are than
the original, 1x CD-ROM
drive.

Storage Notes:
CD-ROM
Speed: Much slower than a
hard disk, but still faster than
a floppy.
Capacity: About
650 Megabytes (MB).
Cost: Very inexpensive.
CD-ROM
Speed
Transfer
Rate
8x 1,000 KB/s
10x 1,600 KB/s
12x 1,800 KB/s
16x 2,400 KB/s
24x 3,600 KB/s
32x 4,800 KB/s
40x 6,000 KB/s
48x 7,200 KB/s
60x 9,000 KB/s
Figure 2-39
Figure 2-40
Figure 2-41
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 69
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
CD-ROM:
Stands for Compact Disc-
Read Only Memory. A
CD-ROM drive lets you
install programs, run
CD-ROM based
programs, and play audio
CDs. A CD-ROM holds
about 650MB of
information.
CD-R:
Stands for Compact Disc-
Recordable. Lets you
permanently write or burn
information.
CD-RW:
Stands for Compact Disc-
ReWritable. Can be
written to and modified
many times.
Here are some things you can do with CD-ROMs:
Install Programs
More programs are coming on CD-ROMs because of their large storage capacity.
Instead of installing and copying 20 floppies to your hard drive, you only have to
install a single CD-ROM.
Run CD-ROM Programs
CD-ROM-based programs are usually the coolest programs available for your
computer. CD-ROM programs often have rich, exiting multimedia content: high
quality sounds, music, videos, and animations. For example, a popular CD-ROM
program is a complete, searchable encyclopedia set which contains high quality
pictures, sounds, music, and videos.
Play Audio CDs
Most CD-ROM drives are capable of playing audio CDsthe same kind your stereo
uses! So your computer can play music while you work.
Table 2-12: Types of CDs
CD Type Description
CD-ROM The original, standard CD, CD-ROM stands for Compact Disc, Read-Only Memory. What
this means is that you can only read information from a CD-ROM; you cant add new
information in a way.
CD-R If you have a CD-RW drive you can permanently store information on a CD-R (Compact
Disc-Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a CD-R is permanent and
cant be changed or erased.
You can also use CD-R discs to create musical CDs that you can listen to in a stereo
system.
CD-RW Unlike CD-R discs, a CD-RW (Compact Disc-ReWritable) disc can be written to many
times. You can also modify and erase information on a CD-RW discif you have a
CD-RW drive, of course.
70 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 2-18: DVD Drive
Next generation DVD drives are quickly replacing CD-ROM drives in newer computers.
A DVD (stands for Digital Versatile Disc) disc looks just like a CD-ROM, but it can store
more than 4 Gigabytes (GB) of informationas much as seven CDs. There are even
rumored to be future DVD discs that can hold up to 17 Gigabytes! Unfortunately there
still really isnt a lot of software that is available on DVD discs. Most people simply use
their DVD drive to watch DVD movies. The CD-ROM drive is usually labeled D or E on
most computers.
New re-writable DVD drives, that can record or burn information to special type of DVD
discs have recently become available the market. Unfortunately for the consumer, the
greedy DVD manufacturers couldnt agree on a universal recordable DVD standard, so
there are several different competing formats out there. Hopefully consumers will
eventually make the decision for the DVD manufacturers, like they did between Betamax
and VHS videotapes. Until then there isnt really any clear answer which recordable and
rewritable DVD format to go with, although both DVD+RW and DVD-RW discs work in
most newer DVD drives and players. We can tell you that recordable DVD-RAM format
is almost universally not compatible with most DVD players. Table 2-13: DVD Formats
tries to make sense of all the available formats. For more information on recordable DVD
standards visit http://www.dvdrhelp.com/dvdplayers.php on the Web.
Table 2-13: DVD Formats
DVD Format Description
DVD-ROM The original, standard DVD, ROM stands for Read-Only Memory. What this
means is that you can only read information from a DVD; you cant add new
information in a way.
DVD-R If you have a DVD-RW drive you can permanently store information on a
DVD-R (DVD-Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a DVD-R is
permanent and cant be changed or erased.
DVD-RW drives can also write to DVD-RW discs
Figure 2-42
A DVD disc looks almost
identical to a CD-ROM
disc.
Figure 2-43
The DVD logo.
Figure 2-44
A single DVD can store as
much information as
several CD-ROMs.
Figure 2-45
A DVD drive can also play
the same, great movies
that you can watch on a
DVD player.

Storage Notes:
DVD
Speed: Faster than a
CD-ROM drive but not as fast
as a hard disk.
Capacity: Usually about
4 Gigabytes (GB), although
future DVD discs are
rumored to hold up to
17 Gigabytes (GB).
Cost: Slightly more than a
CD-ROM but still very
inexpensive.
Figure 2-42
Figure 2-43
Figure 2-44
Figure 2-45
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 71
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
DVD:
Stands for Digital
Versatile Disc. A DVD disc
looks like a CD-ROM, but
can store much more
information.
Recordable and
ReWritable DVDs:
There are several
competing, non-
compatible formats out
there, including DVD-R
/DVD-RW and DVD+R/
DVD+RW.
DVD Format Description
DVD-RW If you have a DVD-RW drive you can use DVD-RW (ReWritable) discs, which
can be re-written to up to 1,000 times. You can also modify and erase
information on a DVD-RW disc. DVD-RW discs have some compatibility
problems with older DVD Players and DVD ROM drives.
DVD-RW drives can also write to DVD-R discs.
DVD+R If you have a DVD+RW drive you can permanently store information on a
DVD+R (DVD+Recordable) disc. The information you write or burn to a DVD+R
is permanent and cant be changed or erased.
DVD+RW drives can also write to DVD+RW discs.
DVD+RW If you have a DVD+RW drive you can use DVD+RW (ReWritable) discs, which
can be re+written to up to 1,000 times. You can also modify and erase
information on a DVD+RW disc. DVD+RW discs have some compatibility
problems with older DVD Players and DVD ROM drives.
DVD+RW drives can also write to DVD+R discs.
DVD-RAM DVD-RAM is a rewritable DVD format, that can be re-written to many times.
DVD-RAM discs are beginning to look like an orphan format, since they wont
work in most DVD players.
72 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
Floppy Disks:
Are slow and can only
store 1.44MB. They are
all but obsolete.
Lesson 2-19: Floppy Drive
Most desktop computers still have a floppy drive, although most laptops have dropped
the all-but-obsolete floppy drive. Floppy drives read flat, 3-inch floppy disks. Floppy
drives are as slow as molasses when compared to hard drives and CD-ROM drives.
Slower. Slow as a glacier. Floppy disks can only store a scant 1.44 Megabytes (MB)
just a little more than your typical novel.
So why are these relics from the 1980s still around? Floppy disks can still be useful for
transferring and backing up small documents. Some other uses for floppy disks include:
A mini cutting board
An eye patch (for one-eyed software pirates)
A room dividers for hamsters
Put them in your shirt pocket to make you either look smart or like an aging nerd
Figure 2-46
A relic of the past, floppy
disks dont have the speed
or capacity to be very
useful in the 21
st
century.

Storage Notes:
Floppy Disk
Speed: Very slow.
Capacity: Very small
1.44 Megabytes (MB).
Cost: Very cheap.
Figure 2-46
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 73
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Zip and Jaz drives are
removable storage
devices that have
features of both floppy
and hard disks.
Lesson 2-20: Zip and Jaz Drives
Removable storage drives have features of both hard drives and floppy drives.
Removable storage drives work like a floppy drive because they read and write
information on small, removable cassettes that are about the size of a floppy disk. They
are like hard drives because each cassette can usually hold more than 100 Megabytes
(MB) and is much faster than a floppy disk, but still not quiet as fast as a hard drive. Two
of the most popular removable storage drives are the Zip drive and Jaz drive, both made
by Iomega.
Zip disks can store 100 to 250 Megabytes (MB) on a removable diskabout 70 to 170
times as much as an old floppy disk. Zip drives are available in both 100MB and 250MB
versions. Youll need a 250MB version to read both 100MB and 250MB Zip disks. Zip
disks are a great way to transfer and backup informationbut theyre not much of value
when compared to newer CD-RW and even newer DVD-RW discs.
Jaz disks can store 1 to 2 Gigabytes (GB) on a single removable diskas much as an
older hard drive! Jaz drives are also fast, though not as fast as a hard disk, so theyre great
for backing up information. Despite their huge storage capacities, Jaz drives really never
caught on.
Figure 2-47
A Zip drive can store
100MB or 250MB on
removable Zip disks.
Figure 2-48
A Jaz drive can store 1GB
or 2GB on a removable
Jaz disk.

Storage Notes:
Zip Drive
Speed: Significantly slower
than most hard disks.
Capacity: 100 to
250 Megabytes (MB).
Cost: Expensive when
compared to costs of
equivalent CD-RW discs and
other storage devices.

Storage Notes:
Jaz Drive
Speed: Slower than most
hard disks, but faster than a
Zip disk.
Capacity: 2 Gigabytes (GB).
Cost: Fairly expensive when
compared to costs of
equivalent CD-RW discs and
other storage devices.
Figure 2-47
Figure 2-48
74 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
Other Storage Devices
Include:
Tape drives
LS-120 Super drives
Flash cards
USB flash drives
Lesson 2-21: Other Storage
Devices
Weve covered the main storage devices that are out there, but it seems as if one or two
new storage devices are invented and released every year; some make it, some dont.
Heres a run-down on some of the less common storage devices that are out there:
Table 2-14: Other Storage Devices
Device Description
Tape Drive
A tape drive creates copies, or backups, of the files on a computers hard drive
onto a tape cartridge. The backed up files can be restored in case the original
files are lost due to a disaster or stupidity.
LS-120 SuperDrive
The LS-120 drive was meant to be an alternative to Zip disks, because it could
store 120 MB of data on a disk, and a replacement for floppy drives, because it
could also read and write to traditional 1.44 MB floppy disks. Unfortunately
LS-120 never really caught on with the general public.
Flash Cards
Flash cards are commonly used as the film for digital cameras. Flash cards
can store anywhere from a dozen to several hundred pictures, depending on
how much memory they have. There are three different types of flash cards:
CompactFlash cards, SmartMedia cards, and Memory Sticks. Flash cards can
store anywhere from 4 MB all the way up to 1 GB. Wow!
USB Flash Drive
A USB flash drive is really another type of Flash Card that plugs into a USB
port. USB flash drives range in sizes from 16 MB to 512 MB.
Figure 2-49
Flash cards are most
commonly used as the
film in digital cameras
and can also be read by
many PDAs and most
computers.
Figure 2-50
A tape backup
automatically makes a
copy, or backup, of all the
files on a computers hard
drive.
Figure 2-49
Figure 2-50
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 75
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Formatting a Disk:
Prepares it for use, so
that it can be read and
use by the computers
operating system.
Formatting a disk erases
everything on it.
Lesson 2-22: Formatting a Disk
Floppy disk must before formatted before you can use them. Fortunately today most
floppy disks you can buy comp pre-formatted, so you dont have to do it yourself. When
you format a disk, you erase everything on it and prepare it so that it can be read and used
by the computers operating system. Actually, you can format most storage devices, such
as a hard disks and Zip disks, only youll want to be extra careful about formatting these
devices, as theres a lot more information that will be erased when you format them.
Its easy to format a floppy disk. Heres the procedure for formatting a floppy disk in
Windows XP
1 1. . Click the Start button and select My Computer.
The My Computer window will display your computers various storage devices.
2 2. . Right-click the drive containing the floppy disk you want to format
(usually A:), and select Format from the shortcut menu.
The Format dialog box appears. There are several options you can specify when
formatting a floppy disksee Figure 2-52 to see what they are.
3 3. . Click Start.
The floppy drive will whir as it formats the floppy disk. Formatting a floppy disk
usually takes about a minute, formatting a hard disk takes a long timeover an
hour if you have a slow computer and large hard disk.
Figure 2-51
Most floppy disks and
hard drives come
preformatted
Figure 2-52
Formatting a floppy disk in
Microsoft Windows XP.
Create an MS-DOS startup
disk
If youre having problems with
your computer, use a startup
disk to help remedy your
problems.
Figure 2-51
Quick (erase)
Erases all information from
the disk, but doesn't scan the
disk for damaged areas. Only
works on disks that have
previously been formatted.
Enable Compression
Formats the volume so that
folders and files on it are
compressed. Compression is
supported only on NTFS
drives.
Figure 2-52
76 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Chapter Two Review
Lesson Summary
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is the computers main chip. It calculates and processes
information.
CPU speed is measured in megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz).
Common CPUs include: Intel Pentium III, Intel Pentium 4, Intel Celeron, AMD Athlon, AMD
Duron
Memory
Computers function based on the binary system, where on is represented by a one (1) andOff
is represented by a zero (0).
A Bit is the smallest memory unit. Bit stands for binary digit.
Eight bits make one Byte. A byte equals one character (letter, number, or symbol).
1,024 bytes make one Kilobyte (K or KB) which is equivalent to a one-page, double-spaced
letter.
1,048,576 bytes make one Megabyte (M or MB) which is equivalent to a novel.
1,073,741,824 bytes make one Gigabyte (G or GB) which is equivalent to an encyclopedia
set.
1,099, 511,627,776 bytes make one Terabyte (T or TB) which is equivalent to a small
bookstore.
RAM and ROM
RAM: Stands for Random Access Memory. This is computers main memory, which is used to
process information. You can read from and write to RAM. RAM is volatile, and any data
disappears when you shut off computer.
ROM: Stands for Read Only Memory. This is the computers low-level memory, which is used
to perform its most basic functions. You can read from, but not write to ROM.
Mouse
A mouse acts as a handheld pointing device and controls the actions of that blinking item on
your computer screen known as a cursor.
Keyboard
A keyboard lets you enter information and commands into a computer.
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 77
Your Organizations Name Here
Digital Cameras and Web Cams
A digital camera lets you take pictures and transfer them to a computer.
The quality, or resolution of the pictures a digital camera can take are measured in
megapixels, or millions of pixels (dots). The more pixels, the
Other Input Devices
Other input devices include touch pads, AccuPoint

pointing devices, track balls, light pens.

scanners, joysticks, and microphones.
Monitors
A CRT Monitor is an older type of monitor that looks like a television screen.
A Flat Panel LCD Monitor is a newer type of monitor that is thin, lightweight and somewhat
expensive.
The size of a monitor is measured diagonally across the screen. Average monitor sizes range
from 15-inches to 21-inches.
The monitor refresh rate determines how quickly the monitor redraws, or updates, the image
on the screen. Most monitors have a refresh rate of 72MHz or better.
A screen saver is a moving picture that appears on your computer screen when you dont use
your computer for a while.
Graphics Cards
Screen Resolution determines how much information can fit on the computer screen at once.
Common screen resolutions include 800 by 600 and 124 by 768.
Color Depth is the number of colors that are displayed on the screen at once. Common color
depths include 16-bit and 24-bit color.
Video Cards have their own memory and processor. Generally speaking, the more memory a
video card has the higher the resolution and color depth it can display.
Printer Basics
InkJet and Laser printers are the most common printer types.
Printer resolution determines the quality of the images a printer can produce. Printer
resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi).
A printers speed determines how quickly it can print pages.
Printers get their ink from expensive cartridges (InkJet printers) and toners (laser printers).
Many printers have their own memory, which is required for printing more complex images.
A print spooler or buffer temporary stores large print jobs and releases them when the
printer is able to actually print them.
Types of Printers
Print types include InkJet, laser and color laser, multifunction, dot matrix, and plotters.
78 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Sound and Speakers
A sound card lets a computer play and record digital sounds.
Modems
A standard modem transmits information over standard phone lines to other computers and
has a maximum speed of 56K bps.
A broadband or digital modem is much faster than a standard modem, with speeds up to
6,000K bps. Broadband modems include ISDN, DSL, and Cable.
Input/Output Devices
Some computer devices have both input and output functions. Examples include touch screen
monitors and multifunction printers.
Hard Drive
A hard drive is a computers main storage device, usually labeled C.
Modern hard drives can store anywhere from 20GB to 250GB of information.
Average access time is how fast a hard drive can find information.
Hard drives are connected to a computer through either an IDE or SCSI interface.
Hard Drive Maintenance
Hard Drive Repair and Fragmentation: Over time, small errors and fragmentation can
degrade the performance of a hard drive. These problems can be corrected by a hard drive
utility program.
Hard Drive Backups: Should be preformed to give you an extra copy of your files if your hard
drive becomes damaged.
Virus Protection: Software should be installed on every computer to protect against
malicious computer viruses.
Compression: Increases the space on a hard drive by compressing, or squeezing together,
its files.
CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM: Stands for Compact Disc-Read Only Memory. A CD-ROM drive lets you install
programs, run CD-ROM based programs, and play audio CDs. A CD-ROM holds about
650MB of information.
CD-R: Stands for Compact Disc-Recordable. Lets you permanently write or burn information.
CD-RW: Stands for Compact Disc-ReWritable. Can be written to and modified many times.
DVD Drive
DVD: Stands for Digital Versatile Disc. A DVD disc looks like a CD-ROM, but can store much
more information.
Recordable and ReWritable DVDs: There are several competing, non-compatible formats
out there, including DVD-R /DVD-RW and DVD+R/ DVD+RW.
Chapter Two: Understanding Hardware 79
Your Organizations Name Here
Floppy Drive
Floppy disks are slow and can only store 1.44MB. They are all but obsolete.
Zip and Jaz Drives
Zip and Jaz drives are removable storage devices that have features of both floppy and hard
disks.
Other Storage Devices
Other storage devices include tape drives, LS-120 Super drives, flash cards, and USB flash
drives.
Formatting a Disk
Formatting a disk prepares it for use, so that it can be read and use by the computers
operating system. Formatting a disk erases everything on it.
Quiz
1. The speed of a CPU is measured in what?
A. Megahertz (MHz) and gigahertz (GHz)
B. Horsepower
C. Bits per second (Bps)
D. Lux
2. How much information can be stored in a kilobyte?
A. As much as a one page letter.
B. As much as a novel.
C. As much as an encyclopedia set.
D. As much as a bookstore.
3. Generally speaking, which of the following storage devices can hold
the most information?
A. A hard disk
B. A Zip disk
C. A CD-ROM
D. A DVD
4. What is another name for a computers main memory?
A. RAM
B. ROM
C. RUM
D. Flash
80 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
5. You can read and write to a computers ROM. (True or False?)
6. Which of the following modems is the slowest?
A. ISDN
B. DSL
C. Cable
D. Standard
7. Which of the following modems is the slowest?
A. ISDN
B. DSL
C. Cable
D. Standard
8. Which of the following can you read and write to many times?
A. CD-ROM
B. CD-R
C. CD-RW
D. DVD-ROM
Quiz Answers
1. A. The speed of the CPU, or Central Processing Unit, is measured in megahertz
(MHz) and gigahertz (GHz).
2. A. A kilobyte holds 1,024 characters; about as much information as a single
page letter.
3. A. A hard disk will generally have more storage capacity than a Zip disk, CD-
ROM, or even DVD.
4. A. RAM or Random Access Memory.
5. False. A computer can read from ROM but not write to it.
6. D. A standard modem is much slower than the other digital modems.
7. C. You can read and write to a CD-RW, or CD ReWritable disc many times.
Chapter Three:
Understanding
Software
Chapter Objectives:
Learn what an operating system is
Learn what application software is
Learn about word processors, spreadsheets, databases, and more
Learn about programming
This chapter is all about software. Software is a computer program that tells computer
hardware how to operate. Software is even more diverse than hardwarethere are
thousands and thousands of software programs out there. Software ranges from the
Windows XP operating system that manages your computer, to the word processor you
use to print letters, to the Web browser you use to purse the Internet.
This chapter will give you an incredibly broad overview of the various types of software
out there. Well explain what at operating system does and provide a quick history of
various operating systems. Next well take a quick tour of the most popular types of
programs out there, from word processors to databases. Finally well take a glance at
some of the more common programming languages that is used to write software.
; Prerequisites
A desire to learn about
computers.
The ability to read.
82 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
A Graphical User
Interface, or GUI, makes
computers easier to
operating by using
pictures and icons to
represent files and
programs.
Lesson 3-1: Understanding
Graphical User Interfaces
Originally, the information on a computer screen was strictly text, and that text was
manipulated using a keyboard. Then computers started using graphical images on the
screen to represent a program or file. Those images are called icons. Along with the
introduction of icons came the development of graphical user interfaces (GUIs). GUIs
allow computer users to point at pictures and icons and then click the icon to manipulate
that program or file, thus the phrase point and click. Obviously, the mouse is a
manifestation of this point-and-click mentality because the mouse controls the onscreen
cursor.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 make a good illustration of how much easier a GUI makes it to
do things, like delete a file. The following table describes some of the most common
icons youll see in the Windows XP GUI.
Table 3-1: Things Youll See in the Windows XP GUI
Object Object
You use the arrow or pointer to point and
click at things.
The Recycle Bin stores your deleted files.
Click the Start button to access
the programs on a computer.
Click the Close button to close the current
window or program.
Double-click My Computer to access
the drives and files on a computer.
Click the Minimize button to temporarily
hide a window or program.
Double-click the Hard Drive to access
the hard drives folders and files.
Click the Maximize button to expand a
window or program to fill the entire screen.
Double-click the CD-ROM Drive to play
or run the contents of the CD-ROM.
A thumbnail displays a tiny preview of a
digital picture or photograph.
Folders hold files and subfolders, just
like a filing cabinet.
Figure 3-1
The procedure for deleting
a file in a text-based
operating system.
Figure 3-2
The procedure for deleting
a file in a GUI-based
operating system. Which
is easier?
Graphical user
interfaces (GUIs)
allow computer users
to point and click.
Microsoft(R) MS-DOS
(C)Copyright Microsoft Corp
C:\>DEL LETTER.DOC
Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 83
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
An Operating System
Loads automatically and
controls just about
everything on your
computer.
An Application Program:
Helps you accomplish a
certain task, such as
writing a certain task,
such as writing a letter,
browsing the Internet, or
playing a game.
New Software Versions
and Releases
Come out periodically that
add new features to a
programand make its
manufacturers more
money.
Lesson 3-2: Types of Software
Before we delve into the world of software we need to ask and address a few basic
questions:
What is an operating system?
An operating system is a software program that loads automatically and controls just
about everything on your computer. There are a number of operating systems out
there, including MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows XP.
What is an application program?
An application program helps you accomplish a certain task, such as writing a letter,
browsing the Internet, or playing a game. Examples include word-processing
programs, spreadsheets, databases, and games.
Why are new versions of software released year after year?
Software manufacturers will tell you need a new version of their program because it
has new features and fewer bugs. Other people will tell you its so the software
manufacturers can continue to make money year after year. Each software release is
given a new name or number, such as Windows 95, Windows 98, to help distinguish
the software from older versions.
Got it? Great! Lets continue our tour into the world of computer software.
Figure 3-3
Microsoft Windows is an
operating system.
Figure 3-4
Microsoft Excel is an
application program.
Figure 3-5
Not again! Software
manufactures release new
versions of their software
every once in a while to
add features, fix bugs, and
most important of all, to
make money!
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
84 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 3-3: Operating Systems
An operating system is a software program that loads automatically and controls just
about everything on your computer. Heres what an operating system does:
Controls Your Computers Hardware
Windows controls the different devices of your computer system. Its what makes
your printer print, what makes graphics and text appear on your monitor, and what
makes your mouse point and click.
Runs Your Computers Programs
An operating system is what runs all your programs. Without an operating system,
your word processor, Web browser (Internet), and games wouldnt work. An
operating system lets your programs talk to your hardware, so, for example, your
word processor can print things to the printer.
Organizes Files
An operating system stores information in files and folders on your computers local
disk, just like you store files and folders in a filing cabinet.
An operating system is like an orchestra conductor who makes sure all the parts of your
computeryour hardware and programswork together. Operating systems have been
around for a long timeheres a brief history of the various operating systems out there:
Table 3-2: Types of Operating Systems
Operating System Released Description
MS-DOS 1980 MS-DOS stands for Microsoft Disk Operating System.
MS-DOS was one of the earliest PC operating systems
that displayed boring lines of text on the screen instead
of icons and pictures. You performed tasks in MS-DOS
by typing text commands. MS-DOS file names could
only be eight characters long.
Windows 3.1 1992 Windows 3.1 was the first successful operating system
for the PC that featured a GUI (Graphical User
Interface) that used easy to use pictures instead of hard-
to-remember MS-DOS commands. Technically
speaking, Windows 3.1 was not a true operating system,
since it still required MS-DOS to operate.
Figure 3-6
MS-DOS is a text-based
operating system from the
Stone Age.
Figure 3-7
Introducing the Start
menu! Microsoft Windows
95 was a very popular
operating system that
features long file names,
better performance, and a
easy-to-use interface.
C:\>
A command prompt is
where you type
commands in MS-DOS.
Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 85
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
An Operating System
Loads automatically and
controls just about
everything on your
computer.
Operating System Released Description
Windows 95 1995 The incredibly successful successor to Windows 3.1,
Windows 95 was a true operating system (no more
MS-DOS), featured long file names, better performance,
and a greatly improved interface.
Windows 98 1998 Very similar with Windows 95, Windows 98 included
several new and improved features. More importantly,
Windows 98 came with support for many of the new
hardware devices out there.
Windows ME 2000 Windows ME was the successor to Windows 98. ME
stands for Millennium Edition or Mistake Eternal,
depending who you talk to. Windows ME was very
similar to Windows 95 and 98 but it included new
multimedia features, new utilities and lots of new bugs.
Windows NT 1993 Windows NT (stands for New Technology) was a
powerful 32-bit operating system that was faster, more
secure, and much more stable than Windows 95 or 98.
Windows NT was designed for use in large companies
where stability and security were especially important.
Windows 2000 2000 Windows 2000 was the successor to Windows NT.
Windows 2000 includes the best features of Windows
98 (easy Plug and Play hardware installation) and
Windows NT (security and stability). Windows 2000 is
still widely used in many businesses.
Windows XP Home 2001 Windows XP (stands for eXPeriencehuh?) Home is
designed for home and consumer computing and is the
successor to Windows ME. Windows XP has the same
technology found in Windows NT and 2000, so its much
more stable than earlier versions of Windows.
Windows XP Professional 2001 Windows XP Professional is the business edition of
Windows and is the successor to Windows NT and
Windows 2000.
Windows CE / Pocket PC Varies Windows CE (stands for Consumer Electronicswaw?)
is the operating system made by Microsoft used to
power handheld computers or PDAs (Personal Data
Assistants).
Palm OS

Varies The Palm OS is another operating system that can be

found on handheld computers or PDAs.
UNIX Varies UNIX is an older, very powerful operating system that
can run on a computer, mainframe, or network. UNIX
features great performance, security, and reliability.
Linux Varies Linux is a newer UNIX-base operating system that is
available for FREE on the Internet. Linux is becoming a
popular alternative to Microsoft Windows.
Mac OS X 2001 Mac OS X is the latest operating system for Macintosh
computers.
86 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
A word processor is a
program that lets you
create letters and
documents.
Lesson 3-4: Word Processing
Perhaps the most widely used and recognized computer application, word processing
software lets you create letters, reports, and many other documents on a computer.
Create Letters and Documents
Whether its a 500 page steamy romance novel or a quick thank-you note to your
neighbor, a word processor makes writing things easier. Best of all, a word processor
lets you change, or edit, the text in a document before it appears on paper. You can
easily add, delete, or rearrange the text in a word processing document. Most word
processors also allow you to check your documents for spelling and grammar errors.
Format Text
Most word processors can make the text in your documents look prettyeven if
youre a terrible. For example, you can use various fonts, or typefaces, create
bulleted or numbered lists, and change the alignment of text on the page.
Create Tables
Tables are great: they are ranked right up there with the spell checker as one of the
neatest word processing features. A table neatly arranges text and data in a grid,
organized by columns and rows.
Add Images
Most word processors let you insert pictures and images to create all kinds of neat
documents: newsletters, greeting cards, pamphlets, and more.
Perform Mail Merges
Mail merge letters are used to send the same or similar documents to many different
people at once. Since they contain the recipients name, address, and other
information, mail merge letters feel more personaljust like a typical sweepstake
letters If you have the winning number, Bob Boyarksi, You are the winner of $10
Million Dollars!
Figure 3-8
A word processor lets you
write letters, resumes, and
much, much more.
Microsoft Word is the
worlds most popular
word processing
software program.
Figure 3-8
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 87
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A spreadsheet is a
program that organizes,
calculates, and presents
numbers.
Lesson 3-5: Spreadsheets
Spreadsheet programs are super-powered calculators. Have you ever found yourself using
a calculator to add together more than 5 or 6 numbers? If so, you probably could be using
a spreadsheet program to make working with numbers faster, easier, and more accurate.
You can also analyze data and make it into charts with a spreadsheet.
Perform Calculations
A spreadsheet can add various cells, perform powerful formulas, and calculate and
analyze information. The entire spreadsheet is updated and recalculated every time
you change a value. That way you can change one number to see how it affects
everything else.
Manage and Organize Information
Spreadsheets neatly arrange values in a grid, organized by columns and rows. You
can use a spreadsheet to present information in a professional and easy-to-read
format. You can also use a spreadsheet to store large collections of data, such as
mailing and product lists.
Format and Present Information
You can enhance the appearance of all those numbers by using various fonts, or
typefaces, borders, shading, and more.
Create Charts
Like the saying a picture is worth a thousand words, charts are often better at
presenting information than hard-to-read numbers in a spreadsheet. A chart illustrates
data, relationships, or trends graphically.
Figure 3-9
A spreadsheet program is
useful for calculating and
presenting information
even if its not what you
want to see
Microsoft Excel is the
worlds most popular
spreadsheet software
program.
Figure 3-9
88 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 3-6: Databases
In its simplest form, a database is a collection of information that is organized into a list.
Whenever you make a list of information, such as names, addresses, products, or
invoices, you are, in fact, creating a database. Technically speaking, you dont even have
to use a database program to create a database.
A database program, however, is much more powerful than a simple list you keep on
paper. A database program lets you:
Store Information
A database stores lists of information that are related to a particular subject or
purpose. A database stores personal information, such as a list of aunt Mildreds
home recipes, or business information, such as a list of hundreds of thousands of
customers. A database also makes it easy to add, update, organize, and delete
information.
Find Information
You can easily and instantly locate information stored in a database. For example,
you can find all the customers with the last name Johnson or all the customers who
live in the 55417 zip code and are older than 65.
Analyze and Print Information
You can perform calculations on information in a database. For example, you could
calculate what percent of your total sales comes from the state of Texas. You can also
present information in a professional-looking printed report.
Manage Information
Databases make it easy to work with and manage huge amounts of information. For
example, with a few keystrokes you can change the area code for hundreds of
customers in the (612) area code to a new (817) area code.
Share Information
Most database programs allow more than one user to view and work with the same
information at once. Such databases are called multi-user databases.
Figure 3-10
A database stores and
manages information
related to a particular
subject or purpose.
Microsoft Access is
the worlds most
popular database
software program.
Field
A specific type of
information, such
as the last names
of your
employees.
Record
A collection of
information about
one person or
thing, such as the
name and address
of one employee.
Figure 3-9
Field Names
A name that
identifies the
information in a
field.
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 89
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A database program
stores, manages, and
organizes lists of
information.
Databases usually consist of several parts. The table on this page identifies the main
components of a database.
Table 3-3: Database Objects
Object Description
Tables
Tables store a databases data in rows (records) and columns (fields). For
example, one table could store a list of customers and their addresses while
another table could store the customers orders. A database must always
contain at least one table where it can store informationall the other database
objects are optional.
Queries
Queries ask a question of data stored in a table. For example, a query might
only display customers who are from Texas.
Forms
Forms are custom screens that provide an easy way to enter and view data in a
table or query.
Reports
Reports present data from a table or query in a printed format.
Code
Programming code help you perform routine tasks by automating them into a
single command.
90 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
A presentation software
program is used to
create professional,
convincing presentations,
or slide shows.
Lesson 3-7: Presentation
Software
A presentation program turns your ideas into professional, convincing presentations, or
slide shows. If youve ever used an overhead projector, flip chart, or even a black board,
youll love presentation software! A presentation program lets you create slides that
include text, graphics, charts, and even digital movies! Once you have created a
presentation, you can display it as an electronic slide show on any computer.
Create Professional Presentations
There really wasnt much to the movie Star Wars I: Attack of the Clones, but it sure
looked impressive! Presentation software can do the same thing for presentations,
making even the dullest speech look more professional.
Add Drawings, Charts, and Illustrations
Presentations with pictures, graphics, and visuals are much more compelling and
effective at conveying messages than ones that contain only boring text. Microsoft
PowerPointer, presentation softwaremakes it easy to add pictures and drawings
to your slides, making them look as though you hired a professional graphic design
company to create them.
Outline What You Want to Say
If you think way back to your high school speech class, you might remember that
you learned to organize a presentation by writing down its major points in an outline
(in only some public speakers could remember this!). Most presentation software has
built-in outlining tools to help you organization your presentation. Just remember to
stick to that outline during your presentation!
Figure 3-11
Even if your presentation
stinks, a presentation
program can make it at
least look pretty.
Microsoft PowerPoint
is the worlds most
popular presentation
software program.
Figure 3-11
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 91
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Accounting software
helps manage personal
and/or business finances
and balance accounts.
Lesson 3-8: Accounting
Personal finance and accounting software keep track of your personal or business
finances. A personal finance program can show you what your current checking, savings,
or credit card balances are, where youre spending your money, and will even help you
reconcile your account when you get a bank statement. Business accounting programs go
a step furtherthey will create invoices, keep track of your receivables and payables, and
even do payroll. Once you use a personal financing program for your home finances or an
accounting program for your business, youll never know how you ever got along without
one.
Balance Your Checkbook and Manage Finances
Accounting software automatically keeps a running balance of your bank accounts
if you remember to enter your checks and deposits. If you dont many account
programs can download your banking statements.
Write Checks and Pay Bills
You can purchase special checks that you print out on your computers printer to
save time and present a more professional image.
Create Invoices
If you run a business, an account program can print invoices and keep track of who
owes you money.
Perform Payroll
Many accounting programs have a payroll module, which deducts, and tracks social
security, medicate, and state and federal employee taxes.
Bank Online
Online banking lets you view your current checking and saving balances, pay bills,
and even accept online credit card payments.
Figure 3-12
Accounting software, like
Intuits Quicken or
QuickBooks (shown here)
can help you pay bills,
balance your bank
account, even perform
payroll!
QuickBooks is a very
popular accounting
software program for
small businesses.
Figure 3-12
92 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quick Reference
A Web browser allows
users to view Web pages
on the Internet.
Lesson 3-9: Web Browsing
Web addresses and pages are everywhereon television advertisements, in magazine and
newspaper articles, and even on business cards. Together, these Web pages make up what
is know as the World Wide Web (WWW) or Web for short. To view a Web page youll
need a piece of software called a Web browser. Luckily you wont need to buy a Web
browse, since it comes standard on most computers. In fact, Microsoft has spent a
considerable amount of money and time in court determining that Windows is actually a
Web browser.
Browse and View Web Pages
Web pages are written in a simple language called HTML, which stands for
Hypertext Markup Language. A Web browser converts the HTML in a Web page into
a readable format and displays that information on your computer screen.
Find Information
You can use a search engine to find just about anything on the World Wide Web. A
search engine catalogs the billions of Web pages on the Internet so that you can find
information on the topics that interest you. Google and Yahoo are two of the most
popular search engines out there.
Download Files
The Internet is filled with files and programs that you can download, or save to your
computer. You can download images and pictures, programs, even MP3 files that you
can listen to.
Shop
You can spend lots of money on the World Wide Web. Anything that you can buy in
a store you can probably buy on the Internet. People use the Internet to shop for
books, computers, clothes, and even cars!
Figure 3-13
A Web browser lets you
view Web pages on the
Internet.
Figure 3-13
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 93
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A Web Authoring
program lets users
create Web pages in
HTML that they can then
publish to the Internet.
Lesson 3-10: Web Authoring
A few years ago, only the brainy computer types knew how to write their own Web
pages. Today Web Authoring programs make it easy for even a novice to get their own
Web site up on the Internet for the whole world to see.
Create Web Pages
All those pretty Web pages you visit on the Internet are written in a simple language
called HTML (stands for HyperText Markup Language). Its actually possible to
create a Web page by writing it directly in HTML using a simple text editor or word
processor, but most people use Web Authoring software because its so powerful and
easy to use.
Insert Images
Web Authoring software makes it easy to add pictures and graphics to a Web page,
whether its a professional logo for a corporate Web site or a fake photograph for an
online dating service.
Add Hyperlinks
You can easily and hyperlinks to a Web page that point to other sites of interest on
the Internet.
Publish Your Web Pages to the Internet
A Web site isnt any good if people cant see it. Most Web Authoring programs have
tools to help you upload, or save your Web pages on to the Internet.
Figure 3-14
Web Authoring software
can help you create
spectacular Web pages,
like the newsletter shown
here.
Macromedia
Dreamweaver is a very
popular Web authoring
software program.
Figure 3-14
94 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 3-11: Programming
Languages
All software programs, from Microsoft Windows XP to Word 2000 are written in a
programming language. A programming language is a vocabulary and set of grammatical
rules for instructing a computer to perform specific tasks.
Computers can only understand special machine languages, which consist almost entirely
of numbers. Humans, however, cant understand these huge series of numbers, so they
use high-level programming languages, such as C++ and Java to write software programs
and then translate or compile them into machine language.
Every language has its strengths and weaknesses. For example, FORTRAN is a good
language for processing numbers, but its not well suited to for large programs. C++ has
powerful object-oriented features, but it is complex and difficult to learn. There are
literally hundreds, if not thousands, of programming languages out there. The following
table briefly describes some of the more common programming languages you might
overhear computer nerds discussing.
Table 3-4: Common Programming Languages
Language Description
Machine Language
The lowest-level programming language, machine languages can be read by
computers, but are almost impossible for humans to use because they consist
entirely of numbers.
Assembly Language
Assembly languages have the same structure and set of commands as
machine languages, but they enable a programmer to use names instead of
numbers when writing code.
Figure 3-15
Microsoft Visual Basic lets
users create programs
using a graphical
programming environment
and painting metaphor.
Figure 3-15
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 95
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
A programming
language is a vocabulary
and set of grammatical
rules for instructing a
computer to perform
specific tasks.
Language Description
SQL
SQL, or structured query language, is a standardized language for requesting
information from a database.
BASIC
Acronym for Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code, BASIC is one
of the earliest and simplest high-level programming languages and was taught
by educators to students during the 1970s and 80s.
C, C++
A high-level programming language developed in the mid 1970s and is still one
of the most popular programming languages in use today. C is similar
assembly language and allows programmers to write very efficient code. C++
adds many object-oriented features to its predecessor, C.
COBOL
COBOL, or common business oriented language, was developed back in the
late 1950s, and despite its age is still used on many mainframe computers.
FORTRAN
Acronym for formula translator, FORTRAN is the oldest high-level
programming language. Despite its age, FORTRAN is still popular for scientific
applications that require extensive mathematical computations.
Java
An object-oriented language developed by Sun Microsystems, similar to C++,
but simplified to eliminate language features that cause common programming
errors. Compiled Java code can run on most computers, including UNIX,
Macintosh, and Windows. Small Java applications called applets can be
downloaded from the Internet and run on your computer.
H
i
g
h
-
L
e
v
e
l
O
b
j
e
c
t
-
O
r
i
e
n
t
e
d
Visual
Basic
Based on BASIC, Microsoft Visual Basic allows users to create programs with
a graphical programming environment and painting metaphor. Visual Basic, or
VB, is sometimes called an event-driven language because each object can
react to different events such as a mouse click.
ASP, JSP
Active Server Pages and Java Server Pages are programming languages that
generate dynamic HTML code and send it back to the browser.
HTML
HTML, or HyperText Markup Language, is the authoring language used to
create documents, or Web pages on the World Wide Web. HTML defines the
structure and layout of a Web document by using of tags and attributes.
JavaScript
A scripting language that enables Web authors to design interactive sites.
Javascript can interact with HTML source code, enabling Web authors to spice
up their sites with dynamic content.
Perl
Short for Practical Extraction and Report Language, Perl is a programming
language designed for processing text.
PHP
An open source, server-side, HTML embedded scripting language used to
create dynamic Web pages.
W
e
b

D
e
v
e
l
o
p
m
e
n
t
XML
Short for Extensible Markup Language, XML allows designers to create their
own customized tags, enabling the definition, transmission, validation, and
interpretation of data between applications and between organizations.
96 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Lesson 3-12: Systems
Development
Computer programs and systems dont appear out of the air; there are a series of
procedures that are normally followed. The steps and procedures for system development
are very similar, no matter its a small company replacing its employee time clock with a
computerized attendance system or a huge software company releasing a new software
program.
Figure 3-16
Possible steps in
developing a computer
system.
Monitoring and Maintenance
Training
Installation
Testing
Programming/
Product Development
System Design and Cost
Feasibility Study
Define Requirements
Figure 3-16
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 97
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Common Steps in
Systems Development:
1. Define Requirements
2. Feasibility Study
3. System Design and Cost
4. Programming/Product
Development
5. Testing
6. Implementation
7. Training
8. Monitoring and
Maintenance
Table 3-5: Common Stages in System Development
Stage Description
Define Requirements Determine the purpose of the system, all inputs, outputs, and control
mechanisms.
Feasibility Study Determine if the system is economically and technically practical.
System Design and
Cost
Create an action plan or blueprint for creating the system, and determine
how much the system will cost.
Programming/
Product Development
Write the programs necessary for the system using a high-level
programming language. Purchase any hardware required by the system.
Testing Test the completed system using real data to identify and correct any bugs.
Implementation Install the completed system and put it to use.
Training Train users on how to use or operate the new system.
Monitoring and
Maintenance
Problems usually arise soon after implementation that must be corrected.
Computer systems often require upgrades and routine maintenance.
98 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Chapter Three Review
Lesson Summary
Understanding Graphical User Interfaces
A Graphical User Interface, or GUI, makes computers easier to operating by using pictures
and icons to represent files and programs.
Types of Software
An operating system loads automatically and controls just about everything on your
computer.
An application program helps you accomplish a certain task, such as writing a certain task,
such as writing a letter, browsing the Internet, or playing a game.
New software versions and releases come out periodically that add new features to a
programand make its manufacturers more money.
Operating Systems
An operating system loads automatically and controls just about everything on your
computer.
Word Processing
A word processor is a program that lets you create letters and documents.
Spreadsheets
A spreadsheet is a program that organizes, calculates, and presents numbers.
Databases
A database program stores, manages, and organizes lists of information.
Presentation Software
A presentation software program is used to create professional, convincing presentations,
or slide shows.
Accounting
Accounting software helps manage personal and/or business finances and balance
accounts.
Web Browsing
A Web browser allows users to view Web pages on the Internet.
Chapter Three: Understanding Software 99
Your Organizations Name Here
Web Authoring
A Web Authoring program lets users create Web pages in HTML that they can then publish
to the Internet.
Programming Languages
A programming language is a vocabulary and set of grammatical rules for instructing a
computer to perform specific tasks.
Systems Development
Common Steps in Systems Development
1. Define Requirements
2. Feasibility Study
3. System Design and Cost
4. Programming/Product Development
5. Testing
6. Implementation
7. Training
8. Monitoring and Maintenance
Quiz
1. An operating system is built-in to a computers ROM-BIOS. (True or
False?)
2. Which of the following is a text-based operating system?
A. Windows 95
B. Windows 2000
C. Windows CE
D. MS-DOS
3. Which of the following programs would be best suited for helping you
calculate a monthly budget?
A. A word processor
B. A spreadsheet
C. A database
D. COBOL
4. Which of the following programs would be best suited for storing a list
of customers and their orders?
A. A word processor
B. A spreadsheet
C. A database
D. COBOL
100 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide Inc.
Quiz Answers
1. False. An operating system is software that the computer loads when it first
starts up.
2. D. MS-DOS is a text-based operating system.
3. B. A spreadsheet would be the program best suited to help you balance your
budget.
4. C. A database would be best suited for storing a list of customers and their
orders.
Chapter Four:
Introduction to
Windows XP
Chapter Objectives:
Start and log on to Windows
Understand the Windows XP screen
Use the mouse to: point, click, double-click, right-click, drag,
and drop
Use the keyboard
Exit Windows and turn off the computer
Welcome to Windows XP! If youre new to Windows youre starting at the right chapter. This
chapter covers the bare bones basics about learning how to start your computer and load
Windows. Youll learn how to operate the mouse by clicking, double-clicking, dragging and
dropping, and right-clicking. Youll also learn about your computers keyboard and what
those cryptic-looking keys on it are used for. Finally, youll learn how to exit Windows and
shut your computer down.
Before we start, take a deep breath and relax. You may find this difficult to believe, but
Windows isnt nearly as difficult and complicated as you probably think they are. No matter
what your previous experience with computers has been, this chapter assumes youre the most
computer-illiterate person in the world and keeps everything as simple as possible. Actually,
youre probably going to find that some of the lessons in this chapter are a little too easy.
When you come across something you already know how to do, go ahead and skip the lesson
(unless youre in a classroom of coursethen go ahead and show everyone what a computer
whiz you are!).
Ready? Did you take that deep breath? Then turn the page and lets get started!
; Prerequisites
An IBM-compatible
computer
Windows XP installed
on the computer
102 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-1: Starting and Logging
On to Windows
When you get to work, after taking off your jacket and grabbing a cup of coffee, you probably
begin your day by turning on your computer and starting Windows. This lesson explains how
to do the absolute most basic thing there is to do with your computerturn it on. Windows
should automatically start after you turn on your computer. If it doesnt, or if a confusing-
looking screen greets you, this lesson also explains what you need to do to load Windows.
1 1. . Turn on your computers monitor.
The On/Off switch for most monitors is located just below the monitors screen. Most
monitors wont display anything until the computer is turned on.
Figure 4-1
The Welcome to Windows
dialog box.
Figure 4-2
The Windows XP Desktop
Figure 4-
Figure 4-2
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 103
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Start Windows
1. Turn on your computer.
2. If necessary, press <Ctrl>
+ <Alt> + <Delete> to
start the log on
procedure.
3. Enter your user name and
password and press
<Enter>.
2 2. . Turn on your computer.
Finding your computers On/Off switch for the first time can be a little tricky. Refer to
your computers reference manual if you cant find the On/Off switch for your
computer. Your computer should make a whirring sound and several clicks and/or
beeps after you turn it on and as it powers up.
NOTE: If nothing happens when you turn your computer on, first check the
computers power cordis it plugged into to the wall or power strip? Check
the other end of the power cord is it securely plugged into the back of the
computer? If your computer is plugged into a power strip or surge protector (it
really should be) check and make sure that the power strip is turned on.
Eventually you should see the Welcome to Windows dialog box. If youre connected to
a Novell Network the dialog you see may be slightly different, but the message will
usually be the samepress Ctrl + Alt + Delete to log on.
3 3. . If necessary, press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete> to start the log on
wprocedure.
The Windows Log On dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 4-.
4 4. . Enter your user name and password and press <Enter>.
Depending on how your computer is setup, the Getting Started with Windows XP
dialog box may appear. Heres how to close it:
5 5. . If the Getting Started with Windows XP dialog box appears click the Exit
button to close it.
If you didnt already know how to turn your computer on, congratulations! Youve just taken
your first step in learning how to operate a computer and Microsoft Windows XP.
104 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-2: Understanding the
Windows XP Screen
You might find the Windows screen a bit confusing and overwhelming the first time you see
it. Nothing on the screen appears familiar to youwhere do you even start? This lesson will
help you become familiar with the main Windows screen, known as the desktop. There isnt a
step-by-step exercise anywhere in this lessonall you have to do is look at Figure 4-3 and
then refer to Table 4-1: Major Parts of the Windows XP Screen, to see what everything youre
looking at means. And, most of all, relax! This lesson is only meant to help you get aquatinted
with Windowsyou dont have to memorize anything.
Figure 4-3
Those are the major parts
of the Windows XP
screen. More items will
probably appear on your
computer, depending on
how it is set up.
Desktop
Figure 4-3
Quick Launch Toolbar Taskbar System Tray Area
Recycle
Bin
Start Menu
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 105
Your Organizations Name Here
Table 4-1: Major Parts of the Windows XP Screen
Item Description
Desktop This is the large, background area of the Windows screen. You can customize the
desktop by adding shortcuts to your favorite programs, documents, and printers.
You can also change the look of the desktop to fit your mood and personality.
My Documents My Documents is a special folder that provides a convenient place to store files and
documents you create on your computer.
My Computer My Computer lets you see everything on your computer. Double-click the My
Computer icon on the desktop to browse through your files and folders.
My Network
Places
If youre on a network, the My Network Places icon will appear on your desktop.
You can double-click the My Network Places icon to browse through the computers
in your workgroup and the computers on the network. If youre connected to the
Internet, the My Network Places icon will on your desktop, since the Internet is
actually a network too.
Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin stores all the files you delete from your computer. You can use the
Recycle Bin to retrieve files youve accidentally deleted and to create more disk
space by emptying the Recycle Bin.
Taskbar The Taskbar usually appears at the bottom of your screen, and contains the famous
Start button, which you use to start your programs. Whenever you open a program,
document, or window, an icon for that program appears on the taskbar. This lets
you see which programs are currently running and allows you to easily switch
between them.
Start Button The Start button lets you quickly open your programs and documents. You can also
use the Start button to find files and change the settings for Windows.
Quick Launch
Toolbar
The Quick Launch Toolbar gives you quick access to your most frequently used
applications. Internet Explorer, Outlook Express, the Windows desktop, and several
Web sites, called channels, are already included on the Quick Launch Toolbar by
default.
Dont worry if you find some of these things confusing at firstthey will make more sense
after youve actually had a chance to use them in the upcoming lessons.
106 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-3: Using the Mouse:
Pointing, Clicking, and
Double-clicking
Just like you control your television set using a remote control, you control Windows by using
the mouse and keyboard. A mouse is a palm-sized device that lets you point at, select, and
move objects on your computer screen. The mouse is linked to the pointer on your computer
screenwhen you move the mouse on your desk, the pointer moves on the computer screen.
Think of the mouse as an electronic extension of your hand. This lesson will show you how to
perform the two most basic mouse actions: clicking, and double-clicking.
1 1. . Rest your hand on the top of the mouse, then move the mouse and watch
as the arrow moves across the screen.
The arrow (also called the cursor or pointer) follows the mouse as you move it across
the desk or mouse pad.
Pointing is the most basic action you can do with the mouse. To point to something,
simply place the mouse pointer over it by moving the mouse. You must point to objects
in order to click or double-click them.
Figure 4-4
Clicking and double-
clicking with the mouse
Figure 4-5
Click the Start button to
open the Windows XP
Start menu.
Figure 4-6
Double-click the My
Computer icon to open it
and display its contents.
Pointer
Click!
Click!
Click!
Click!
Click
Press and
release the left
mouse button.
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Close button
Click!
Click!
Double-click
Quickly press and
release the left
mouse
button twice, in
rapid succession.
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 107
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Point to Something:
Move the mouse so that
the pointer ( ) is over the
object.
To Click:
Point to the object and
press and release the
mouse button.
To Double-click:
Point to the object and
rapidly click the mouse
button two times.
2 2. . Move the mouse pointer until the tip of the pointer is over the Start
button. Leave the pointer there for a few seconds.
A message Click here to begin appears by the pointer after several seconds.
Clicking means pressing and releasing the left mouse button one time. The mouse
makes a clicking noise whenever you press and release one of its buttons, hence the
name clicking. The next steps will show you how to open the Start menu by clicking it.
3 3. . Move the pointer over the Start button and then click the left mouse
button.
When you click the Start button, the Windows XP menu pops-up, as shown in Figure
4-6. Congratulations! Youve just made your first click!
NOTE: Most mice have two mouse buttons. Normally, you use the left mouse button
(unless someone has changed the mouse options and reversed the buttons!)
You can assume you will use the left mouse button whenever you see the
words click or double-click. The right mouse button has its own purposeand
well discuss it in an upcoming lesson.
You can close the Windows XP menu without selecting anything by clicking anywhere
outside the Start menu.
4 4. . Move the pointer anywhere outside the Windows XP Start menu and click
the left mouse button.
Now that youre feeling comfortable with pointing and clicking, well move on to
something a little more tricky: double-clicking. Just as it sounds, double-clicking
means pressing and releasing the mouse button twice in rapid succession. You will
usually open an object, such as a file, folder, or program by double-clicking it.
5 5. . Position your pointer over the Recycle Bin icon and double-click it with
your left mouse button.
Recycle Bin opens to reveal its contents, as shown in Figure 4-6.
NOTE: A lot of people have problems the first time they try double-clicking. If your
double-click doesnt seem to work, its probably because youre either not
holding the mouse steady while youre double-clicking, or else youre not
double-clicking fast enough. If you click the mouse button too hard, you may
inadvertently slide the mouse before youve finished double-clickingand
your double-click wont register. If youre certain that youre holding the
mouse steady while you double-click, you can adjust the double-click speed in
the Windows Control Panel.
6 6. . Close the Recycle Bin window by clicking its Close button, as shown in
Figure 4-6.
Table 4-2: Things you can click and double-click
Click when you want to: Double-click when you want to:
Select something. Open a file.
Open a menu. Open a folder.
Press a button on a toolbar or in a dialog box. Display the properties or settings for an object (in
certain programs)
Move to the area or field you want in a program or
dialog box.
Start button
Recycle Bin icon
Close button
108 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-4: Using the Mouse:
Dragging and Dropping
You can move items around your computer screen by dragging and dropping them with the
mouse. To drag and drop something, you: (1) Move the mouse pointer over the object you
want to move, then click and hold down the mouse button. (2) While you are still holding
down the mouse button, move the mouse until the pointer is over the place you want to put the
object, then (3) Release the mouse button.
This will probably be the most entertaining lesson in the book, because your assignment is to
master dragging and dropping by playing a game of Solitaire! Microsoft included Solitaire
with Windows to help people improve their mouse skills. Youve probably noticed that a lot of
people never stop practicing these skills with Solitaire. Heres how to open Solitaire:
Figure 4-7
Dragging and Dropping
with the mouse
Figure 4-8
You can start a game of
Solitaire by looking under
Programs Games
Solitaire.
Figure 4-9
The Solitaire game, which
comes with Windows
Start button
Drag
Place the pointer over an object and
press and hold down the left mouse
button. While you are still holding the
button, move the mouse to the where
you want to place the object and then
release the mouse button.
Hold down the mouse
button while you drag
the mouse across your
desk.
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Close button
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 109
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Drag-and-Drop:
1. Point to the object you
want to drag and drop
and click and hold down
the mouse button.
2. While youre still holding
down the mouse button,
drag the object to the
desired location on the
screen.
3. Release the mouse
button.
1 1. . Click the Start button.
Remember the Start button is located in the bottom-left corner of your screen. The
Windows XP Start menu appears.
2 2. . Point to the word All Programs.
The All Programs menu pops out to the right.
3 3. . Point to the word Games.
Another menu, the Games menu, pops out, as shown in Figure 4-8.
4 4. . Click the word Solitaire.
Youre finally there! The Solitaire program opens, as shown in Figure 4-9.
5 5. . Play a game of Solitaire and practice dragging and dropping the cards.
If you dont know how to play Solitaire, you can still practice your dragging and
dropping. Just point to a card, click and hold down the mouse button and move the card
around the screen. Release the mouse button to drop the card. If you try dropping a
card in an invalid location, the card will be whisked back to its original pile.
6 6. . Click the Close button located in the top right corner of the Solitaire
program to exit the program when youve finished playing.
The Solitaire program closes.
Okay, there have to be more things to drag and drop besides cards! Although well be
covering this stuff later on, Table 4-3: Things you can drag and drop gives some examples of
when you can use drag and drop.
Table 4-3: Things you can drag and drop
You can do this: By dragging this:
Move a window to a new
location on the screen
Drag the window by its title bar and drop it in a new location on the
screen.
Move a file to a new folder Drag the file and drop it in the desired folder.
Change the size of a window Drag the borders or corners of the window.
Scroll a window to see
something located off-screen
Drag the scroll box (the little elevator) up or down the scroll bar and
drop it in a new location.
Move just about anything on
your computers screen
Point to the object, click, and hold down the mouse button, drag the
object to a new place, and then release the mouse button.
You may have trouble
mastering drag and
drop right away. Dont
get discouraged; this
is a tricky task for
beginners. Just keep
practicing and youll
improve.
Close button
110 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-5: Using the Mouse:
Right-clicking
You already know that the left mouse button is the primary mouse button, used for clicking
and double-clicking, and its the mouse button you will use over 95 percent of the time when
you work with Windows. So whats the right mouse button used for? Whenever you right-
click something, it brings up a shortcut menu that lists everything you can do to the object.
Whenever youre unsure or curious about what you can do with an object, point to it and click
it with the right mouse button. A shortcut menu will appear with a list of commands related to
the object or area you right-clicked.
Right mouse button shortcut menus are a great way to give commands to Windows because
you dont have to wade through several levels of unfamiliar menus when you want to do
something.
1 1. . Move the pointer over the Recycle Bin icon on your desktop and click
the right mouse button.
A shortcut menu appears with a list of commands related to the Recycle Bin, as shown
in Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-10
Right-Clicking
Figure 4-11
The right mouse button
shortcut menu for the
Recycle bin
Figure 4-12
The right mouse button
shortcut menu for the
clock
Figure 4-13
The Local disk (C:)
Properties dialog box
Recycle Bin
Click!
Right-click
Press and
release the right
mouse button.
Figure 4-10 Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12 Figure 4-13
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 111
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Display a Shortcut
Menu for Something:
Point to the object and
click the right mouse
button. Select items from
the shortcut menu with
the left mouse button.
To Close a Shortcut Menu
without Selecting
Anything:
Click anywhere outside
the shortcut menu with
the left mouse button, or
press the <Esc> key.
2 2. . Point to and click the Empty Recycle Bin option on the shortcut menu
with the left mouse button.
You still use the left mouse button to select menu items, even if they are found in a
right-mouse button shortcut menu. A dialog box appears, asking you if you are sure
you want to delete the contents of the Recycle Bin. Better play it safe and
3 3. . Click No with the left mouse button.
Next, you realize the clock displayed on the far right side of the taskbar is ten minutes
fast. You can display the clocks properties by right-clicking the clock.
4 4. . Move the pointer over the Clock, located on the far right side of the
Windows Taskbar, and click the right mouse button.
Another shortcut menu appears, with commands related to the Windows clock, as
shown in Figure 4-12. Notice one of the commands listed on the shortcut menu is
Adjust Date/Time. You would select this menu item if you really wanted to adjust the
date and/or time. You dont want to adjust the date or time, however, so you can move
on to the next step and close the shortcut menu without selecting anything.
5 5. . Click anywhere outside the Clock shortcut menu with the left mouse
button to close the menu without selecting anything.
The final object well right-click in this lesson is the computers local disk. To get to
the local disk you have to open My Computer. Do you remember how to do it?
6 6. . Double-click the My Computer icon.
The My Computer window opens, displaying the contents of your computer. You want
to see how much space is left on your computers local disk. Right-click the Local disk
(C:) icon to get this information.
7 7. . Right-click the Local disk (C:) icon.
A shortcut menu appears, with a list of commands related to the local disk.
8 8. . Click the Properties option on the shortcut menu with the Left mouse
button.
A dialog box appears, showing a graph with how much space is left on your hard drive,
as shown in Figure 4-13.
9 9. . Click Cancel to close the Local Disk (C:) Properties dialog box.
Youre done! Youve learned all the actions you can perform with the mouse. Quick! What are
they again? Pointing, Clicking, Double-clicking, Dragging and Dropping, and Right-clicking.
What an accomplishment!
Right-click an object
to open a shortcut
menu that lists
everything you can do
to the object.
Windows clock
My Computer
Local Disk (C:)
icon
112 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-6: Using the Keyboard
Now that youve mastered the mouse, its time to move on to the other device that you use to
control your computer: the keyboard. The keyboard may seem more familiar and easy to use
than the mouse at first, but dont be fooled! Computer keyboards sneak in some extra keys
that you need to know about. This lesson explains what these extra keys on the keyboard are
and when to use them.
1 1. . Press and hold down the <Alt> key, press the <F4> key, and release both
buttons.
Pressing <Alt> + <F4> closes the currently running program. Since youre using the
Windows Desktop, the Shut Down Windows dialog box appears, as shown in Figure
4-15.
Were not ready to shut Windows down just yet (well cover that in a future lesson).
Follow the next step to back out of the Shut Down Windows dialog box without
selecting anything.
2 2. . Press the <Esc> key.
Pressing <Esc> does the same thing as clicking the Cancel button. The Shut Down
Windows dialog box disappears and youre back at the Windows desktop.
Table 4-4: Special Keys and Their Functions describes the <Alt> and <Esc> keys you just
used, as well some of the other confusing keys on the keyboard.
Figure 4-14
A standard keyboard
(Your computer may have
a slightly different layout
than the one pictured
here.)
Figure 4-15
The Shut Down Windows
dialog box
Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
~
`
!
1
@
2
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
0
+
=
#
3
Q W E R T Y
A S D F G H
Z X C V B
U I O P
J K L
N M
{
[
}
]
:
;
"
'
<
,
>
.
?
/
Tab
Shift
Ctrl Alt
Caps
Lock
Alt Ctrl
Shift
Enter
Backspace
Insert Home Page
Up
Delete End Page
Down
|
\
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
.
Num
Lock
Home PgUp
End PgDn
Ins Del
Enter
/ *
+
Print
Screen
Scroll
Lock
Pause
Scroll
Lock
Caps
Lock
Num
Lock
Shift key
Alt key
Function keys or F keys
Arrow keys
Numeric keypad Ctrl key Shift key
Ctrl key
Alt key
Esc key
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 113
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Use a Keystroke
Combination:
Press and hold down the
first key, press the second
key, then release both
keys. For example, press
the <Tab> key while
youre holding down the
<Alt> key.
To Use the Special Keys
on the Keyboard:
Refer to Table 4-4:
Special Keys and Their
Functions.
Table 4-4: Special Keys and Their Functions
Key(s) Description
The <Alt> key doesnt do anything by itselfit needs another key to make things
happen. For example, pressing the <Tab> key while holding down the <Alt> key
switches between any programs that are currently running.
Just like the <Alt> key, the <Ctrl> doesnt do anything by itselfyou need to press
another key with it to make things happen. For example, pressing the <X> key
while holding down the <Ctrl> key cuts whatever is selected.
The <F1> key is the help key, and pressing it displays helpful information about
what youre doing.
The <Esc> (Escape) key is the Wait, Ive changed my mind key and is the same
as clicking Cancel in a dialog box. For example, if you click something and an
unfamiliar dialog box appears, you can close it by pressing the <Esc> key.
The <Enter> key is the Carry out my orders key and is the same as clicking the
OK button in a dialog box. For example, after youve typed the name of a program
you want to run in a dialog box, press <Enter> to run the program. The <Enter>
key also adds new lines and starts new paragraphs if youre entering text.
When youre in a dialog box, pressing the <Tab> key moves to the next field.
When youre using a word processor, the <Tab> key works just like youd think it
would and jumps to the nearest tab stop whenever you press it.

The arrow keys move your computers cursor across the screen.
Nothing surprising here. The <Delete> key deletes or erases whatever you
selectfiles, text, or graphical objects. If youre working with text, the <Delete>
key erases characters to the right of the insertion point.
Use the <Backspace> key to fix your typing mistakesit erases characters to the
left of the insertion point.
The <Home> key jumps to the beginning of the current line when youre working
with text.
The <End> key jumps to the end of the current line when youre working with text.
The <Page Up> key moves up one screen.
The <Page Down> key moves down one screen.
114 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 4-7: Exiting Windows and
Turning off Your Computer
At the end of the day, when youve finished using your computer, you need to shut down
Windows before you turn your computer off. Shutting down gives Windows a chance to tidy
up after itself, saving information in the computers memory to the local disk, cleaning up
temporary files, and verifying that youve saved any changes you made to any files you
worked on.
Should I turn my computer off at all? One of the great computer debates is whether you
should turn your computer off at all. Some people turn off their computer whenever theyve
finished working on it, just like a television set. Others dont turn their computers offever.
People who turn their computers off at night say that keeping the computer on 24 hours a day,
7 days a week wears out the computers mechanical components and wastes electricity. Other
people say that leaving your computer on keeps temperature fluctuations down, which is
better for the computers delicate internal components. Plus, most new computers enter a
standby or hibernate mode after a period of time, so they dont really consume that much
power. Which method is best? Thats a decision youll have to make on your own. Some
people turn their home computer off when they finish using it and leave their office computer
on 24 hours a day.
Whether or not you turn your computer off, you should always follow the next few steps at
the end of the day, when youve finished using your computer.
1 1. . Save all your work and exit all your programs.
Saving any files youve been working on is the most important step of all when you
shut down your computer. You should also consider backing up any vital information if
you have a tape backup, Zip drive, or other backup device. You can also save any
important files to a floppy.
2 2. . Click the Start button.
The Start menu appears.
3 3. . Click the Shut Down option from the Start menu.
The Shut Down Windows dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16
The Shut Down Windows
dialog box
Start button
Figure 4-16
Click the arrow and
select Shut down
...and click OK.
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 115
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Shut Down Windows:
1. Save any files youve
been working on and exit
all your programs.
2. Click the Start button and
select Shut Down.
3. Select the Shut Down
option and click OK.
4 4. . Make sure the Shut down option is selected and click the OK button.
The computers hard drive hums as Windows cleans up and shuts itself down.
NOTE: Leaving nothing to chance, Windows checks to make sure youve saved
everything youve been working on, such as letters you created in your word
processing program. If Windows notices you havent saved a file, it asks if
you want to save the changes you made to the file before it completes the shut
down procedure.
After a minute or two, Windows finishes shutting down and tells you its safe to turn
off your computer.
5 5. . Turn your computer and monitor off.
This final step is optional.
Congratulations! Youve completed the chapter and are well on your way to mastering
Windows XP! Youre probably wondering What were those other Shut Down options for?
Table 4-5: Shut Down Windows Options explains them:
Table 4-5: Shut Down Windows Options
Shut Down Option What it Does
Stand by Use Stand by if you have a laptop and are going to leave your computer
briefly but want to conserve as much energy as possible while you are
away. After you return your computer to its original running state, you will
be able to pick up exactly where you left off. (Make sure you save
everything you were working on first!)
Shut down
Use this option if you want to turn your computer off. It saves your
Windows settings and saves any information stored in memory to the
local disk.
Restart
Saves any Windows settings, writes any information stored in your
computers memory to the local disk, and restarts your computer. Use
this option if Windows or your Windows-based programs start acting
flaky. You often have to restart your computer after installing new
software.
Log Off As
This option appears only if your computer is connected to a network.
This option closes all your programs and disconnects your computer
from the network, preparing your computer to be used by someone else.
Shut Down button
Other Ways to Shut
Down:
Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Delete>. A dialog box
will appear, and you can
choose to shut down.
116 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Chapter Four Review
Lesson Summary
Starting and Logging On to Windows
To Start Windows XP: Turn on your computer. Enter your user name and password, and then
click OK.
Understanding the Windows XP Screen
Be able to identify the main components of the Windows screen.
Using the Mouse: Pointing, Clicking, and Double-clicking
Point: Move the mouse so that the pointer ( ) is over the object.
Click: Point to the object and press and release the left mouse button.
Double-click: Point to the object and click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Using the Mouse: Dragging and Dropping
To Drag-and-Drop: Point to the object you want to drag and drop, and click and hold down the
mouse button. While youre still holding down the mouse button, drag the object to the desired
location on the screen, and then release the mouse button.
Using the Mouse: Right-clicking
To Display an Objects Shortcut Menu: Point to the object and click the right mouse button.
Select items from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button.
To Close a Menu without Selecting Anything: Click anywhere outside the shortcut menu with
the left mouse button, or press the <Esc> key.
Using the Keyboard
To Use a Keystroke Combination: Press one key while holding down the other key. For example,
press the <Tab> key while youre holding down the <Alt> key.
Exiting Windows and Turning off Your Computer
To Shut Down Windows: Save any files youve been working on, exit all your programs, click the
Start button, select Shut Down, select the Shut Down option, and click OK.
Chapter Four: Introduction to Windows XP 117
Your Organizations Name Here
Quiz
1. Microsoft Windows is a (an):
A. Word processing program.
B. Database program.
C. Operating System.
D. Graphics program.
2. Windows uses only the left mouse button. (True or False?)
3. Which of the following moves the pointer to another location on-screen?
A. Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.
B. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
C. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the left mouse
button.
D. Moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot and click the right mouse
button.
4. A keystroke combination is:
A. Pressing two or more keys at the same time, like pressing the <Shift> and <Tab>
keys at the same time.
B. A way to lock your computer to prevent unauthorized access. To unlock the
computer, simply retype your keystroke combination.
C. Using the keyboard in conjunction with the mouse.
D. A type of mixed drink.
5. To display a shortcut menu for an object, do the following:
A. Point to the object and press <Ctrl> + <P>.
B. Touch the object on-screen with your finger.
C. Click the object.
D. Right-click the object.
6. The <F1> key displays help on whatever youre working on. (True or
False?)
Homework
1. Turn on your computer and start Windows XP.
2. Find, point to, and click the Start button, then close the Start menu without selecting
anything.
3. Find and double-click My Computer.
4. Shut down Windows by selecting Shut down from the Start menu, verifying the Shut
down option is selected, and clicking the OK button.
118 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quiz Answers
1. C. Microsoft Windows is an Operating System.
2. False. Windows uses both the left and right mouse buttons.
3. B. Move the pointer by moving the mouse until the pointer points to that spot.
4. A. A keystroke combination is when you press two or more keys at the same time,
for example <Shift> + <Tab>.
5. D. Right-click the object.
6. True. Pressing the <F1> key displays help on whatever youre working on.
Chapter Five:
Working with a
Window
Chapter Objectives:
Starting a program
Understanding the parts of a window
Minimizing, maximizing, and restoring a window
Moving and closing a window
Changing the size of a window
Switching between several programs
Tiling and cascading windows
No doubt about it: computers are sophisticated, complex machines. To make computers easier
to use, Microsoft designed Windows to operate how you work at the desk in your office.
When you work at your desk, you spread everything out, grab a piece of paper, work on it for
a while, and then shuffle another piece of paper on top of it. Thats how Windows works,
except instead of working with papers, you work with windowsboxes that contain programs
and information.
You can shuffle these windows around the screen just like you shuffle papers on your desk
which is why the main Windows screen is called the desktop. Just like your desk, if youre
working with a lot of things at the same time, the Windows desktop can become messy and
difficult to find things on.
This chapter explains how to manage the windows and programs on your screen. First, youll
learn how to open a window. Next, youll discover the parts that constitute a window (which
are A LOT different than the ones on your house). Then youll learn how to change the size of
a windowminimizing it to a tiny little icon that appears only on the Taskbar and maximizing
it so that it fills the entire screen. Youll also learn how to shuffle windows around, sending
some to the background and bringing others up to the forefront. Lets get started!
; Prerequisites
How to start and shut
down Windows
How to use the mouse
to click, double-click,
drag and drop, and
right-click
120 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 5-1: Starting a Program
To do just about anything with your computer, you need to run a program. A program is a
complex set of instructions that tells your computer how to do something. Your word
processor is a program, and so is the Solitaire game that comes with Windows. The easiest
way to start a program is by clicking the Windows Start button and then selecting the program
from the All Programs menu. This lesson explains one of the most basic operations you can
do with Windows: starting a program.
1 1. . Click the Start button.
Remember that the Start button resides in the bottom-left corner of the computer
screen. The Start menu pops up.
Figure 5-1
Click on the Start button to
open the menu, and then
point to All Programs to
open the menu.
Figure 5-2
Click on Accessories to
open the menu, and then
click on WordPad to open
the program.
Figure 5-3
The WordPad program
Start button
Any programs that are currently
running appear as icons on the
taskbar
Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 121
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Start a Program:
1. Click the Start button.
2. If the program appears on
the Start menu click it,
otherwise point to the All
Programs option.
3. Click the menu and any
submenus where the
program you want to run
is located.
4. Click the name of the
program you want to run.
2 2. . Point to All Programs.
A menu listing the different program categories pops out above the Start menu, as
shown in Figure 5-1.
3 3. . Point to the word Accessories.
Another menu, the Accessories menu, shoots out to the side of the All Programs menu,
as shown in Figure 5-2. The program you want to load, WordPad, is in the Accessories
menu. Can you find it?
4 4. . Click the word WordPad.
The WordPad program appears on the screen in its own window, as shown in Figure
5-3. WordPad is a simple word processing program that is included with Microsoft
Windows.
NOTE: The All Programs menu is merely a list of the programs that should be
available on your computer. When installed, programs should automatically
add themselves to the Start menu. Occasionally, old MS-DOS programs or
programs that are poorly written may not put themselves on the Start menu
when you install them, and you will have to find and add the program to the
All Programs menu yourself. Youll learn how to manually add programs to
the Start menu in an upcoming lesson.
Great! Youve just started your first program. Turn the page and well examine the parts of the
WordPad window.
All Programs
Accessories
WordPad program
Most programs run in
their own separate
window on the screen.
122 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 5-2: Understanding the
Parts of a Window
Located in every window are several little buttons, menus, and controls that you use to control
the program and window. Because they appear in every Windows program, youre going to
have to learn what these little buttons, menus, and controls are and learn how to use them.
Heres the good news: once you can find your way around a window for one program, youll
be familiar with the windows for most programs since this window/menu/button concept
appears in just about every Windows program.
There are no exercises or homework for you in this lessonits just here to help you become
familiar with the parts of a window. All you have to do is look at Figure 5-4 and then refer to
Table 5-1: Parts of a Window to identify what youre looking at.
And dont worry; youll get a chance to play with some of these buttons and menus later on.
Figure 5-4
The parts of a typical
window
Close button
Maximize
button
Title bar
Menu
bar
Toolbars
Minimize
button
Status bar
Main
Window or
Document
Area
Figure 5-4
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 123
Your Organizations Name Here
Table 5-1: Parts of a Window
Part Description
Title bar Displays the name of the program or window
Minimize button Minimizes a window, hiding it from your screen but keeping it running in your
computers memory, ready for quick use. You can minimize a program youre
not using so that it is still running, but is out of sight.
Maximize/Restore
button
Depending on the size of the window, this button toggles between maximize
and restore. Heres what each one does:
Maximize: Enlarges the window so that it fills the entire screen. This lets
you see more of the windows contents. The Maximize button only
appears when the window isnt maximized (doesnt fill the entire screen).
Restore: When a window is maximized (fills the entire screen), clicking
the Restore button returns the window to its previous size.
Close button Closes the window or program when youre finished working with it, removing it
from the screen and the computers memory.
Menu bar Controls what the program does. The items listed on the menu bar change from
program to program, but the menu bars location doesntits always perched
near the top of a window, right below the Title bar.
Toolbar Some (but not all) windows and programs have one or more toolbars, which
contain buttons you point and/or click to access frequently used commands.
Main Window or
Document Area
This is where all the action takes placewhere you work on whatever youre
working on. If you were using a word processor, this is where your letter would
appear. If you were browsing the Internet, this is where the Web pages would
appear.
Status bar Displays information such as instructions, messages about the state of the
computer, or your location in the window.
Got everything down? Dont worry if you dont; this lesson is just a quick-guided tour of a
typical window. The rest of the lessons in this chapter focus on how to use a windows
controls, buttons, and menus.
124 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 5-3: Minimizing,
Maximizing, and Restoring a
Window
One of the benefits of Windows XP is that it enables you to open and work with several
programs at the same time. To make working with several programs at once easier, you can
change the size of the windows. You can maximize, or enlarge, a window so it takes up the
entire screen; minimize, or reduce, a window so that it only appears as a button in the
Windows taskbar; or size a window somewhere in between. This lesson explains how to
change the size of a window by maximizing, minimizing, and restoring.
First, lets look at how to maximize a window. Some programs, such as word processors and
Web browsers, are easier to work with and fill the entire screen. To enlarge a window to fill
your computer screen, click the Maximize button.
1 1. . Click the WordPad windows Maximize buttonthe middle button in
WordPads titlebar.
The WordPad program maximizes, filling the entire screen. You can change a
maximized window back to its original size by clicking the Restore button. The
Restore button appears in place of the Maximize button whenever a window is already
in a maximized state.
Figure 5-5
The Minimize, Maximize,
and Restore buttons
appear in the upper right
corner of most programs.
Figure 5-6
A window in a restored
state only fills up part of
the screen.
Figure 5-7
A window in a maximized
state fills up the entire
screen.
Figure 5-8
A window in a minimized
state appears only as an
icon on the taskbar.
Maximize button
Restore button
Maximize button (or
Restore button if the
window is already
maximized)
Minimize
button
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7 Figure 5-8
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 125
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Maximize a Window:
Click the windows
Maximize button.
Or
Double-click the windows
title bar.
To Restore a Maximized
Window:
Click the windows
Restore button.
Or
Double-click the windows
title bar.
To Minimize a Window:
Click the windows
Minimize button.
To Restore a Minimized
Window:
Click the windows icon
on the taskbar.
2 2. . Click the WordPad windows Restore button to restore the WordPad
window back to its previous size.
The window returns to its previous size.
Just like you can keep several papers on top of your desk, Windows can run more than
one program at a time. For example, you can work on a letter with your word
processing program while your Web browser is open and downloading a file from the
Internet. There is a potential pitfall with running several programs simultaneously
thoughthere isnt enough room for all of them to fit on your computer screen!
Luckily, you can tuck programs away, keeping them running and ready for use, yet
away from view, by minimizing them.
3 3. . Click the WordPad windows Minimize button to minimize the WordPad
program.
The WordPad program shrinks to an icon located in the Windows taskbar. WordPad is
still open and runningits just hidden from view, tucked away and ready for future
use. Its important to note that minimized programs can still run in the background. If a
program is doing something, such as downloading a file from the Internet, it will keep
going, even when the program is minimized.
Its easy to redisplay a minimized program or window when youre ready to use it
again.
4 4. . Find and click the WordPad icon in the Windows taskbar.
The WordPad program springs back to life and appears on the screen.
Its important that you get all this maximize/minimize/restore stuff down, because it will help
you be more productive with your computer.
Other Ways to Maximize
and Restore a Window:
Double-click the title bar
of the window to toggle
between maximized
and restored states.
Minimize button
WordPad icon
126 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quick Reference
To Close a Window:
Click the windows Close
button.
Or
Right-click the programs
icon on the task bar and
select Close from the
shortcut menu.
Or
Press <Alt> + <F4>.
To Close All Open
Windows:
Hold down the <Shift>
key while you click the
Close button of any
window.
Lesson 5-4: Closing a Window
When youre finished working with a window or program, you can close it to remove it from
the screen and computers memory. You can close any window or program by clicking its
Close button, which appears in the upper-right corner of the window.
1 1. . Click the WordPad windows Close button.
The WordPad program closes. Notice the WordPad icon no longer appears in the
Windows taskbar at the bottom of the screen. Thats all there is to closing a window or
program.
NOTE: If a program has more than one window open, you can close all of its open
windows by holding down the <Shift> key when you click the Close button
for any window.
Since youre going to be working with the WordPad program in the next few lessons,
you will need to open it again.
2 2. . Click the Start button.
The Windows XP Start menu appears.
3 3. . Select All Programs Accessories WordPad from the Start menu.
The WordPad program reappears.
If a program happens to be minimized, you need to restore it by clicking its icon on the
taskbar before you can see and click the windows close button.
Figure 5-9
Click the Close button on
the window you want to
close.
Figure 5-10
The window disappears
from your screen.
Close button
Other Ways to Close a
Window:
Select File Exit from
the menu.
Right-click the
programs icon on the
task bar and select
Close from the shortcut
menu.
Press <Alt> + <F4>.
Figure 5-9 Figure 5-10
Close button
The icon for the window
disappears from the taskbar.
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 127
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Move a Window:
Click and drag the
window by its title bar.
Release the mouse
button to drop the window
in the desired location on
the screen.
Lesson 5-5: Moving a Window
When you have several programs or windows open, you may find that one window covers the
other windows or other items on your screen. When this happens, you can simply move a
window to a new location on the screenjust like you would move a report or folder to a
different location on your desk. Heres how to move a window:
1 1. . Position the mouse pointer over the title bar of the WordPad program.
Remember that the title bar is the colored bar at the very top of a window or program.
It displays the name of the program or window.
2 2. . Click the title bar and move the mouse while still holding down the
mouse button.
Yep, its that drag and drop stuff you learned earlier. An outline of the window follows
your mouse as you drag the window, as shown in Figure 5-11, showing you where you
are moving it.
3 3. . Release the mouse button to drop the window to a new location.
Figure 5-11
Moving a window to a new
location on the screen
Figure 5-11
Move a window by
dragging it by its title
bar to a new location
on the screen.
128 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 5-6: Sizing a Window
If youve been following the lessons in this chapter, you should already know how to change
the size of a window or program by minimizing, maximizing, and restoring it. This lesson
explains how you can fine-tune the size of a window to meet your own specific needs.
1 1. . Make sure the WordPad program appears as a window and doesnt fill the
entire screen.
A window doesnt have to be maximized (fill up the entire screen) or minimized
(appear only as a button on the Taskbar) if you want to manually size it.
2 2. . Position the mouse pointer over the right border of the WordPad window
until it changes to a .
The two arrows point in the directions that you can drag the window's border, in this
case, left or right. Had you positioned the pointer over the top or bottom of the
window, the pointer would have changed to a , indicating that you could drag the top
or bottom of the window up or down.
NOTE: Windows is very picky where you place the pointer, and sometimes it can be
tricky finding the exact spot where the pointer changes. Its therejust move
the pointer slowly over the border until you find it.
3 3. . Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the
right 1 inch to move the window border.
Notice that the window stretches as you drag the mouse. When the window is the size
you want, you can release the mouse button.
4 4. . Release the mouse button.
The window is displayed in its new size.
Figure 5-12
Dragging a windows edge
or corner changes the size
of the window.
The mouse pointer
changes shapes over
the border of a
window.
1. Point at the border of
the window until the
pointer changes to
a
2. Click and hold the
mouse button and
drag the border of
the window
3. Release the mouse
button when the
window is the size
you want
Figure 5-12
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 129
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Change a Windows
Size:
1. Point at the windows
borders or corners until
the pointer changes to a
double-arrow (like ).
2. Click and hold down the
mouse button and drag
the border or corner to a
new location, until the
window is the size you
want.
This lesson explained how to resize a window by adjusting the right border of a window, but
you can change a windows size by dragging its left, top, and bottom borders. You can also
resize a window by dragging its corners just like you drag its borders.
130 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 5-7: Switching Between
Windows
You can have several programs or windows open and running simultaneously, but you can
only work in one window at a time. The window youre working with is called the active
window and always appears on top of any other windows that you have open. If you think
about it, you do the same thing when you work at your desk. When you want to work on a
piece of paper, you place it on top of everything else on your desk.
This lesson explains how to switch between the programs youre running. There are actually
several ways to switch between windows, and well cover all of them in this lesson. First, you
need to make sure you have several programs running
1 1. . Make sure the WordPad program is still open.
If it isnt open, click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories
WordPad. Notice an icon for the WordPad program appears on the taskbar. Next, you
need to open another program that comes with Windows XPthe calculator.
Figure 5-13
You can only work in one
window at a time. Notice
that WordPad appears in
front of all other windows
and has a blue title bar.
Figure 5-14
Click any part of the
Calculator window or its
button on the taskbar so
that it appears in front of
all the other windows.
Figure 5-15
Pressing <Alt> + <Tab>
lists all the programs that
are currently running.
Click any part of a window to switch to
that window.
The taskbar displays icons for each
open window. Click an icon to switch
to its window.
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
The active windows icon is darker
blue to show it is pressed down on
the taskbar.
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 131
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Switch between Open
Programs:
Click the programs icon
on the taskbar.
Or
Click on any part of the
window you want to
appear in front.
Or
Press and hold down the
<Alt> key and press the
<Tab> key to display the
task list. Press the <Tab>
key until the program you
want is selected, then
release the <Alt> key.
2 2. . Start the calculator by clicking the Start button and selecting All
Programs Accessories Calculator.
The calculator program appears in front of the WordPad program. An icon for the
Calculator program also appears in the taskbar, next to the WordPad icon. Notice the
Calculator program appears in front, and its icon is depressed on the taskbar, which
indicates it is the active window. You can make WordPad the active window by
clicking its icon on the taskbar.
3 3. . Click the WordPad button on the taskbar.
The WordPad program appears in front, and its icon on the taskbar is depressesed,
which indicates it is the active window. You can make another open window the active
window by clicking on any visible part of the window.
4 4. . Click any portion of the Calculator window.
If you cant see the Calculator window at all, its because the Calculator window is
completely covered by the WordPad window. In this case, you will have to click the
Calculator icon on the taskbar.
Yet another method of switching between windows is the most famous keystroke
combination in Windows: <Alt> + <Tab>.
5 5. . Press and hold down the <Alt> key, press and release the <Tab> key, but
dont release the <Alt> key.
The task window appears, as shown in Figure 5-15. The task window lists all the
windows and programs that are currently running. Move on to the next step to see how
you can retrieve a program or window from the task list.
6 6. . While still holding down the <Alt> key, press and release the <Tab> key
until the WordPad program is selected, then release the <Alt> key.
When you release the <Alt> key, the selected window or program is activated and
displayed in front of any other windows.
NOTE: <Alt> + <Tab> is especially useful when you use programs that fill the entire
computer screen, such as MS-DOS programs and some games. When you
cant see the taskbar or any part of another window, <Alt> + <Tab> is the only
way you can switch between programs.
NOTE: When youre working with multiple programs, be careful not to accidentally
run a second copy of the same program. This wastes memory and makes
things confusing. For example, if youve been using the Calculator program
and want to bring it back up, make sure you check the taskbar to see if its
already running (a Calculator icon appears on the taskbar). If it is, use any of
the methods youve learned in this lesson to switch to it. If a program is
already running and you load it again from the Start menu, a second copy of
the program opens and two icons for the program will appear on the taskbar.
Think you have a handle on switching between programs and windows? Good, because when
you work with Windows, youll find yourself switching between programs and windows
throughout the day.
WordPad button
on the taskbar
132 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Chapter Five Review
Lesson Summary
Starting a Program
Start a program by clicking the Start button, clicking the All Programs menu, clicking the menu
and any submenus where the program you want to run is located, and clicking the name of the
program you want to run.
Understanding the Parts of a Window
Be able to identify a windows title bar, menu, minimize, maximize, and close buttons.
Minimizing, Maximizing, and Restoring a Window
Maximize a window so that it fills the entire screen by clicking its Maximize button, or by double-
clicking its title bar.
Restore a window to its previous size by clicking its Restore button, or by double-clicking its title
bar.
Minimize a window so that it only appears as an icon on the taskbar by clicking the windows
Minimize button.
Restore a minimized window by clicking its icon on the taskbar.
Closing a Window
Close a window by clicking its Close button, or by pressing <Alt> + <F4>.
Close all open windows by holding down the <Shift> key while you click the Close button of any
window.
Moving a Window
To Move a Window: Click and drag the window by its title bar. Release the mouse button to drop
the window in the desired location on the screen.
Sizing a Window
To Change a Windows Size: Point at the windows borders or corners until the pointer changes
to a double-arrow (like ). Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the border or corner
to a new location until the window is the size you want.
Switching between Windows
You can only work on one window at a time. The window youre working on is the active window
and appears in front of all the inactive windows.
Chapter Five: Working with a Window 133
Your Organizations Name Here
To Switch between Open Programs: There are three ways to switch between open programs:
1. Click on the programs icon on the taskbar.
2. Click on any visible part of the window that you want to appear in front.
3. Press and hold down the <Alt> key and press the <Tab> key to display the task list. Press the
<Tab> key until the program you want is selected, then release the <Alt> key.
Quiz
1. To start a program in Windows XP, do the following:
A. Make sure the Program Manager is open, double-click the Program Group where the
program you want to run is located, and double-click the Program.
B. Click the Start button, point to the All Programs menu, click the menu and any
submenus where the program you want to run is located, and click the name of the
program you want to run.
C. Click the Start button, point to the Run menu, click the menu and any submenus
where the program you want to run is located, and then click the name of the
program you want to run.
D. None of the above.
2. The little bar that lists a programs name and is found at the top of a
window is called the:
A. Windows bar.
B. Program bar.
C. Title bar.
D. Very top of the window bar.
3. You start your favorite word processing program to type a letter, but the
program appears in a window thats too small to use. How can you
maximize the window so it fills the entire screen? (Select all that apply.)
A. Select Window Full Screen from the menu.
B. Double-click the windows Title bar.
C. Click the programs icon on the taskbar.
D. Click the Maximize button located in the right side of the windows Title bar.
4. You can open or restore a minimized window by clicking its icon on the
taskbar. (True or False?)
5. You can move a window to a different position on your computer screen by
dragging it by its:
A. Title bar.
B. Status bar.
C. Move handle.
D. Tail.
134 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
6. You have several programs open at the same timehow can you switch
between these programs? (Select all that apply.)
A. Restart the programClick the Start button, point to the All Programs menu, click
the menu and any submenus where the program you want to switch to is located, and
click the name of the program you want to view.
B. Click the programs icon on the taskbar.
C. Click on any visible part of the window you want to appear in front.
D. Press and hold down the <Alt> key and press the <Tab> key to display the task list.
Press the <Tab> key until the program you want is selected, then release the <Alt>
key.
Homework
1. Click the Start button, select All Programs, and click the Accessories menu.
2. Start the NotePad program (located under All Programs Accessories).
3. Make the NotePad window a few inches bigger.
4. Maximize the NotePad window.
5. Restore the NotePad window to its previous size.
6. Move the NotePad window to a different location on the screen.
7. Open the Calculator program.
8. Tile both windows on the screen by right-clicking a blank area of the taskbar.
9. Close both windows.
Quiz Answers
1. B.
2. C. The little bar along the windows top that lists the program name is the Title bar.
3. B and D. Double-clicking the windows Title bar or clicking the windows Maximize
button will maximize the window so it fills the entire screen.
4. True. Clicking the icon of a minimized program on the taskbar restores the window.
5. A. Move a window by dragging its Title bar.
6. B, C, and D. You can use any of these methods to switch between open programs.
Dont use A, which starts another copy of the program instead of switching to the
already open program.
Chapter Six:
Working with
Programs
Chapter Objectives:
Use menus and toolbars
Fill out a dialog box
Enter and edit text
Save and open a file
Select, replace, and delete text
Use the undo function
Print a file
Cut, copy, and paste text
Format fonts and paragraphs
Get help
Save and Open Files in Different Locations
Up until now, weve only been focusing on how to use the Windows XP operating system. In
this chapter, youll be working with a program. This chapter explains how to control programs
using menus and toolbars. Youll learn what a dialog box is (youll see a lot of them in
Windows), and how to fill one out.
Next, well get more specific. Every program is different, but the procedure for doing things
in all programs is the same. This chapter explains these basic generic chores using the
WordPad program. Youll learn how to enter, edit, and delete text; how to open, save, and
print a file; and how to get help when you need it. Once youve learned these basic skills in
WordPad, you can apply them to just about every other Windows program. This is one of the
longest chapters about Windows XP, so we have a lot of ground to cover. Lets get started
; Prerequisites
How to start and shut
down Windows
How to use the mouse
to click, double-click,
drag and drop, and
right-click
How to use the
keyboard
136 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-1: How to Use Menus
To make a program do your bidding, you give it commands. You can give commands to your
Window program in several different ways: by using menus, toolbars, right-mouse button
shortcut menus, and keystroke shortcuts. This lesson explains the most common method of
issuing commands to Windows programsthrough menus. You can find a programs menu
near the top of a window, just beneath the title bar. In Figure 6-2, notice the words File, Edit,
View, Insert, Format, and Help that appear near the top of the WordPad program. Those words
are menus, and the next few steps will show you why theyre there.
1 1. . Click the Start button.
The Start menu appears.
2 2. . Select All Programs Accessories WordPad from the Start menu.
That means you should click All Programs, then click the word Accessories from
the All Programs menu, and then click the word WordPad from the Accessories
menu, as shown in Figure 6-1. The WordPad program appears.
3 3. . Move the pointer to and click the word Insert on the menu bar, as shown
in Figure 6-2.
A menu drops down under the word Insert, as shown in Figure 6-2. The Insert menu
contains a list of commands to insert things, such as the Date and Time, which
inserts the current date and/or time, and Object, which inserts a file created in
another program.
Figure 6-1
Starting the WordPad
program.
Figure 6-2
The Insert menu
Figure 6-3
The Insert Date and Time
dialog box
Start button
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-1
Chapter Six: Working with Program 137
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Open a Menu:
Click the menu name with
the mouse.
Or
Press <Alt> and then the
underlined letter in menu.
4 4. . Under the Insert menu, point to and click the Date and Time option.
The Date and Time dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-3, presenting you with
several different date and time formats you can insert. Youll learn more about dialog
boxes in an upcoming lesson.
5 5. . Click the OK button.
The Date and Time dialog box disappears and the current date is inserted into the
WordPad document. Take a close look at the WordPad menunotice how every word
in the menu has an underlined letter somewhere in it? For example, the F in the File
menu is underlined. Pressing the <Alt> key and then pressing the underlined letter in a
menu does the same thing as clicking the menu with the mouse.
6 6. . Press the <Alt> key then press the <F> key.
The File menu appears. Once a menu is open, you can use the arrow keys on your
computers keyboard to navigate through the menus, or press any other underlined
letters in the menu.
7 7. . Press the Right Arrow Key <>.
The next menu to the right, the Edit menu, opens. If you opened a menu and change
your mind, its easy to close it without selecting any commands. Just click anywhere
outside the menu or else press the <Esc> key.
8 8. . Click anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without selecting any
commands.
NOTE: The procedure for using menus and the general order/layout of the menu is
usually similar in most Windows programs. So if you master the menus in one
Windows program, you will be somewhat familiar with the layout and
function of the menus in other Windows programs.
Table 6-2: Common Windows Program Menus Table gives you a preview of some of the
different menu items you will come across.
Table 6-2: Common Windows Program Menus
File Description
File Commands to open, save, close, print, and create new files
Edit Commands to copy, cut, paste, find, and replace text in a document
View Commands to change how the document is displayed on the screen
Insert Lists items that you can insert into a document, such as graphics, page
numbers, and the current date
Format Commands to format text, paragraphs, tab stops, etc. Strangely, the command
to format the page (i.e. margins, etc.) is located in the File menu under Page
Setup.
Window Commands to display and arrange multiple windows (if you have more than one
document open). WordPad doesnt have this option since it can only have one
file open at a time.
Help Get help on the Windows program you are using
OK button
You can open menus by
clicking the menu name
with the mouse or by
pressing the <Alt> key
and the underlined
letter in the menu
name.
You can close a menu
without selecting any
commands by clicking
anywhere outside the
menu or by pressing
the <Esc> key.
138 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-2: How to Use Toolbars
Toolbars are another common way to boss your programs around. While menus contain every
conceivable command for a program, toolbars contain buttons only for the commands you use
most frequently. Instead of having to wade through several menus to do something, you can
click a single button. Two toolbars appear in the WordPad programthe Standard toolbar and
Formatting toolbar. The Standard toolbar appears on top and contains buttons for the most
frequently used commands in WordPad, such as saving and printing a document. The
Formatting toolbar is located right underneath the Standard toolbar and has buttons for
quickly formatting fonts and paragraphs.
Toolbar buttons have small icons to indicate what they do. For example, a small picture of a
printer appears on the Print button. If you still dont know what a button is used for, move the
pointer over the button and wait a few seconds. Usually, a little window will appear with a
brief description of the button.
1 1. . Click after the date you entered in the last lesson and press the <Enter>
key to add a blank line.
2 2. . Position the mouse pointer over the Date/Time button on WordPads
Standard toolbar, as shown in Figure 6-4.
A small window appears over the button, briefly identifying what the button isin this
case Date/Time as shown in Figure 6-4.
3 3. . Click the Date/Time button.
The Date and Time dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-5, presenting you with
several different date and time formats to insert.
Figure 6-4
Move the pointer over a
button and wait a few
seconds for the buttons
description.
Figure 6-5
The Date and Time dialog
box
Figure 6-6
The updated WordPad
document
Date/Time button
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Chapter Six: Working with Program 139
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Use a Toolbar Button:
Click the toolbar button.
To See What a Toolbar
Button Does:
Position the pointer over
the toolbar button and
wait a second. A
ScreenTip will appear
above the button.
4 4. . Click the OK button.
WordPad inserts the current date and time in the WordPad document.
5 5. . Backspace over the date you just entered to delete it.
Only one date remains on your screen. You will learn more about deleting text in a later
lesson.
Compare your screen with the one in Figure 6-6.
OK button
140 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-3: Filling Out a Dialog
Box
Some commands are more complicated than others are. For example, saving a file is a simple
processall you have to do is select File Save from the menu or click the Save button on
the Standard toolbar. Other commands are more complex. Whenever you want to do
something relatively complicated in Windows, you need to fill out a dialog box. Filling out a
dialog box is not much different than filling out a paper form. Dialog boxes usually contain
several types of controls, including:
Text boxes
List boxes
Check boxes
Combo boxes (also called drop down lists)
Buttons
This lesson will give you a quick tour of a more complicated dialog box and show you how to
use the various dialog box components you will come across.
1 1. . Select Format from the menu.
The Format menu appears. Look at the items listed in the Format menuFont,
Paragraph, and Tabs are followed by ellipses (). Whenever you see a menu item
followed by ellipses, it means that there is a dialog box lurking just behind the menu.
Figure 6-7
The Font dialog box
Figure 6-8
A Scroll Bar
You can select a
control in a dialog box
by clicking the control
with the mouse or by
pressing the <Tab> key
until the control is
selected.
Text Box
List Box
Text box
Check box
Figure 6-7
List box
Combo box
Sample Area
OK Button
Cancel
Button
Scroll Up Button
Click here to scroll up
Scroll Box
Indicates your current position in
the list (you can also click and
drag the scroll box to scroll up or
down)
Scroll Down Button
Click here to scroll
down
Figure 6-8
Chapter Six: Working with Program 141
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Select a Dialog Box
Control:
Click the control with the
mouse.
Or
Press <Tab> to move to
the next control in the
dialog box or <Shift> +
<Tab> to move to the
previous control until you
arrive at the desired
control.
To Use a Text Box:
Simply type the
information directly into
the text box.
To Use a List Box:
Click the option you want
from list box. Use the
scroll bar to move up and
down through its options.
To Use a Combo Box (or
Drop-Down List):
Click the Down Arrow to
list the combo boxs
options. Click an option
from the list to select it.
To Save Changes and
Close a Dialog Box:
Click the OK button or
press <Enter>.
To Close a Dialog Box
without Saving Changes:
Click the Cancel button or
press <Esc>.
2 2. . Select Font from the Format menu.
The Font dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-7. The Font dialog box is one of the
most complex dialog boxes in the WordPad program and contains several types of
components you can fill out. You have to go to, or select, a control before you can use
it. You can do this by clicking the control with the mouse or by pressing the <Tab> key
to move to the next control, or <Shift> + <Tab> to move to the previous control, until
the blinking cursor appears in it or it becomes highlighted.
First, lets look at text boxes. Look at the Font text box, as shown in Figure 6-7. Text
boxes are the most common component of a dialog box and are nothing more than the
fill-in-the-blank box youve undoubtedly already used in many types of paper forms.
Text boxes are incredibly easy to usejust select and type in the text you want.
3 3. . Make sure the Font text box is selected and type Arial.
Youve just filled out the text boxnothing to it. The next stop in our dialog box tour
is the List Box. You can find a list box directly beneath the Font text box. A list box
puts several options together into a small box. Sometimes list boxes contain so many
options that they cant all be displayed at once, and you must click the list boxs scroll
bar to move up or down the list. See Figure 6-8 for an illustration of a scroll box.
4 4. . Click and hold the Font list boxs Scroll Down button until Times New
Roman appears in the list.
5 5. . Click the Times New Roman option in the list.
Our next destination is the Combo Box. The combo box is the cousin of the list box
it, too displays a list of options. The only difference is that you must click the combo
boxs downward pointing arrow in order to display its options.
6 6. . Click the Color combo boxs down arrow.
A list of color options appears below the Color combo box.
7 7. . Select the Blue color from the combo box.
Sometimes you need to select more than one item in a dialog box. For example, what if
you want to add Strikeout formatting and Underline formatting to the selected font?
You use the check box control when youre presented with multiple choices.
8 8. . In the Effects section, click the Strikeout check box and click the
Underline check box.
The last destination on our dialog box tour is the Button. Buttons are used to execute or
cancel commands. Two buttons can be found in every dialog box. They are:
OK: Applies and saves any changes you have made and then closes the dialog
box. Pressing the <Enter> key usually does the same thing as clicking the OK
button.
Cancel: Closes the dialog box without applying and saving any changes.
Pressing the <Esc> key usually does the same thing as clicking the cancel
button.
9 9. . Click the Cancel button to cancel the changes you made and close the
Font dialog box.
Combo Box
or Drop-Down List
Check Box
142 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-4: Entering Text in the
WordPad Program
This lesson explains how to create a document using the WordPad program. Actually, there
isnt much to explainall you have to do is type!
1 1. . Open WordPad by clicking the Start button, then All Programs,
Accessories, and then WordPad.
The WordPad Program screen pops up. Lets enter some text.
2 2. . Click inside the WordPad screen, and type the following text: 9/29/01
Good. Now were going to write a letter.
3 3. . Press the <Enter> key twice.
WordPad inserts a new paragraph, or new line, each time you press the <Enter> key.
4 4. . Type the following text: To the La Fanci Nails Company:
As you type, notice that the insertion point (the small, blinking vertical bar) moves to
indicate where you are typing.
5 5. . Press the <Enter> key twice, and type the follow text: I bought a set
of your press-on nails last month, and I was extremely
displeased with them. While pressing my La Fanci Nails on,
I went to pet my poodle, Pizzy, and my hand and nails
stuck to her shaggy little pelt. That was in August, and
were still glued together.
Figure 6-9
A simple letter created in
the WordPad program
Start button
Figure 6-9
Chapter Six: Working with Program 143
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Open WordPad:
Click on the Start button,
then All Programs,
Accessories, then
WordPad.
To Enter Text in WordPad:
1. Place the insertion point
in WordPad by clicking in
the WordPad screen.
2. Type your text.
The press-on nail glue should not have been so strong!
Pizzys barking is driving me mad. Please reconsider the
strength of your product.
Make sure you press the <Enter> key twice to add a blank line between the two
paragraphs. Dont press <Enter> when you reach the end of a lineWordPad will
automatically move the text to the next line for you. This feature is called word-wrap.
When youre finished typing, compare your letter with the one in Figure 6-9.
While you type, qord-
wrap continues text
from one line to the
next without making
you press Enter.
144 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-5: Editing Text
After typing a document, you will often discover that you need to make some changes to your
textperhaps you want to rephrase or even delete a sentence. Editing a document by inserting
and deleting text is very simple. To insert text, you move the insertion point (the blinking bar)
to where you want to insert the text. You move the insertion point using the arrow keys on the
keyboard or by using the mouse to click where you want to move it, as shown in Figure 6-10.
Once the insertion point is where you want, just start typing.
There are a couple ways to delete text. One way to delete text is to place the insertion point to
the left of the text you want to delete and press the <Backspace> key. Another way to delete
text is to place the insertion point to the right of the text you want to delete and press the
<Delete> key.
In this lesson, youll get practice inserting and deleting text and revising the letter you created
in WordPad.
1 1. . Press the Up Arrow Key <> button.
The insertion point moves up one line.
2 2. . Press and hold the Up Arrow Key <> to move the insertion point to the
very top line in the document.
Now you need to move the insertion point to the beginning of the current line.
3 3. . Press and hold the Left Arrow Key <> button to move the insertion
point to the very beginning of the line.
4 4. . Type Subject: Glue Trauma and press <Enter> twice.
The text and blank line is inserted at the insertion point, before the rest of the
document. Youve just learned how to insert text in a documentpretty easy huh?
5 5. . Move the insertion point immediately after the word extremely in the first
body paragraph.
Here, you need to delete some text; delete the word extremely.
Figure 6-10
Use the keyboard or the
mouse to move the
insertion point in a
document.
Placing the
insertion point
Figure 6-10
Move the insertion
point with the arrow
keys on your
computers
keyboard
or by using the
mouse to click
where you want to
place the insertion
point with the
pointer
Chapter Six: Working with Program 145
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Move the Insertion
Point:
Use the arrow keys.
Or
Click where you want to
place the insertion point
with the pointer.
To Insert Text:
Move the insertion point
where you want to insert
the text and then type the
text you want to insert.
To Delete Text:
The <Backspace> key
deletes text before, or to
the left of the insertion
point.
The <Delete> key deletes
text after, or to the right of
the insertion point.
6 6. . Press the <Backspace> key several times, until the word extremely is
deleted.
The Backspace key deletes one space to the left (backwards) of the insertion point.
7 7. . Type very.
Youve just deleted the word extremely and inserted the word very to take its
place.
You can also use the mouse to move the insertion point instead of the arrow keys.
Simply move the pointer where you want to place the insertion point with the mouse
and click.
8 8. . Click immediately after the word August in the sentence That was in
August, and were still stuck together with the pointer.
The insertion point appears immediately after the word Augustright where you
clicked the mouse button.
You can also use the Delete key to delete text. Like the Backspace key, the Delete key
also deletes text, but in a slightly different way. The Backspace key deletes text before,
or to the left of the insertion point, while the Delete key deletes text after, or to the right
of the insertion point.
9 9. . Press the <Delete> key.
The Delete key deletes text after, or to the right of, the insertion point.
1 10 0. . Press and hold the <Delete> key until you have deleted the rest of the
sentence , and were still stuck together.
Great! Youve learned how to delete text using the Delete key.
Compare your revised document with the one shown in Figure 6-10.
The <Backspace> key
deletes one space to
the left, or behind,
the insertion point.
The <Delete> key
deletes once space to
the right, or after,
the insertion point.
146 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-6: Saving and Opening a
File
Once you have created something in a program, you must save the file if you ever want to use
it again in the future. When you save a file, youre transferring it from your computers
memory (which is erased when you close the program) to the computers local disk (which is
permanent and not erased when you close the program). In this lesson, you will learn how to
save a file and then open, or retrieve it from the local disk.
1 1. . Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar.
The Save As dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-11. You must give your file a
name and specify where you want to save it. First, tell the computer you want to save
the file in your Practice folder.
2 2. . Navigate to and open your practice folder or floppy disk.
Your computer stores information in files and folders, just like you store information in
a filing cabinet. To open a file, you must first find and open the folder where its saved.
The Save dialog box has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your
computers drives and folders. Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful:
Figure 6-11
The Save As dialog box
Figure 6-12
The Open dialog box
Save button
Other Ways to Save:
Select File Save
from the menu.
Look in list
Select the drive or folder where
you want to save the file.
File name text box
Type the name you want to
save your file as here.
Displays files located in the
selected drive or folder
Look in list
Select the drive or folder where
the file you want to open is
located.
Displays files located in the
selected drive or folderselect
the file you want to open here
The letter file
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Chapter Six: Working with Program 147
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Save a File:
Click the Save button
on the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select File Save from
the menu.
To Open a File:
Click the Open button
on the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select File Open from
the menu.
Look In List: Click to list the drives on your computer
and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose contents you
want to display.
Up One Level button: Click to move up one folder.
If necessary, follow your instructors directions to select the appropriate drive and
folder where your practice files are located.
Next, you need to give your file a name.
3 3. . Click the File name text box.
The File name box is where you give your file a name.
NOTE: Filenames can be up to 255 characters long and contain letters, numbers, and
some symbols. You cant use the symbols " \ / : * | < > in a file name.
4 4. . Type Letter in the File name text box.
This will save the document you created in a file named Letter in the floppy disk.
5 5. . Click Save to save your document to the floppy disk.
The floppy disk hums as your computer saves the Letter file to it.
NOTE: You can also save any files youve created to your computers local disk
which is normally where most people save their files, instead of a floppy disk.
Now that youve saved the file to a disk, you can safely close WordPad or even turn off
the computer, knowing that your WordPad Letter file is stored and can be retrieved
whenever you want to work on it again.
6 6. . Close the WordPad program by clicking its Close button.
The WordPad program closes. Now, make sure the Letter document you created and
saved in WordPad is still there.
7 7. . Start the WordPad program again.
Once you have started WordPad, you will need to open the Letter document you saved.
8 8. . Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.
The Open dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-12. The Open dialog box is very
similar to the Save dialog boxexcept you specify the name and location of the file
you want to open.
9 9. . If necessary, navigate to your practice folder or floppy disk.
The Open dialog box will display any WordPad files that have been saved in the
practice folder or floppy disk. Heres how to select a file you want to open.
1 10 0. . Click the Letter file.
Shading appears over the Letter file, indicating it is selected.
1 11 1. . Click the Open button to open the selected file.
The Letter document appears in the WordPad window.
When you open a file, instead of selecting a file and clicking the Open button, you can save a
half-second or so by simply double-clicking the file you want to open.
Close button
Open button
Other Ways to Open a
File:
Select File Open
from the menu.
148 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-7: Selecting, Replacing,
and Deleting Text
This lesson explains how to select text. Whenever you want to edit more than one character at
a time, you must select it first. A lot of editing and formatting techniquessuch as formatting,
cutting, copying, and pasting textalso require that you select the text you want to modify.
There are probably hundreds of reasons to select text in many Windows-based programs, so it
pays if youre an expert at doing it.
1 1. . Place the insertion point immediately in front of the word August in the
first body sentence of the paragraph.
You learned how to move the insertion around using the mouse earlier in this chapter.
Actually, you can place the insertion point before or after the text you want to select.
2 2. . Click and hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse across the
word August (the words should be highlighted). Release the mouse
button when youre finished.
The word August should be highlighted in blue, as shown in Figure 6-13. Selecting text
with the mouse can be a little tricky at first, especially if youre still a novice at using
the mouse. When you select text, anything you type will replace the selected text.
Figure 6-13
You can select and
replace text.
Figure 6-14
The updated letter
To replace text, select
the text you want to
replace and type the
new text you want to
replace it with.
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
1. Position the insertion point before or
after the text that you want to select.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse
button, drag the mouse across the text
you want to select, and then release
the mouse button.
3. If you want to replace the selected text,
simply type in the new text it will
overwrite the selected text.
Chapter Six: Working with Program 149
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Select a String of Text:
1. Move the insertion point
to the beginning or end of
the text you want to
select.
2. Click and hold the left
mouse button and drag
the insertion point across
the text, then release the
mouse button once the
text is selected.
Or
Press and hold down the
<Shift> key while using
the arrow keys to select
the text you want.
To Select a Single Word:
Double-click the word you
want to select.
To Replace Text:
Replace text by first
selecting it, then typing
the new text you want.
To Deselect Text:
Click anywhere on the
computer screen.
To Delete Selected Text:
1. Select the text.
2. Press the <Delete> key.
3 3. . Type July.
The word July replaces the selected text, August. A quick way to select a single
word is to double-click the word you want to select.
4 4. . Double-click the word Trauma in the Subject line.
5 5. . Type Crisis.
The word Crisis replaces the word Trauma. You can also use the keyboard to select text
if you dont like using the mouse. To select text using the keyboard, move the insertion
point before or after the text you want to select, press and hold down the <Shift> key
while you use the arrow keys to select the text.
6 6. . Move the insertion point to the very end of the Subject: Glue Crisis line.
Try selecting text with the keyboard in the next step.
7 7. . Press and hold down the <Shift> key and press and hold down the left
arrow key <> until the Subject line is selected.
If you change your mind after selecting text, its easy to deselect it. Just click anywhere
else on the screen.
8 8. . Click anywhere in the document to deselect the text.
The Subject line is no longer selected.
Another trick you should know is that you can delete any selected text by pressing the
<Delete> key.
9 9. . Select the date and press the <Delete> key.
The date is deleted.
And thats all there is to selecting text in Windows. Again, its very important that you know
how to select text. Knowing how to select text will make you much more proficient at using
many Window programs.
Table 6-3: Shortcuts for Selecting Text
To Select This Do This
A word Double-click the word.
A line Click next to the line in the left margin.
A sentence Press and hold <Ctrl> and double-click the sentence.
The entire document Press and hold <Ctrl> and double-click in the left margin.
Double-click a word to
select it.
Other Ways to Select
Text:
Move to the beginning
or end of the text that
you want to select,
press and hold down
the <Shift> key while
using the arrow keys to
select the text.
150 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quick Reference
To Undo Your Previous
Action:
Click the Undo
button on the toolbar.
Or
Select Edit Undo from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
Lesson 6-8: Using Undo
You may not want to admit this, but youre going to make mistakes when you use Windows.
You might accidentally delete a sentence in your word processing program you didnt mean to
delete, or paste something in you didnt mean to paste. Fortunately, Windows and most
Windows programs come with a wonderful feature called undo that does just thatit undoes
your last action, making it as though it never happened.
Many people that are new to Windows or computers in general are often terrified of using
computers because they are afraid they will make a mistake and seriously mess things up.
First of all, its more difficult to mess up your computer than you think it is. Secondly, you
will learn how to use Undo, so even if you do make a mistake, you can easily cancel it.
1 1. . Select the Subject: Glue Crisis line and delete it by pressing the
<Delete> key.
Whoops! You didnt really want to delete that! Watch how you can undo your
mistake.
2 2. . Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar to cancel your last
change.
Poof! WordPad cancels your last action and the deleted text Subject: Glue Crisis
reappears.
In most programs, Undo will only cancel your last action or change; if you dont catch your
mistake right after you make it, Undo may not be able to help.
Figure 6-15
You can cancel a text
deletion with the Undo
feature.
Undo button
Other Ways to Undo:
Select Edit Undo
from the menu.
Press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
Undo
Figure 6-15
Chapter Six: Working with Program 151
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Print a File:
Click the Print button
on the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select File Print from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <P>.
Lesson 6-9: Printing a File
This lesson will show you how to send whatever youre working on to the printer. Printing is
one of the easiest things to do in Windows.
1 1. . Select File Print from the menu.
The Print dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-16. The Print dialog box may differ
depending on the program youre using, but it should usually contain the options listed
in Table 6-4: Print Dialog Box Options.
2 2. . Click OK.
Windows sends the document to the printer.
Table 6-4: Print Dialog Box Options
Print option Description
Name Used to select what printer to send your file to when it prints (if you are
connected to more than one printer). The currently selected printer is
displayed.
Properties Displays a dialog box with options available to your specific printer such as
the paper size you want to use, if your document should be printed in color or
black and white, etc.
Page range
Allows you to specify what pages you want printed. There are several
options:
All: Prints the entire document.
Selection: Prints only the text you have selected (before selecting the
print command).
Pages: Prints only the pages of the file you specify. Select a range of
pages with a hyphen (like 5-8) and separate single pages with a comma
(like 3,7).
Number of copies Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Figure 6-16
The Print dialog box
Other Ways to Print:
Click the Print
button if it appears on
the toolbar.
Press <Ctrl> + <P>.
Figure 6-16
152 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-10: Cutting, Copying,
and Pasting Text
By now, you should already know how to select text in a document. Once text is selected, you
can move it to another place in the document by cutting it and then pasting elsewhere. Cutting
and pasting text is one of the more common tasks you will use in your programs. Anything
you cut is placed in a temporary storage area called the Windows Clipboard. The Clipboard is
available to any Windows program, so you can cut and paste text between different programs.
1 1. . Select the entire subject line.
Remember how to select text? Point to the beginning or end of the text you want to
select, hold down the left mouse button, drag the cursor across the text, and release the
mouse button.
Now you can cut the selected text to the Windows clipboard.
Figure 6-17
The steps involved in
cutting and pasting text
Cut button
Other Ways to Cut:
Select Edit Cut from
the menu.
Press <Ctrl> + <X>.
Paste button
Other Ways to Paste:
Select Edit Paste
from the menu.
Press <Ctrl> + <V>.
1. Select the text or object you
want to cut and click the Cut
button on the Standard
Toolbar. The text or object is
removed or cut from its
original location.
2. Move the insertion point to
where you want to place the
cut text or object.
3. Click the Paste button on
the Standard Toolbar to
paste the cut text or object.
Chapter Six: Working with Program 153
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Cut Something:
1. Select the text or object
you want to cut.
2. Click the Cut button
on the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select Edit Cut from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <X>.
To Copy Something:
1. Select the text or object
you want to copy.
2. Click the Copy button
on the Standard toolbar.
Or
Select Edit Copy from
the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <C>.
To Paste a Cut or Copied
Object:
1. Place the insertion point
where you want to paste
the text or object.
2. Click the Paste
button on the Standard
toolbar.
Or
Select Edit Paste
from the menu.
Or
Press <Ctrl> + <V>.
2 2. . Click the Cut button on the Standard toolbar.
The selected text, the current date, disappears from WordPad and is placed in the
Windows Clipboard, ready to be moved to a new location.
NOTE: The Windows Clipboard can only hold one piece of information at a time.
Every time you cut or copy something to the Clipboard, it replaces the
previous information.
3 3. . Move the insertion point to the blank line immediately below To the La
Fanci Nails Company:.
This is where you want to paste the line you cut.
4 4. . Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar.
Poof! The cut text, the subject line, appears at the insertion point.
Copying information is very similar to cutting information. Both commands put your
selected information in the Clipboard where you can then paste it to a new location.
The only difference between the two commands is that Cut command deletes selected
information when it copies it to the clipboard, while the Copy command copies the
selected information to the clipboard without deleting it.
5 5. . Select the entire document by holding down the <Ctrl> key and clicking
the pointer in the left margin.
Now you can copy the selected text to the clipboard.
6 6. . Click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar.
Nothing appears to happen, but the selected text has been copied to the clipboard.
One of the great things about Windows is that it allows you to share information
between programs. For example, the information that you just copied to the Windows
clipboard from WordPad can be pasted into another Windows program. To see how this
works, you will need to open another Windows programthe Notepad.
7 7. . Click the Start button and select All Programs Accessories
Notepad.
The Notepad program appears. Notepad is a bare-bones simple program and doesnt
have a toolbar like WordPad does, so you will have to access the Paste command
through the menu.
8 8. . Select Edit Paste from the Notepad menu.
The document you copied from the WordPad program is pasted into the Notepad
program. You wont be using the Notepad program anymore in this chapter, so you can
close it.
9 9. . Click the Notepad programs Close button.
A dialog box appears, asking if you want to save the changes you made to the Notepad
file. You dont need to save any changes, so you can safely click No.
1 10 0. . Click No.
You should save the changes youve made to your WordPad document.
1 11 1. . Click the Save button on WordPads Standard toolbar to save the
changes youve made to the document.
WordPad saves your recent changes to the local disk.
Copy button
Other Ways to Copy:
Select Edit Copy
from the menu.
Press <Ctrl> + <C>.
154 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-11: Changing the Font
Type and Size
In this lesson, youll learn how to change the font or text size and style. Although youll be
working with the WordPad program, the basic procedure for changing the size and type of a
font is the same in all Windows programs.
1 1. . Move the insertion point the very end of the document and press
<Enter> twice to add a blank line.
You are going to add your name to the document here, but first you want to use a
different font to make it stand out.
2 2. . Click the Font list arrow on the Formatting toolbar.
A list appears with all the fonts that are available on your computer, listed in
alphabetical order. Since there isnt enough room to display all the font types at once,
you may have to scroll up or down the list until you find the font type you want.
3 3. . Scroll up the Font list until you see the Bookman Old Style font, then
click the Bookman Old Style font.
Anything you type at this point will appear in the selected Bookman Old Style font.
Figure 6-18
Select a font from the font
list.
Figure 6-19
The Font dialog box
Font list
Other Ways to Change
Fonts:
Select Format Font
from the menu, select
the font options you
want from the font
dialog box, then click
OK.
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Select the font type
The currently
selected font type
Special font
formatting
effects
Change the color
of the font
Select the font type
(Bold and/or Italic)
Preview of the
current font
settings
Change the size of
the font
Chapter Six: Working with Program 155
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Change Font Size:
Select the point size from
the Font Size list on
the Formatting toolbar.
Or
Select Format Font
from the menu and select
the font size in the Font
dialog box.
To Change Font Type:
Select the font from the
Font
Style list on the
Formatting toolbar.
Or
Select Format Font
from the menu and select
the font type in the Font
dialog box.
4 4. . Type Jane Plain.
The name Jane Plain appears in the Bookman Old Style font. You can also select text
and change it to a new font.
5 5. . Select the line To the La Fanci Nails Company:.
In the next step, well change the selected text to Courier New font type.
6 6. . Click the Font list arrow and select Courier New from the Font list.
The selected text changes to the Courier New font.
You can also change the size of a font and make it larger or smaller. Font size is
measured in points: the bigger the point number, the larger the size of the font. 10 point
and 12 point are the most commonly used font sizes. Changing the font size is similar
to changing font types.
7 7. . Make sure the To the La Fanci Nails Company: line is still selected,
and click the Font Size list arrow.
A list of font sizes appears.
8 8. . Select 14 from the Font Size list.
The font for the selected line is enlarged to 14 point.
So far, youve been using the Formatting toolbar to change the type and size of fonts.
Another method of adjusting the type and size of fonts is to use the Font dialog box,
which you can open using the menu. Since not all Windows programs have a
Formatting toolbar, you should know how to format fonts with this method.
9 9. . Select Format Font from the menu.
The Font dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-19. Notice there are options for
changing the font type and size, as well as other formatting options. After youve
surveyed the Font dialog box, you can close it without making any changes by clicking
the Cancel button.
1 10 0. . Click Cancel to close the Font dialog box without making any changes.
Table 6-1: Examples of Font Types and Sizes
Common Font Types Common Font Sizes
Arial
Arial 8 point
Comic Sans MS
Arial 10 point
Courier New
Arial 12 point
Times New Roman
Arial 14 point
Font Size list
Other Ways to Change
the Font Size:
Select Format Font
from the menu, select
the font options you
want from the font
dialog box, and click
OK.
156 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quick Reference
To Format Text with Bold,
Italics, or Underlining:
Click the Bold, Italics,
or Underline button on
the Formatting toolbar.
Or
Select Format Font
from the menu and select
the formatting from the
Font Style list.
Or
Press the <Ctrl> key and:
<B> for Bold
<I> for Italics
<U> for Underlining
Lesson 6-12: Using Bold, Italics,
and Underline
In the previous lesson, you learned how to format characters in a document by changing their
font type and font size. This lesson will show you how to emphasize text in a document by
making the text darker and heavier (bold), slanted (italics), or by adding underlining.
1 1. . Select the text La Fanci Nails, located in the first body paragraph in your
document.
You can make the selected text stand out by formatting with Italics.
2 2. . Click the Italics button on the Formatting toolbar.
The selected text, La Fanci Nails, appears in italics. Notice that the Italics button is
pushed down on the Formatting toolbar, indicating the text is formatted with Italics.
Its just as easy to format characters with bold or underline formatting.
3 3. . Select the line Subject: Glue Crisis.
Now format the selected text with bold formatting.
4 4. . Click the Bold button on the Formatting toolbar.
The selected text appears in bold. To remove the bold style, repeat step 4.
5 5. . Make sure the Subject: Glue Crisis is still selected, then click the Bold
button on the Formatting toolbar.
The bold style is removed from the selected text. You can apply italic and underline
formatting from text by using the same method, except you would click the Italics or
Underline button.
Figure 6-20
WordPads Formatting
toolbar
Figure 6-21
The document with bold
and italics formatting
Italics button
Other Ways to Italics:
Select Format Font
from the menu, select
Italic from the Font
Style box, and then
click OK.
Press <Ctrl> + <I>.
Bold button
Font list
Font Size
Bold
Italics
Underline
Font Color
Align
Left
Align
Right
Center Bullets
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Bold Italics
Font script list
Chapter Six: Working with Program 157
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Change a Paragraphs
Alignment:
Place the insertion point
in the paragraph and click
the Align Left, Center,
or Align Right button.
Or
Place the insertion point
in the paragraph, select
Format Paragraph
from the menu and select
the alignment, from the
Alignment list.
Lesson 6-13: Changing Paragraph
Alignment
This lesson moves on to paragraph formatting and explains how to justify paragraphs or align
them to the left, right, or center of a page. These are common formatting tasks for all word
processing programs.
1 1. . Place the insertion point anywhere in the last line, Jane Plain, and then
click the Align Right button on the Formatting toolbar.
The last line is aligned to the right with a ragged left edge.
2 2. . Drag the mouse pointer to select the two body paragraphs, as shown in
Figure 6-22, then click the Center button on the Formatting toolbar.
The selected paragraphs are centered on the page.
3 3. . Press the <End> key to move to the end of the current line, then press
<Enter>.
Notice the new paragraph will be centered like the one above it. Thats because when
you press <Enter>, the new paragraph inherits the formatting from the paragraph
above it.
4 4. . Select the two paragraphs again, and click the Align Left button on the
Formatting toolbar.
The selected paragraphs are again aligned to the left.
5 5. . Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar to save your work.
Figure 6-22
Place the insertion point
in the paragraph you want
to align, or select the
paragraph(s).
Figure 6-23
Clicking the Center button
on the Formatting toolbar
centers the selected
paragraphs.
Figure 6-24
Left, right, centered, and
justified paragraphs
Align Right button
Center button
Align Left button
Left Align Right Align
Centered Justified
Figure 6-22 Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
158 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-14: Getting Help by
Contents
When you dont know how to do something in Windows or a Windows based program, dont
despairmost programs come with a built-in help feature. Help is one of the greatestand
sadly, the least usedfeature of most Windows programs. There is often more information
about how to use a program under the Help feature than there is in the program manual! Many
people actually learn how to use entire programs by simply using the Help feature of the
program when they dont know how to do something.
Help allows you to try new, exciting things in programs all by yourself. It simply cannot be
stressed how important and useful the Help feature is. There are several ways you can get help
in Windowswell look at them in the next couple of lessons.
For this lesson, imagine that youve seen several of your co-workers use different sized fonts
in their WordPad documents. You decide its time you learned how to change the size of fonts
in WordPad, so you decide to use the help feature.
Most Windows applications have a Help menu listed at the far right of the menu bar. You can
also open Help pressing the <F1> key.
Figure 6-25
The Contents tab of the
Help window
Figure 6-26
You can expand a Help
Topic.
Figure 6-27
The displayed help topic
Figure 6-25 Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Chapter Six: Working with Program 159
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Get Help by Contents:
1. Press <F1> or select
Help from the menu, and
click the Contents tab if
necessary.
2. Scroll down the screen
and double-click the help
topic youre looking for.
3. Double-click any Help
subtopic(s).
To Move a Previous Help
Screen or Topic:
Click the Back button.
To Print a Help Topic:
Click the Options button
and select Print Topic.
1 1. . Make sure the WordPad program is opening/loading the active window
and press the <F1> key.
The Help window appears with the Contents tab in front, as shown in Figure 6-25. One
way to get help is by going to Contents. Using Helps Contents is similar to using a
books table of contents. Helps Contents is a good way to get general information on a
topic, especially if its a subject youre not familiar with. The Helps Contents are
organized in outline form. The book icons ( ) that appear to the left of a topic tells
you there are sub-topics and information under this topic. To view this information,
you have to open or expand the topic by double-clicking it.
2 2. . Click the WordPad icon and then click the Format Text topic to expand
it.
The topic opens and a list of sub-topics appear under it, as shown in Figure 6-26.
3 3. . Click the Change a font type, style, or size topic (it has a question
mark icon that appears to the left of it).
Information on text formatting appears in the right pane of the Help window, as shown
in Figure 6-27. You can easily print any Help topic.
4 4. . Click the Options button at the top of the dialog box and select the
Print item.
The Print Topics box appears. We just want to print one topic.
5 5. . Select Print Selected Topic and click OK.
The Print dialog box appears, ready to carry out your print command. Since you
already know how to print in Windows, save the paper and cancel the print job.
6 6. . Click the Cancel button to close the Print dialog box without sending the
Help topic to the printer.
The <F1> key displays
help on what youre
doing.
Options button
160 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-15: Getting Help with
the Help Index and Search
Two more methods of getting help are with the Help Index and Search. You use the Help
Index just like you would use the index in the back of a book.
1 1. . If the Help window isnt already open, press <F1> to open it.
2 2. . Click the Index tab to bring it to the front.
The Index tab appears in front of the Help Window. This time, lets get some help on
how to save files in WordPad.
Figure 6-28
The Index tab of the Help
dialog box
Figure 6-29
The Topics Found dialog
box
Figure 6-30
Click the to display
help on what a dialog box
control does.
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Chapter Six: Working with Program 161
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Use the Help Index:
1. Press <F1> or select
Help from the menu and
click the Index tab.
2. Type the keyword(s) that
describe the help topic
you are looking for.
3. Double-click the help
topic youre looking for.
To Find a Help Topic:
1. Press <F1> or select
Help from the menu and
click the Search or Find
tab.
2. Type the keyword(s) topic
you are looking for.
3. Double-click the Help
topic youre looking for.
To See what a Control in a
Dialog Box Does:
1. Click the Dialog box
Whats This button
(located right next to the
close button).
2. Click the control you want
more information on with
the pointer.
3 3. . In the Type in the keyword to find box, type the word Saving.
The Index topics list box displays all index entries that begin with the words Saving,
as shown in Figure 6-28. A help topic called Saving Documents is listedsee what this
topic is about.
4 4. . Double-click the Saving Text subtopic to open it.
The Topics Found dialog box appears. We need to choose a topic.
5 5. . Double-click the Create Open or Save a WordPad Document topic.
Information on saving changes to a document appears in the right pane of the Help
window.
The Search function is another way that you can search for Help topics. Search is much
more specific and powerful than either Helps Contents or the Help Index. Search
allows you to search for specific information.
6 6. . Click the Search tab.
Next, you must specify what help you want to look for.
7 7. . In the Type the word(s) you want to find box, type the word Save and
click the List Topics button.
Both the words and topics lists are updated to show all help topics that contain the
word Save. You can refine a help search by typing in more than one word.
8 8. . In the Type the word(s) you want to find box, type a <Space> then the
words File after the word table so that the text box reads Save File.
Then click Display.
Both the words and topics lists are updated and display only those help topics that
contain both the words Save and File in them.
9 9. . Double-click the WordPad Overview topic.
Windows displays the WordPad Overview help topic.
1 10 0. . Click the Close button to close the Help dialog box.
During your journey with Windows you will probably come across dialog boxes with a
number of confusing controls and options. To help you find out what the various
controls and options in a dialog box do, many dialog boxes contain a Whats This
button, located right next to the close button.
1 11 1. . Select Format Paragraph from the menu.
The Paragraph dialog box appears. Notice the Help button located in the dialog boxs
title bar just to the left of the dialog boxs close button.
1 12 2. . Click the Whats This button.
The mouse pointer changes to a , indicating you can point to anything on the dialog
box to find out what it does, as shown in Figure 6-30.
1 13 3. . Click the Alignment combo box.
A window appears with a brief description of what the Alignment combo box does.
1 14 4. . Click Cancel to close the Paragraph dialog box.
Thats ityoure done learning the various ways to get help in Windows. If you know how to
use a programs Help feature, you may never need to attend another computer class
everything you need to know is there, buried somewhere in Help. Make yourself a promise
that the next time you have a question about how to do something in a program, you will try
using the programs built-in Help feature before you reach for the manual or ask one of your
computer-savvy friends.
Whats This
button
162 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 6-16: Saving and Opening
Files in Different Locations
By saving your files in related folders right away, you make them easier to find and dont
have to do as much file management later. This lesson will show you how to save your files in
different locations. Youll also learn how to save files in different file formats.
1 1. . Open the WordPad program by clicking the Start button and selecting
File All Programs Accessories WordPad from the program
menu.
The WordPad program appears.
2 2. . Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.
The Open Dialog box for the WordPad program appears, as shown in Figure 6-32.
Before we open a file, first lets take a closer look at the Open dialog box. Notice the
toolbar that appears near the top of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-31. If several
of the buttons on the toolbar look somewhat familiar, they shouldbecause theyre the
same toolbar buttons that youll find in My Computer and Windows Explorer. When
youre opening or saving a file you can navigate through the drives, folders, and files
on your computer just like you do in My Computer and Windows Explorer.
3 3. . Navigate to and open your practice folder or floppy disk.
Your computer stores information in files and folders, just like you store information in
a filing cabinet. To open a file, you must first find and open the folder where its saved.
The Save dialog box has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your
computers drives and folders. Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful:
Look In List: Click to list the drives on your computer
and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose contents you
want to display.
Figure 6-31
The Open/Save toolbar
Figure 6-32
The Open dialog box for
the WordPad program
Open button
Other Ways to Open a
File:
Select File Open
from the menu.
Figure 6-32
Look In List
Select the drive or folder
where you want to open or
save the file
Move up one level,
to the previous
folder or drive
Create a new
folder
Display in
different views
Figure 6-31
Return to the
last folder
Chapter Six: Working with Program 163
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Save a File in a New
Location:
Select File Save As
from the menu, open the
drive and/or folder where
you want to save the file,
and click Save.
To Save a File in a
Different File Format:
Select File Save As
from the menu, select the
file format from the Save
as type list, and click
Save.
Up One Level button: Click to move up one folder.
If necessary, follow your instructors directions to select the appropriate drive and
folder where your practice files are located.
The Open dialog box reads the contents of the practice folder or disk and displays any
Word for Windows (*.doc) files. Heres how you can view all the file types in the root
directory on the drivenot just Word for Windows files.
4 4. . Click the File of type list and select All Documents (*.*).
The Open dialog box is updated to display all the files in the root directory of the
floppy disk.
5 5. . Double-click the Canada Meeting Memo file to open it.
WordPad opens the Canada Meeting Memo file. Normally, when you save an existing
file, its saved with its original file name in its original location or folder. There are
times, however, when you will need to save a copy of a file in a new location, with a
different file name, or in a different file format.
6 6. . Select File Save As from the menu.
The Save As dialog box appears.
Whenever you save or store files on a computer, try to save them in a related folder.
For example, you might create a Personal Letters folder to store all your personal
correspondence files and a Business folder for your business-related files. Selecting a
folder to save a file in is easysimply double-click the Create New folder icon on the
toolbar.
NOTE: If you dont specify a drive or folder when youre saving a file, the program
will save the file in the current folderthe drive and folder that happens to be
open at that time. This can often make the file more difficult to find in the
future.
7 7. . Double-click the Trade Show folder.
The Trade Show folder opensthis is where you want to save the file.
Earlier in this chapter, you learned that computer programs save and open files in their
own different types or formats, just like people from different countries speak different
languages. But, just as some people can speak more than one language, many computer
programs can open and save files using other file types or formats. WordPad normally
saves files in Word for Windows (*.doc) format, but its easy to save files in different
formats.
8 8. . Click the Save as type list arrow.
A list of different types of file formats appears.
9 9. . Select Text Documents (*.txt) from the Save as type list.
One more thing before we save the filewe want to save it with a different name. If
you clicked the Save button at this point, WordPad would save the file in the Trade
Show folder with the original file name, Canada Meeting Memo. To save the file
with a different name, simply type the new file name in the File Name box.
1 10 0. . Click in the File Name box and type Canada Letter.
1 11 1. . Click Save and click Yes to confirm the loss in formatting.
WordPad saves the Canada Letter as a text file under the Trade Show folder.
1 12 2. . Close the WordPad program.
You can perform basic
file management, such
as renaming, deleting,
moving, and copying
files and folders from
inside any Open or
Save dialog box, just
as if you were in My
Computer.
164 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Chapter Six Review
Lesson Summary
How to Use Menus
Open a menu by clicking the menu name with the mouse or by pressing <Alt> and then the
underlined letter in menu.
How to Use Toolbars
Click the toolbar button you want to use.
To See What a Toolbar Button Does: Position the pointer over the toolbar button and wait a
second. A ScreenTip will appear above the button.
Filling Out a Dialog Box
Be able to identify and use text boxes, list boxes, check boxes, combo boxes, and buttons.
Use a scroll bar to move up or down when a list or screen cant display all its information at once.
To Select a Dialog Box Control: Click the control with the mouse or press <Tab> to move to the
next control in the dialog box or <Shift> + <Tab> to move to the previous control until you arrive at
the desired control.
Entering Text in the WordPad Program
Place the insertion point in WordPad by clicking in the WordPad screen, and type your text.
Editing Text
Move the insertion point by pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard or by clicking where you want
to place the insertion point.
To Insert Text: Move the insertion point where you want to insert the text and then type the text
you want to insert.
To Delete Text: The <Delete> key deletes text before, or to the right of, the insertion point. The
<Backspace> key deletes text after, or to the left of, the insertion point.
Saving and Opening a File
To Save a File: Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar or select File Save from the
menu, select the drive and/or folder where you want to save the file, give the file a name, and click
Save.
To Open a File: Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar or select File Open from the
menu, select the drive and/or folder where the file you want to open is located, select the file and
click Open.
Chapter Six: Working with Program 165
Your Organizations Name Here
Selecting, Replacing, and Deleting Text
Selecting Text with the Mouse: Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text you
want to select. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the insertion point across the text,
releasing the mouse button once the text is selected.
Selecting Text with the Keyboard: Move the insertion point to the beginning or end of the text
you want to select, and press and hold the <Shift> key while you use the arrow keys to select the
text.
Double-click the word to select it.
Typing replaces any selected text; pressing the <Delete> or <Backspace> key deletes any
selected text.
Deselect text by clicking anywhere on the screen.
Using Undo
To Undo Your Last Action: Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, or select Edit
Undo from the menu, or press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
Printing a File
Print a file by clicking the Print button on the Standard toolbar, or by selecting File Print from
the menu, or by pressing <Ctrl> + <P>.
Select File Print from the menu to display the Print dialog box, which allows you to specify
printing optionssuch as printing specific pages or multiple copies.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Text
To Cut Something: Select the text or object you want to cut. Cut the selection by clicking the Cut
button on the Standard toolbar, or by selecting Edit Cut from the menu, or by pressing <Ctrl> +
<X>.
To Copy Something: Select the text or object you want to copy. Copy the selection by clicking the
Copy button on the Standard toolbar, or by selecting Edit Copy from the menu, or by pressing
<Ctrl> + <C>.
To Paste a Cut or Copied Object: Place the insertion point where you want to paste the text or
object. Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar, or select Edit Paste from the menu, or
press <Ctrl> + <V>.
Changing the Font Type and Size
To Change Font Size: Select the pt. size from the Font Size list on the Formatting toolbar or
select Format Font from the menu and select the font size in the dialog box.
To Change Font Type: Select the font from the Font Style list on the Formatting toolbar or select
Format Font from the menu and select the font type in the Font dialog box.
166 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Using Bold, Italics, and Underline
Format text with bold, italics, or underling by clicking the corresponding button (Bold, Italics, or
Underline) on the Formatting toolbar or by selecting Format Font from the menu and selecting
the formatting from the Font Style list. You can also press the <Ctrl> key and:
<B> for Bold
<I> for Italics
<U> for Underlining.
Changing Paragraph Alignment
Change a paragraphs alignment by placing the insertion point in the paragraph and then either
clicking the Align Left, Center, or Align Right button on the Formatting toolbar, or by selecting
Format Paragraph from the menu and selecting the paragraph alignment from the Alignment
list.
Getting Help by Contents
Pressing the <F1> key displays information on what youre currently doing.
To Get help by Contents: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu, and click the Contents tab if
necessary. Scroll down the screen and click the topic youre looking for. Double-click any subtopics
if necessary.
Click the Back button to move to the previous help screen or topic.
To Print a Help Topic: Click the Options button and select Print Topic.
Getting Help with the Help Index and Search
To Use the Help Index: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu and click the Index tab and
type the keyword(s) that describe the Help topic you are looking for. Double-click the Help topic
youre looking for.
To Search for a Help Topic: Press <F1> or select Help from the menu and click the Search tab
and type the keyword(s) that describe the help topic you are looking for. Double-click the Help topic
youre looking for.
Clicking the Dialog boxs Help button and then clicking a control with the pointer explains what the
control does.
Saving and Opening Files in Different Locations
To Save a File in a New Location: Select File Save As from the menu, open the drive and/or
folder where you want to save the file, and click Save.
To Save a File in a Different File Format: Select File Save As from the menu, select the file
format from the Save as type list, and click Save.
Chapter Six: Working with Program 167
Your Organizations Name Here
Quiz
1. You can open a programs menu by: (Select all that apply.)
A. Clicking the menu name with the mouse.
B. Pressing <Esc> and then the underlined letter in menu.
C. Pressing <Alt> and then the underlined letter in menu.
D. Saying Computer, open the (state the name of the menu here) menu.
2. How can you move the insertion point in WordPad? (Select all that apply.)
A. By pressing the arrows keys on your computers keyboard.
B. By using the mouse and clicking where you want to place the insertion point with the
pointer.
C. By selecting the Window Move Insertion Point command.
D. The insertion point is an immovable object and cant be moved.
3. Which key deletes text before, or to the left, of the insertion point?
A. <Page Up>
B. <Page Down>
C. <Delete>
D. <Backspace>
4. Typing overwrites, or replaces, any text that is selected (True or False?)
5. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. You can undo the last action or mistake you made by clicking the Undo button on the
toolbar or by selecting Edit Undo from the menu.
B. You can print the file youre working on by clicking the Print button on the toolbar
or by selecting File Print from the menu.
C. You should save your work or file whenever you think about it.
D. Files names can contain up to 8 characters.
6. The following will cut selected text or information and place it on the
clipboard (Select all that apply.)
A. Pressing <Ctrl> + <X>.
B. Pressing <Ctrl> + <Delete>.
C. Clicking the Cut button on the toolbar.
D. Selecting Edit Cut from the menu.
7. Unlike cutting, when you copy something, you cant see it on-screen (True
or False?)
8. Pressing <F5> displays Help on what youre doing (True or False?)
Homework
1. Either insert your Practice Files CD, or navigate to where your practice files are
located. If you dont know where they are, ask your instructor.
2. Start WordPad. Open the Homework 3 file from your practice files.
168 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
3. Select File Save As from the menu. Save the Homework 3 as Memo on the
Practice CD in the D: drive, or in your practice files.
4. Move the insertion point to the end of the TO: line, press the <Spacebar> and type
All Staff.
5. Select the top three address lines.
6. With the top address lines still selected, click the Center button on the Formatting
toolbar to center align them.
7. Select the top North Shore Travel line and change the font type to Times New
Roman, the font size to 14 pt., and apply bold formatting.
8. With the top North Shore Travel line still selected, press the <Delete> key to erase
the line. Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar to undo the deletion.
9. Select the text Sandra Willes, Communication Director and copy it by clicking the
Copy button on the Standard toolbar
10. Move to the very end of the document, press the <Enter> key to add a blank line,
type Sincerely, and press <Enter> four times to add several blank lines.
11. Click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar to paste the text you copied in Step 9.
12. Save your work and exit WordPad.
Quiz Answers
1. A and C. Clicking the menu name or pressing the <Alt> key and the underlined letter
in the menu will both open a menu.
2. A and B. Either method will move the insertion point.
3. D. The <Delete> key deletes text before, or to the left, of the insertion point.
<Backspace> deletes text after, or to the right, of the insertion point
4. True. Typing replaces any selected text.
5. D. MS-DOS files had an 8 character limit, but in Windows XP file names can
contain up to 255 characters.
6. B. All the other methods will cut selected text or information and place it on the
clipboard.
Chapter Six: Working with Program 169
Your Organizations Name Here
7. True. You cant see anything happen when you copy something, although it has been
placed in the invisible Windows clipboard behind the scenes.
8. False. <F1> is the Windows help key.
Chapter Seven:
Working with Files
and Folders
Chapter Objectives:
Understanding storage devices, folders, and files
Using My Computer to navigate through folders and files
Opening, creating, and renaming files and folders
Copying, moving, and deleting files and folders
Restoring a deleted file, and emptying the Recycle Bin
Changing how information is displayed
Selecting multiple files and folders
Finding a file using the Search Companion
Using Windows Explorer
When you work at a desk, unless you make an effort to stay organized, all your papers and
files begin to pile up and become messy. It takes a little more time, but the same phenomenon
occurs when working with Windowsthe files you create using your computer start to
become disorganized, and are harder and harder to find.
In this chapter, youll take your first step beyond the Windows basics and enter the world of
file management. Youll learn how Windows stores information in files and folders, just like a
file cabinet does. Youll find you will need to clean and organize your files and folders from
time to time, just like you would the contents of a file cabinet. This chapter explains how to
organize your computer by creating folders to store related information, how to move and
copy files between folders, how to delete and rename files and folders, and how to retrieve a
deleted file if you change your mind. You can perform file management using several
different programsMy Computer, Windows Explorer, Files and Settings Transfer Wizard,
and the Open and Save dialog boxes found in most programs.
; Prerequisites
How to use the mouse
to click, double-click,
drag and drop, and
right-click
How to use menus,
toolbars, and dialog
boxes
172 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-1: Understanding
Storage Devices, Folders, and
Files
In order to understand file management, you need to understand how your computer stores
information. Filing cabinets store information in files, which are organized and grouped in
folders and kept in big drawers. Computers also store information in files, which are also
organized and grouped in folders, and stored not in big drawers but on disks. A disk drive is
the part of the computer that reads and writes information onto disks, just like a tape recorder
records and plays music on a cassette. There are four main types of disks/drives computers
use to store their information, as shown in the following table:
Table 7-1: Common Computer Disks/Drives
Type Drive Letter Size Description
Floppy Disk
A or B 1.44 MB Floppy disks are the square plastic things that look
like coffee coasters. Floppy drives cant hold a lot
of information, but theyre ideal for moving small
files, such as word processing documents,
between computers.
Figure 7-1
How information is stored
in a file cabinet
Figure 7-2
How information is stored
on a disk
Information on a disk is
organized and grouped into
folders or directories.
Taxes
Investments
Letters
Love Letters
Letter to Bill
Letter to Mary
A file cabinets information is
organized and grouped into
folders.
A folder may contain several
files and even several
subfolders.
A computer stores
information on disks.
A folder may contain several
files and subfolders.
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 173
Your Organizations Name Here
Type Drive Letter Size Description
Hard Disk
C and above Over 4 GB Hard disks hide permanently inside your computer.
Your computers hard disk is its main filing
cabinetwhere it stores almost all of its programs
and files.
CD-ROM
D or above 600 MB Compact discs, or CD-ROMs, look like the audio
discs you play in your stereo. CD-ROMs are cheap
and they can store a lot of information, which is
why theyre used to install software for games and
programs with a lot of multimedia. Unlike floppy or
hard disks, most CD-ROMs can only read
informationyou cant save anything on them.
Removable
Drive
D or above Over 100 MB Removable storage drives have features of both
hard disks and floppy disks. Removable drives are
like a floppy drive because they read and write
information on small, removable cassettes that are
about the size of a floppy disk. They are like hard
drives because each cassette can usually hold
more than 100 MB and is almost as fast as a hard
drive.
Most computers come with a floppy drive, a hard drive, and a CD-ROM drive. Your computer
labels these drives with letters, as shown in Table 7-1: Common Computer Disks/Drives.
Just as liquids are measured in quarts and gallons, computers save their information in units
called bytes. Unlike gallons, computers use the metric system, so 1,000 bytes make up a
kilobyte and 1,000,000 (one million) bytes make up a megabyte, as shown in Table 7-2: How
Memory is Measured.
Table 7-2: How Memory is Measured
Term Description Size
Byte A byte can store a single character,
such as the letter j or numeral 8.
A single character.
Kilobyte
(K or KB)
A kilobyte (K) is about 1,000 bytes
(1,024 to be exact). A kilobyte is
equivalent to a page of double-spaced
typing.
1,024 bytes
Megabyte
(MB or MEG)
A megabyte (MB) is about one million
bytesabout as much text as an
average-length novel.
1,048,576 bytes
174 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-2: Using My Computer to
See Whats in Your Computer
When you want to see whats in a file cabinet, you simply pull open one of its drawers. You
can view the information stored on your computers drives in much the same wayby
opening the drive you want to access. This lesson will show you how to look at the drives,
folders, and files in your computer.
1 1. . Click the Start button and select the My Computer icon.
The My Computer window appears, as shown in Figure 7-3. The main window lists all
the drives on the computer. Since your computer may have different drives, the
contents of your computer may differ from those shown in Figure 7-3. Want to see
whats inside something? All you have to do is double-click the drive, folder, or file
you want to open.
Notice that My Computer appears in its own window, with its own little buttons, scroll
bars, and menus. The My Computer window works just like the other windows youve
been working with. You can move it, resize it, and minimize it.
Figure 7-3
My Computer displays the
drives, folders
(directories), and files that
are in your computer.
Figure 7-4
The Properties dialog box
for a Local Disk (C:) drive.
Figure 7-5
The My Computer toolbar.
Start button
My Computer
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Moves back
or up to the
previous
folder or level
Moves forward
to the last
subfolder or
level
Moves back
or up to the
previous
folder or level
Search for files
and folders on
your computer
or on the
network
Displays a
history of files
you have
opened
recently
Changes how
the contents
of the folder
are displayed
Figure 7-5
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 175
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To View the Contents of
Your Computer:
Click the Start button and
click the My Computer
icon.
To View the Contents of a
Disk Drive:
Follow the above step to
open My Computer and
then double-click the drive
you want to open.
To View the Properties of
Something:
Right-click the drive,
folder, or file and select
Properties from the
shortcut menu.
2 2. . Double-click the (C:) Local Disk icon.
The contents of the (C:) drive appear in the window. What do all those symbols in the
window mean? Each item you see has an icon, or symbol, to help you identify what
type of item it is. Well take a look at what each of these symbols mean in an upcoming
lesson.
To move back to the previous folder or level, click the Up button on the toolbar.
3 3. . Click the Up button on the toolbar to move back to the My Computer
level.
Youve moved from the (C:) drive back to My Computer. Now that you know the
procedure for displaying the contents of a drive, move on to the next step to display the
properties of the Local Disk (C:) drive.
4 4. . Right-click the (C:) Local Disk icon and select Properties from the
shortcut menu.
The floppy drive hums as Windows examines it. After a moment, the Properties
window appears, as shown in Figure 7-4. The Properties window displays the amount
of used and free space on the disk in megabytes (MB) and gigabytes (GB). Refer to the
previous lesson if youre unfamiliar with these terms.
5 5. . Close the Properties dialog box by clicking its Close button.
The Properties dialog box closes. Go ahead and close the My Computer window to
complete the lesson.
6 6. . Close the My Computer window.
Getting the hang of opening and exploring your computer? Good, because well be doing a lot
more snooping inside the contents of your computer throughout the rest of this chapter.
Local Disk (C:)
Up button
176 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-3: Opening a Folder
Your computer stores related files together in folders, just like you do with your file cabinet.
In the previous lesson, you learned how to use My Computer to view the contents of your
computer and open a disk drive and display its contents. In this lesson, well go a little bit
further and show you how to open a folder.
Windows XP gives you your very own a special folder named My Documents as a
convenient location to store all your files. Heres how to open the My Documents folder (and
any other folder).
1 1. . Click the Start button and select My Documents.
The contents of the My Documentsseveral files and subfoldersappear in the
window. The My Documents folder contains several folders, or subfolders. If you think
about it, you probably do the same thingkeep several subfolders inside a larger
folderin your own file cabinet.
Figure 7-6
Double-click a folder to
open it and view its
contents.
Figure 7-7
The files and folders
appear in the window.
My Documents
Figure 7-7
The Address bar displays the
name of the current drive and
folder
Figure 7-6
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 177
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Open a Folder:
Double-click the folder.
To Move Back or Up to the
Previous Level or Folder:
Click the Up button
on the toolbar.
Or
Click the Back
button on the toolbar.
Or
Click the
Address Bar on the
toolbar and select the
appropriate drive or
folder.
2 2. . Double-click the My Pictures folder.
The contents of the My Pictures folder appear in the Window. Notice the Address bar
displays the current folder you are in: My Pictures.
Instead of clicking the Up button several times to jump back through several levels of
folders, you can click the Address bar to quickly jump to the root directory of any of
drive on your computer.
NOTE: This is where the comparison weve been using between a file cabinet and a
computer begins to break down a bit. When you file things in your file
cabinet, you probably never have more than two, possibly three nested
folders (i.e. a folder inside another folder). Your computers folders, on the
other hand, can contain as many subfolders as you want, nested as deep as
you want, so you can have a folder inside a folder inside a folderad
infinitum.
3 3. . Click the Address Bar arrow .
A list of your computers drives and the folder you are currently in appears. You can
click any folder or drive to go to that folder or drive.
4 4. . Select the Local Disk (C:) drive from the list.
You return to the root directory of the (C:) drive. The Address bar is a fast way of
selecting a drive, especially if you are in a folder that is nested several levels deep.
You can think of the Address Bar as your compass because even when youre exploring
unfamiliar folders nested deep in the far recesses of your computer, it always tells you where
you are. If you get really lost, you can always click the Address Bar and jump back to the
familiar (C:) drive.
All this moving around your computer, opening disk drives and folders is a little boring, but
its something you have to get used to if you want to have any degree of proficiency with
Windows. Going back to our trusty file cabinet metaphor, imagine what would happen if you
didnt know how to open the drawers and folders in your file cabinet. How would you find
your tax returns if you were audited, or your insurance policy if you were in an accident?
Opening disk drives and folders, and being able to navigate through the contents of your
computer are among of the most important Windows skills you can learn.
My Pictures
Address Bar
178 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-4: Creating and
Renaming a Folder
Windows XP comes with the My Documents folder which you can use to save your files in,
but sooner or later youll want to expand your horizons and create your own folders inside the
My Documents folder or on the network to help you better organize your files. This lesson
will show you how to create a new folder to hold and organize your files. Youll also learn
how to rename an existing folder.
1 1. . Click the Start button and select the My Computer icon.
The My Computer window appears after you click the My Computer icon.
2 2. . Click the Local Disk (C:) icon.
The contents of the (C:) drive appear.
New to Windows XP is the folder task pane which makes working with files and
folders even easier. If the My Computer window is small the contents of the folder task
pane may be hidden from view at first.
Figure 7-8
The expanded File and
Folder Tasks menu
Figure 7-9
A newly created folder
File and Folder
Tasks panel
Other Ways to Create a
Folder:
Right-click on an empty
area of the (C:) drive
window and select
New Folder from
the shortcut menu.
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Every Windows XP folder provides
easy access to common file and folder
management tasks. You can select a
file or folder and then click one of the
tasks described in Table 7-3: File and
Folder Tasks.
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 179
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Create a New Folder:
1. Open the disk or folder
where you want to place
the new folder.
2. Select Make a new
folder task from the File
and Folder Tasks panel.
Or
Select File and Folder
Tasks Make a new
folder from the menu.
Or
Right-click any empty
area in the window and
select New Folder
from the shortcut menu.
3. Type a name for the
folder and press <Enter>.
To Rename a Folder:
Click the folder to select
it, select Rename
this folder from the Files
and Folders Tasks panel,
type a name for the folder
and press <Enter>.
Or
Right-click the folder,
select Rename from the
shortcut menu, type a
name for the folder and
press <Enter>.
3 3. . If necessary, click the File and Folder Tasks arrow in the folder task
panel.
The contents of the File and Folder Tasks panel appear.
4 4. . Select Make a new folder task from the File and Folder Tasks panel.
A new folder appears with a temporary name New Folder as shown in Figure 7-9.
Now all you have to do is move on to the next step and give the new folder a name.
5 5. . Type Practice Folder as the name for the new folder, and then press
<Enter>.
Your new Practice Folder is located in the root directory, or first folder, of the
(C:) drive. You can create a folder inside any existing folder the same wayby
opening the folder and then repeating Steps 3-5. You can create as many folders as you
like to develop your own filing system to help organize your files and folders. Open the
Practice Folder to display its contents.
NOTE: A file name can contain up to 255 characters, including spaces. File names
cannot contain the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |
6 6. . Double-click the Practice Folder to open it.
The contents of the Practice Folder appear in the window. Thats right, theres nothing
there. The Practice Folder is an empty folder, since you just created it.
7 7. . Click the Up button to move back to the root directory.
You can easily change the name of a folder. Heres how:
8 8. . Click the Practice Folder icon.
Now lets rename the folder. Heres how:
9 9. . Select Rename this folder from the Files and Folders Tasks panel,
type Temp Folder and press <Enter>.
The Practice Folder is renamed Temp Folder.
Table 7-3: File and Folder Tasks
Task Description
Make a new folder
Creates a new folder.
Rename this folder
Gives the selected file or folder a new name.
Move this folder
Moves the selected items to the destination you choose.
Copy this folder
Copies the selected items to the destination you choose.
Publish this folder to the Web
Transfers a copy of the selected items to a public Web page so
that you can share them with other people.
Share this folder Makes the selected folder available to computers on a network
so that other people can access it.
E-mail this folders files
Sends an e-mail message with copies of the selected items
attached.
Delete this folder
Deletes the selected items and sends them to the Recycle Bin.
Other Ways to Rename a
Folder:
Right-click the folder
and select Rename
from the shortcut menu.
180 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-5: Copying, Moving, and
Deleting a Folder
You probably dont reorganize the folders in your file cabinet very oftenand you probably
wont need to move or copy the folders on your computer very often either. When you find
you do need to move or copy a folder however, you can do so by using one of two simple
methods:
Drag-and-dropping
Using the File and Folder Tasks panel
Youll learn how to use both methods in this lesson and how to delete a folder when you no
longer need it.
1 1. . Create a new folder called My Stuff in your (C:) drive.
You learned how to create a folder in the previous lesson.
2 2. . Drag the My Stuff folder to the Temp Folder, as shown in Figure 7-10.
Already forgot how to drag and drop? If so, here it is one more time: position the
mouse over the My Stuff folder, click and hold down the mouse button as you move
the pointer to the Temp Folder, then release the mouse button. The My Stuff folder is
moved inside the Temp Folder. Lets make sure we really moved the My Stuff folder.
3 3. . Double-click the Temp Folder to open it.
Yep, theres the My Stuff folder. Heres another method for moving folders you might
want to knowusing Window XPs blue side panel.
4 4. . Click the My Stuff folder to select it.
Once you have selected the folder you want to move, go to the File and Folder Tasks
menu in the blue side panel.
Figure 7-10
To move a folder, drag it to
a new location on your
computer, in this case to
the Temp Folder.
Figure 7-11
The Move Items dialog
box lets you specify where
you want to move or copy
a file or folder.
To copy a folder, hold
down the <Ctrl> key as
you drag the folder to
the new location.
Other Ways to Move a
File or Folder:
Cut the file or folder by
selecting Edit Cut
from the menu or
pressing <Ctrl> + <X>,
moving to the desired
location and then
paste the file or folder
by selecting Edit
Cut from the menu, or
pressing <Ctrl> + <X>.
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 181
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Move a Folder:
Drag the folder to the
desired location (you
might have to open
another My Computer
window).
Or
1. Select the folder and click
Move this folder from
the File and Folder Tasks
menu in the side panel.
2. Select the folder or disk
where you want to move
the folder and click OK.
To Copy a Folder:
Hold down the <Ctrl> key
while you drag the folder
to the desired location
(you might have to open
another My Computer
window).
Or
1. Select the folder and click
Copy this folder from
the File and Folder Tasks
menu in the side panel.
2. Select the folder or disk
where you want to move
the folder and click OK.
To Delete a Folder:
Select the folder and
press the <Delete> key.
Click Yes to confirm the
folder deletion.
Or
Select the folder and click
Delete this folder from
the File and Folder Tasks
menu in the side panel.
Click Yes to confirm the
folder deletion.
5 5. . Select Move this folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu.
The Move Items dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-11. This is where you tell
Windows where you want to move the selected folder. The Move Items dialog box
displays the drives and folders on your computer in a hierarchical view. A plus symbol
( ) or a minus symbol ( ) beside a folder means a folder contains several subfolders.
Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can display the hidden folders within a
folder by clicking the plus sign ( ) beside the folder.
6 6. . Click the Plus Symbol to the left of the My Computer icon.
My Computer expands and displays its contents. The Local Disk (C:) is where you
want to move the My Stuff folder.
7 7. . Click the Local Disk (C:) icon and click OK.
The My Stuff folder is moved from the Temp Folder back to the root directory of the
(C:) drive.
8 8. . Click the Up button on the toolbar to move back to the root directory.
If you can move a folder you can copy a folderbecause all you need to do to copy a
folder is hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the folder to where you want it
copied.
9 9. . Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the My Stuff folder to the
Temp Folder.
Although you cant see it, the My Stuff folder has been copied to the Temp Folder.
Lets make sure.
1 10 0. . Double-click the Temp Folder to open it.
The contents of the Temp Folder appear in the window. Sure enough, the My Stuff
folder has been copied.
1 11 1. . Click the Up button to move back to the root directory.
Next well delete a folder.
1 12 2. . Click the Temp Folder to select it and then press the <Delete> key.
A dialog box may appear, asking you to confirm the action.
1 13 3. . Click Yes to delete the folder.
The Temp Folder and all its contents are deleted and disappear from the window.
Windows places any deleted files or folders in the Recycle Bin in case you change your
mind later on and decide you want to restore the file or folder. Well discuss the
Recycle Bin in an upcoming lesson.
NOTE: Deleting a folder can be dangerous. Before you delete a folder, make sure it
doesnt contain any important files. If you dont know what the contents of a
folder are, you shouldnt delete it.
1 14 4. . Delete the My Stuff folder by repeating the procedure in Steps 12 and 13
and then close the My Computer window.
Weve worked on copying and moving folders to locations on the same drive, but you can
also copy a folder to a different drive by dragging it to the drive icon where you want it
copied. If you cant see the drive or folder where you want to move or copy something, you
can open a second My Computer window and drag the folder from one window to the other.
182 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-6: Opening, Renaming,
and Deleting a File
In the past few lessons, youve learned all about foldershow to open, rename, move, copy,
and delete them. In the next couple of lessons, well be working with the files that are stored
in those folders. Working with files is very, very similar to working with folders. So similar, in
fact, that the procedures for opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting a file are
exactly the same as opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting a folder!
1 1. . Click the Start button and select My Computer.
The My Computer window appears.
2 2. . Navigate to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk.
Every folder window has its own toolbar that make it easy to browse through your
computers drives and folders. Two controls on this toolbar are particularly helpful:
Address List: Click to list the drives on your
computer and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose
contents you want to display.
Up One Level button: Click to move up one folder.
If necessary, follow your instructors directions to select the appropriate drive and
folder where your practice files are located.
3 3. . Find and double-click the Open Me file.
The Open Me file opens in the NotePad programthe program it was created in, as
shown in Figure 7-12. You could review, make changes to, and then save the Open Me
file if you wanted at this point.
4 4. . Click the Notepad programs close button to close the program and the
Open Me file.
The Notepad program closes.
Figure 7-12
Double-clicking the Open
Me file opens it in the
Notepad program.
Figure 7-13
Select a file to show all
File and Folder Tasks, or
right-click a file to display
a list of things you can do
to it.
Start button
My Computer
Open Me
Figure 7-12
You can rename a file by selecting the
file and clicking Rename this file from
the File and Folder Tasks panel
or by right-clicking the file and
selecting Rename from the shortcut
menu.
Figure 7-13
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 183
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Open a File:
Double-click the file.
To Rename a File:
Click the file to select it,
select Rename this file
from the File and Folder
Tasks menu, type a name
for the folder and press
<Enter>.
Or
Right-click the file, select
Rename from the
shortcut menu, type a
name for the folder and
press <Enter>.
To Delete a File:
Click the file to select it
and select Delete this file
from the File and Folder
Tasks menu. Click Yes to
confirm the folder
deletion.
Select the file and press
the <Delete> key. Click
Yes to confirm the folder
deletion.
Youve already learned how to rename and delete a folder, so the next few steps should
be really easy for you because you rename and delete a file in exactly the same way.
5 5. . Select the Open Me file.
Now we can rename the Open Me file using the File and Folder Tasks panel.
6 6. . Select Rename this file from the File and Folder Tasks panel, type
Text File as the new name for the folder, then press <Enter>.
The Open Me file is renamed Text File.
7 7. . Click the Text File to select it, and then press the <Delete> key.
A dialog box may appear, asking you to confirm the file deletion.
8 8. . Click Yes to delete the selected file.
The Text File is deleted and disappears from the window. Deleting a file isnt quite as
dangerous as deleting a folder is, but you should always consider if you might need the
file again. Dont delete a file unless youre absolutely sure you will never need it again.
And NEVER delete a file if you dont know what it is.
9 9. . Close the My Computer window.
Other Ways to Rename a
File:
Right-click on the file
and select Rename
from the shortcut menu.
Other Ways to Delete a
File:
Right-click on the file
and select Delete from
the shortcut menu.
184 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-7: Copying and Moving a
File

The procedure for moving and copying files is no different than moving or copying folders.
This lesson about moving and copying files should be a refresher for you.
1 1. . Click the Start button and select My Computer.
The My Computer window appears.
2 2. . Navigate to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk.
Again, you can use the following toolbar buttons to find your way around your
computer:
Address List: Click to list the drives on your
computer and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose
contents you want to display.
Up One Level button: Click to move up one folder.
If necessary, follow your instructors directions to select the appropriate drive and
folder where your practice files are located.
When copying or moving files or folders, you may find it easier if you have two
windows open at the same time: one window with the source file(s) and another
window for the destination where you want to move or copy the file(s).
3 3. . Drag the Current Budget file to the Accounting folder.
The Current Budget file is moved to, or inside, the Accounting folder. Open the
Accounting folder to make sure the file was moved.
4 4. . Double-click the Accounting folder to open it.
Sure enough, the Current Budget file has been moved to the Accounting folder.
To copy a file using the drag and drop method, press the <Ctrl> key as you drag the file
to a new folder.
Figure 7-14
To move a file, drag the
file to the desired location.
Figure 7-15
The Copy Items dialog
box.
Start button
My Computer
Other Ways to Move or
Copy a file:
Click the file to select it,
click Edit, and select
Move to or Copy to from
the menu.
Or
Right-click the file and
select where you want
to copy the file from the
shortcut menu.
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 185
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Move a File:
Drag the file to the
desired location (you may
have to open another
window).
Or
1. Click the file to select it,
and click Move this file
from the File and Folder
Tasks menu.
2. Select the folder where
you want to move the file
and click OK.
Or
1. Select the file, click Edit
from the menu bar, and
select Move to.
2. Select the folder you want
to move the file to and
click OK.
To Copy a File:
1. Hold down the <Ctrl> key
while you drag the file to
the desired location (you
might have to open
another My Computer
window).
Or
1. Click the file to select it
and select Copy this file
from the File and Folder
Tasks menu.
2. Select the folder where
you want to copy the file
and click OK.
Or
1. Select the file, click Edit
from the menu bar, and
select Copy to from the
menu.
2. Select the folder where
you want to copy the file
and click OK.
You can also copy files.
5 5. . Click the Current Budget file to select it.
Now that the file is selected, you can move it to a different location.
6 6. . Click Copy this file in the File and Folder Tasks panel.
The Copy Items dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7-15. Now you can tell
Windows where you want to move the selected file.
The Copy Items dialog box displays the drives and folders on your computer in a
hierarchical view. A plus symbol ( ) or a minus symbol ( ) beside a folder means a
folder contains several subfolders. Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can
display the hidden folders within a folder by clicking the plus sign ( ) beside the
folder.
Now copy the file to the Desktop of your computer.
7 7. . Select Desktop in the Copy Items dialog box and click Copy.
The Current Budget file is copied to your computers Desktop.
NOTE: Some people actually do save their most important files to the Desktop so that
they wont lose them. Just make sure that you dont save too many files
therenobody likes a messy desktop!
We dont want to clutter your computers desktop with practice files, so lets delete the
Current Budget files from the Desktop.
8 8. . Close the file windows.
The windows close, allowing you to view the Desktop and the copied Current Budget
file.
9 9. . Select the Current Budget file and press <Delete>.
A dialog box appears, asking if you really want to delete the file.
1 10 0. . Click Yes.
The dialog box closes and the Windows deletes the file.
186 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-8: Restoring a Deleted
File and Emptying the Recycle Bin
Just like a wastebasket, the Recycle Bin stores all of the files and folders you have deleted. If
you change your mind and decide you need a deleted file, its easy to find and retrieve it. This
lesson will show you how to open the Recycle Bin and see whats inside, restore a previously
deleted file, and empty the Recycle Bin to free up some space on your hard disk.
1 1. . Double-click the Recycle Bin to open it.
The Recycle Bin opens and displays all the files you have recently deleted. If you
accidentally delete a file or folder, you can retrieve it from the Recycle Bin.
2 2. . Find and select the Current Budget file.
You can restore a selected file by selecting Restore this item from the Recycle Bin
Tasks panel. Lets try it!
3 3. . Select Restore this item from the Recycle Bin Tasks panel.
Restoring a file pulls it out of the Recycle Bin and puts it back in its original location.
4 4. . Close the Recycle Bin window.
Now, make sure the Current Budget file is in its original location.
5 5. . Verify that the Current Budget file has been retrieved to the Desktop.
Okay, you can delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop again, and this time we
wont restore it.
Figure 7-16
Restoring files and
emptying the Recycle Bin
Figure 7-17
The Recycle Bin shortcut
menu
Recycle Bin
contains deleted
files
Recycle Bin does
not contain
deleted files
You can also restore
a file by right-clicking
it and selecting
Restore from the
shortcut menu
Empty the
Recycle Bin
Restore all files
in the Recycle
Bin
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-16
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 187
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Restore a Deleted File:
1. Double-click the Recycle
Bin to open it.
2. Find and right-click the
deleted file and select
Restore this item
from the Recycle Bin
Tasks menu.
Or
2. Find and right-click the
deleted file and select
Restore from the shortcut
menu.
To Empty the Recycle Bin:
Right-click the Recycle
Bin and select Empty
Recycle Bin from the
shortcut menu.
6 6. . Delete the Current Budget file from the Desktop.
There is theoretically a limit to how many deleted files and folders the Recycle bin can
hold. The maximum size of the Recycle bin is normally set 10 percent of the hard
drive. So for example, if you have a 10GB hard drive, the maximum amount of files
the recycle bin could hold would be 1GB. When the Recycle Bin reaches its limit,
Windows automatically starts deleting files from the Recycle bin, starting with the
oldest file.
You can adjust the properties for the Recycle Bin, so you could adjust its maximum
size from 10 percent of the hard drive to 5 percent, by right-clicking the Recycle Bin
and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
Usually its best to let Windows automatically handle the Recycle Bin, but you can
also manually empty the Recycle Bin if you need more free space on your computer.
7 7. . Double-click the Recycle Bin to open it.
The contents of the Recycle Bin appear.
8 8. . Click Empty the Recycle Bin from the Recycle Bin Tasks panel.
A dialog box may appear and ask you to confirm your deletion.
9 9. . Click Yes if asked to confirm the deletion(s).
All the files and folders are permanently deleted from your computer. Notice the
Recycle Bin icon no longer displays any trash, indicating that it is empty.
NOTE: Be careful when emptying the Recycle Bin. Since Windows automatically
erases the oldest files from the Recycle Bin, you shouldnt have to manually
empty the Recycle Bin much at all. A lot of users empty the Recycle Bin just
about every time they delete somethingand then later kick themselves
because they realize they needed the file they just permanently erased.
One final word about the Recycle Binany files you delete from a floppy disk are not placed
in the Recycle Bin. So be extra careful when youre deleting files from a floppy disk, because
the Recycle Bin wont be able to restore them.
Other Ways to Empty
the Recycle Bin:
Right-click the Recycle
Bin and select Empty
Recycle Bin from the
menu, as shown in
Figure 7-17.
188 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-9: A Closer Look at Files
and Folders
In this lesson, well take a break from all that pointing, clicking, dropping, and dragging and
take a closer look at files. When youre viewing the contents of your computer, youve
probably already noticed that everything has its own picture or icon to represent what it is.
Except for a few exceptions, folder icons always look like little manila folders ( ). Files, on
the other hand, come in a variety of types and icons.
There are two parts to every file: the file name, which youve already seen and are familiar
with; and the file extension, a three letter extension that tells Windows what type of file it is
(see Figure 7-19). Since Windows assigns pictures or icons to the types of files it recognizes,
it normally hides these file extensions from view. Whenever you open a file by double-
clicking it, Windows automatically opens the file in the program it knows created the file. For
example, Microsoft Word always adds the file extension DOC to its files, so when you
double-click a DOC file, Windows knows it has to open the file in Microsoft Word.
Another file and folder related term you might hear is path. A path is the drive and folder(s)
where a file or folder is locatedthink of it as a street address. A path contains the drive
letter, followed by a colon, followed by any folders (which must be separated by
backslashes \), and last comes the name of the file. For example C:\Program
Files\Accessories\WordPad.EXE (see Figure 7-21 for an illustration).
Figure 7-18
Files display different
types of icons to help you
identify what type of file
they are.
Figure 7-19
Every file has a three-
letter extension, which is
normally hidden from view,
so Windows knows what
type of file it is.
Figure 7-20
Files with their three-letter
file extensions displayed.
Figure 7-21
A files path name is
determined first by the
drive, then by the
folder(s), then by the file
name.
A root folder, or
directory, is the first
folder from which all
the other folders
branch. When you
double-click the C:
Hard Drive icon, the
window shows the
contents of the root
folder of the C drive.
Program Files
Stuff
Windows
Root Folder
(Hard Disk)
Figure 7-18
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-19
Letter to Sue.TXT
File Name
Can be up to 255
characters (although
older MS-DOS programs
will only see the first 8
characters, such as
Letter~1.txt).
File Extension
Usually hidden from
view, these three
characters tell Windows
what type of file it is and
what type of icon to
assign to it.
In the C: drive
In the Windows folder
In the Accessories folder
The WordPad.EXE file
The WordPad.EXE file is located in:
So its path name would be:
C:\Program Files\Accessories\WordPad.EXE
Figure 7-21
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 189
Your Organizations Name Here
Table 7-4: Common Files Types
File Description
MS-DOS Program
MS-DOS programs are written for an earlier, more primitive operating system
than Windows. MS-DOS programs dont have the fancy graphics, icons, and
features of more-advanced Windows programs. All Windows or DOS programs
have .EXE, or sometimes .COM, extensions. EXE stands for executable,
meaning the file is a program that will run or execute when you open it.
Unknown File Type
Windows doesnt know what type of file this is, so you cant readily open it by
double-clicking it. That doesnt mean the file isnt important its probably a very
important file for Windows or a program. Leave these files alone unless you
absolutely know what they are for.
Word Document
This is a document created in the word processing program, Microsoft Word.
Word documents normally have a .DOC extension.
Excel Workbook
This is a spreadsheet created with the program Microsoft Excel. Excel
spreadsheets normally have a .XLS extension.
Paint File (BMP)
This is a graphic file or picture, which was created in Paint or another graphics
program. These files are also sometimes referred to as bitmaps. The extension
for this particular type of graphic file is BMP or bitmap. There are also other
types of graphic files that use different extensions and icons.
JPEG File
Another very popular graphic file, most of the photographs you see on the
Internet are JPEGs.
Text File
Text or ASCII files are simple files that only contain text no formatting,
graphics, or any fancy stuff. Text files usually have a .TXT extension.

Shortcut File
Shortcut files point to files and folders elsewhere on your computer so that you
can quickly open that file, folder, or program without having to go to its actual
location. All of the Programs in the Start Menu and some of the items on your
desktop are actually shortcuts that point to the program files, located elsewhere
on your computer. Shortcuts only point to files or folders, so moving, renaming,
or deleting a shortcut does not affect the original program or file in any way. You
can tell the difference between a shortcut and original file because the shortcut
has an arrow ( ) in the lower left corner.
Setup Program File
Setup files are special executable (EXE) program files, except instead of
running a program when opened, they install software programs onto your
computer.
Since Windows assigns pictures to help you distinguish between the different types of files,
normally the three letter file extensions are hidden from view, but you can tell Windows to
display the extensionwell cover that when learn how to customize Windows.
190 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-10: Changing How
Information is Displayed
When you work with files and folders on your computer, you may find that you need to
change how you view information on the screen. This lesson will show you how to change the
appearance of items using one of four view modes: Thumbnails, Icons, Tiles, List, or Details.
Experiment to find the view that works best for you. Youll also learn how to change the order
in which files and folders are sorted. You can sort the contents files and folders by name, date
(when they were created), size, and type (what type of file they are).
1 1. . Click the Start button and select My Computer.
The My Computer window appears.
2 2. . Navigate to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk.
Windows normally displays items as icons by default.
3 3. . Verify that you are viewing your computers contents as icons by
selecting View Icons from the menu.
You can display more items in a window at a time by using List view. Try switching to
List view now.
4 4. . Select View List from the menu.
The items are displayed as small icons in a list. Details view displays information
about each item, including the name, size, type of item, and when it was created or last
modified.
5 5. . Select View Details from the menu.
You can sort items in a variety of ways: alphabetically by name, by size, or even by the
date they were last modified or saved. If youre in Details view, all you have to do to
sort the items is click the heading for the column you want to use.
6 6. . Click the Name heading to sort the items by name.
The list is sorted alphabetically by name. Clicking the heading again sorts the items in
reverse order (Z-A).
Figure 7-22
A bullet () appears next
to the current view. Here
the window is displayed in
Icons view.
Figure 7-23
The window displayed in
Details view
Start button
My Computer
Other Ways to Change
Views:
Select a view from the
View button list arrow
on the toolbar.
Figure 7-22
Figure 7-23 While in Details view, click the
column heading you want to use to
sort the items. Click the column
heading again to sort the items in
reverse order
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 191
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Change How Items are
Displayed:
Select View from the
menu bar and select from
one of the five view
modes (Thumbnails,
Tiles, Icons, List, or
Details).
Or
Select a view from the
View button list arrow
on the toolbar.
To Change How Items are
Sorted:
1. Follow the above step to
display the window in
Details View.
2. Click the column
heading you want to use
to sort the window. Click
the column heading again
to sort in reverse order.
To Automatically Arrange
Icons:
Select View Arrange
Icons by Auto
Arrange from the menu.
7 7. . Select View Icons from the menu.
You can have Windows arrange and organize items so they appear in neat columns and
rows, instead of a cluttered mess.
8 8. . Select View Arrange Icons by Auto Arrange from the menu.
A check mark (9) appears by Auto Arrange when this feature is on. (You can skip step
8 if Auto Arrange already has a check mark). Now, whenever you change the size of a
window, or add, move, or delete a file, Windows will automatically rearrange the
items.
9 9. . Select View Arrange Icons by Name from the menu.
The list is sorted alphabetically by name.
Table 7-5: Different Methods of Viewing Items
View Description
Icons
Files and folders are displayed as icons. This is a good view
for when youre learning how to use Windows or have
trouble clicking a file with the mouse.
Tiles
Files and folders are displayed as icons, but with more
information. The type and size of a file is displayed to the
right of the icon.
List
Files and folders are displayed as small icons in a list. This
is a great default view, because it allows you to see as
many files as possible.
Details
Displays information about every file and folder, such as its
name, size, type, and when it was last modified is
displayed. You can change the order the list is sorted by
clicking the column headings.
Thumbnails
Thumbnails view is useful if you are working with pictures
and graphics because it previews every graphic file instead
of only displaying an unhelpful file name.
192 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-11: Selecting Multiple
Files and Folders
By now, you know that you must select a file or folder before you can do something to it, such
as move or delete it. In this lesson, you will learn how to select more than one file and/or
folder at a time, so you can move, copy, or delete a group of files at the same time.
1 1. . Navigate to and open your Practice folder or floppy disk.
Again, you can use the following toolbar buttons to find your way around your
computer:
Address List: Click to list the drives on your
computer and the current folder, then select the drive and/or folder whose
contents you want to display.
Up One Level button: Click to move up one folder.
If necessary, follow your instructors directions to select the appropriate drive and
folder where your practice files are located.
First, lets review how to select a single file.
2 2. . Click the Paris file to select it.
The Paris file is highlighted, indicating that it is selected. Now you could delete, move,
or copy the Paris file. To deselect a file, just click in any empty area on the window.
Figure 7-24
To select several files that
are next to each other,
hold down the mouse
button and drag a
rectangle around the files
you want to select.
Figure 7-25
When you want to select a
group of consecutive files,
select the first file you
want to select, hold down
the <Shift> key and click
the last file.
Figure 7-26
Use the <Ctrl> key when
you want to select several
random files.
Press and hold
down the
<Ctrl> key
while you click
each file you
want to select.
Click the first
file you want to
select, press
and hold down
the <Shift> key
and click the
last file you
want to select.
1. Move the pointer to
an empty area in the
window.
2. Hold down the mouse button
and drag a rectangle around
the files you want to select.
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25 Figure 7-26
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 193
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Select Multiple Files:
If the files are next to
each other you can click
and drag a rectangle
around the files you want
to select.
Or
If the files are next to
each other you can click
the first file you want to
select, press and hold
down the <Shift> key and
click the last file you want
to select.
If the files arent next to
each other you can select
random files by holding
the <Ctrl> key and
clicking the files you want
to select.
3 3. . Click any empty area of the window to deselect the Paris file.
The Paris file is no longer selected.
You can select more than one file or folder at a time, so you can delete, move, or copy
a whole bunch of files at once. Like so many Windows functions, there are several
methods to select multiple files. If the files you want to select are next to each other,
you can move mouse pointer to empty area on the screen, hold down the mouse button
and drag a rectangle around the files you want to select, as shown in Figure 7-24.
4 4. . Move the pointer to any empty area in the folder window, click and hold
down the mouse button, and drag a rectangle around several files, as
shown in Figure 7-24.
The only problem with this method is that it only works when you want to select files
that are next to each other.
5 5. . Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the files.
Another method of selecting adjacent files and folders is to click the first file you want
to select, hold down the <Shift> key as you click the last file of the group of files you
want to select.
6 6. . Click the Carbrake file to select it, press and hold the <Shift> key as you
click the Paris file.
Youve selected the Carbrake file, the Paris file, and all the files that are in between the
two.
7 7. . Click any empty area of the screen to deselect the files.
To select random, or non-adjacent files and folders, hold down the <Ctrl> key, and then
click each item you want to select.
8 8. . Click the Carbrake file to select it, press and hold down the <Ctrl> key,
click Paris file, and the Trade Show folder, then release the <Ctrl> key.
Remember, you can move, copy, or delete any selected files all at once. Holding down
the <Ctrl> key also lets you click and deselect any selected files.
9 9. . With the files still selected, click and drag one of the selected files (the
Carbrake, or Paris files, or the Trade Show folder) from the folder
window to the desktop.
The selected files are copied to the desktop.
1 10 0. . With the newly copied files still selected on the desktop, press the
<Delete> key.
The selected files are all deleted from the desktop.
To select all the files and folders in the window, select Edit Select All from the
menu.
1 11 1. . Select Edit Select All from the menu.
All the files in the window are selected.
1 12 2. . Close the window to end this lesson.
Other Ways to move or
copy a file:
Click the file to select it,
click Edit, and select
Move to or Copy to from
the menu.
Or
Right-click the file and
select where you want
to copy the file from the
shortcut menu.
194 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-12: Finding a File Using
the Search Companion
Its just as easy to misplace and lose a file in your computer as it is to misplace your car
keysmaybe easier! Luckily, Microsoft has simplified the search process by introducing the
Search Companion to Windows XP. A cousin of the Office Assistant, the Search Companion
helps you organize your search by asking certain questions, such as what you want to search
for (i.e. picture or file), which drive to search in, and the file name.
The Search Companion can search for files even when you cant remember the exact file
name or location.
You can search for a file by:
The file name or any part of the file name
The date the file was created or modified
The type of file, such as a Microsoft Word document or graphic file
The text within the file
The size of the file
You can set one or several of these criterions to search for a file.
1 1. . Click the Start menu and select Search.
The Search window appears with the Search Companion in the blue side panel, as
shown in Figure 7-27.
The Search Companion will ask you different questions to help you with your search.
For now, lets search for a music file.
2 2. . Click Pictures, music, or video.
The Search for all files of a certain type, or search by type and name dialog box
appears.
Figure 7-27
The Search Companion
guides your search by
asking questions about
your search.
Figure 7-28
Beginning a music file
search
Figure 7-29
The search results window
The Search
Command
3. Finish the search, or refine
the search for better results
Figure 7-27
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
2. Enter information
about the file youre
searching for
1. Choose the category
that describes what
youre searching for
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 195
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
Use the Search
Companion to Find a File:
1. Select Search from the
Start menu.
2. Click the type of file you
want to search for.
3. Enter part of the file name
or text within the file. You
can also search for files
using the drop-down lists
at the bottom of the dialog
box.
4. Click Search to start
searching for the file(s).
3 3. . Check the Music box, type David Byrne in the text field as shown in
Figure 7-28, and click Search.
The Search Companion begins searching for the file, and displays the names and
locations of all the files it finds that have the words David Byrne in their names. You
can open any of these files by double-clicking them.
4 4. . Double-click the music file.
The music file begins playing in the Windows Media program.
5 5. . Close the Windows Media program.
If you dont quite remember the file name, you can always search by when you last
modified the file, or by the size of the file. We wont do a search using these criterion
right now, but we can at least go ahead and get to know where they are a little better.
6 6. . To start a new search, click the Search button on the toolbar.
The first Search Companion dialog box reappears.
7 7. . Click the All Files and Folders option.
A dialog box appears, giving options to search by file name, text within the file,
location of the file, when it was last modified, size of the file, and other advanced
search options to choose from.
8 8. . Type Practice folder in the search options dialog box, and click
Search.
The Search Companion searches for folder, and displays all finds in the results
window.
9 9. . Close the Search Results window.
Table 7-6: Search Options
Search For Description
Pictures, music, or
video
Search for pictures and digital photos (.jpg, .gif, and .bmp) files,
music (.mp3) files, and digital video (.avi and mpeg) files.
Documents (word
processing,
spreadsheet, etc.)
Search for files created with a program, such as Microsoft Access (.mdb),
Microsoft Excel (.xls), Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt), Microsoft Word (.doc), or
Notepad (.txt)
All files and folders Search for all types of files and folders.
Computer or people Search for computers on your network or the name of a person in your
address book.
Information in Help
and Support Center
Search for information in Microsoft Windows XPs built-in Help system.
Search the Internet Search the Internet for information on a key word or phrase.
Change Preferences Change your search preferences, such as if you want to display an animated
character or if you want to use advanced search options.
Search button
Search Options
196 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-13: Using the Folders
Pane (Windows Explorer)
If you have been following the lessons in this chapter and havent been skipping ahead, by
now you should know just about everything there is to know about file management. You
learned that you can use the My Computer program to view the contents of your drives, and
how to create, open, rename, copy, move, and delete files and folders.
This lesson introduces the folders pane (Windows Explorer), which you can use to view and
work with the contents of your computer. The folders pane lets you see the organization of all
the folders on your computer, as shown in Figure 7-30. The folder pane is especially useful
for when you want to copy and move filesyou can drag the files from the left pane to the
appropriate folder in the right pane. To view the folders pane, simply click the Folders button
from anywhere in My Computer.
If youre a Windows 95, 98, or NT user, the folder pane replaces Windows Explorer; click the
Folders button anytime you want to view or work with the folders on your computer.
1 1. . Click My Computer from the Start menu.
The familiar My Computer window appears. In Windows XP you can view the My
Computer folders pane at any timeall you have to do is click the Folders button on
the toolbar.
2 2. . Click the Folders button on the toolbar
The Windows Explorer folder pane appears. The drives and folders in the right pane of
the window are the contents of your computer. You can see whats in a drive or folder
by clicking it in the left Folders pane.
Figure 7-30
The Windows Explorer
window
A plus symbol ( ) next
to a folder indicates
that all the subfolders
it contains are hidden.
Click the plus symbol
to display the hidden
subfolders.
A minus symbol ( )
next to a folder
indicates that all the
subfolders it contains
are displayed. Click
the minus symbol to
collapse or hide the
subfolders.
The left pane displays
the folders and drives
on your computer
The right pane displays the contents of
the folder or drive you selected. This pane
works just like My Computer
To display the contents of
a folder or drive, click the
name of the folder or
drive
Figure 7-30
Click the Folders button
to display/hide the
Folders pane
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 197
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Display the Folders
Pane (Windows Explorer):
Open My Computer and
click the Folders button
on the toolbar.
To View the Contents of a
Drive or Folder:
Click the drive or folder in
the left folder panethe
contents of that drive or
folder will appear in the
right pane.
To Display or Hide a Drive
or Folders Subfolders:
Click plus symbol ( ) to
display any hidden
subfolders, click the
minus symbol ( ) to hide
any subfolders.
To Adjust the Size of
Windows Explorers
Panes:
Drag the bar separating
the two panes to the right
or left.
3 3. . Click My Documents in the left pane of the Explorer window.
Explorer displays the contents of My Documents in the right pane of the window, as
shown in Figure 7-30. Move on to the next step and well look at the contents of the
hard drive.
4 4. . Click the Local Disk (C:) in the left pane of the Explorer window.
Explorer displays the contents of the hard drive in the right pane of the window. The
left pane of Windows Explorer displays the drives and folders in a hierarchical view. A
plus symbol or a minus symbol beside a folder means a folder contains several
subfolders. Normally these subfolders are hidden. You can display the hidden folders
within a folder by clicking the plus sign beside the folder.
5 5. . Click the plus symbol beside the Windows folder.
The Windows folder expands and displays all the folders within it. The plus symbol
changes to a minus symbol, indicating the folder is expanded and is displaying all the
folders within it. Notice some of the Windows subfolders also have pluses by them,
indicating that they contain several subfolders.
6 6. . Click the Windows folder in the left pane of the Explorer window to
select it.
The contents of the Windows folder appear in the right pane of the Explorer window.
Notice the subfolders in the Windows folder are displayed in both the left and right
panes.
You can collapse or hide folders to reduce the amount of information that is on the
screen. To collapse a folder, click the minus sign beside the folder.
7 7. . Click the minus symbol beside the Windows folder.
The Windows folder collapses all its subfolders are hidden from view. The minus
symbol changes to a plus symbol, indicating that all the subfolders in the Windows
folder are hidden from view.
You can adjust the size of either pane of the window.
8 8. . Position the mouse over the bar separating the two sides of the window
until the pointer changes to a , then drag the bar to the right or left
about a half-inch.
Just like in My Computer, you can change how information is displayed by using the
View menu.
9 9. . Select View Icons from the menu.
The contents in the right pane of Explorer are displayed in Icon View.
1 10 0. . Select View List from the menu.
The contents in the right pane of Explorer are displayed in List View.
Its important to remember that the right pane is still My Computer, so the procedures for
creating, opening, renaming, moving, copying, and deleting files and folders are exactly the
same.
If there isnt a symbol
next to a folder, the
folder does not
contain any subfolders,
although it may still
contain files.
The mouse pointer
changes shapes over a
border.
198 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 7-14: File Management
Using the Folders Pane
In this lesson, youll learn how to perform basic file management in the folders pane.
Specifically, youll move a file and create a new folder. Again, although the folders pane
looks a little different than the rest of the My Computer screen, all the file management
procedures youve learned work exactly the same. If youve followed the other lessons, this
should be one of the easiest lessons in the chapter.
1 1. . Make sure My Computer is open with the Folders pane displayed.
Remember that all you have to do to view the Folders pane is click the Folders button
on the toolbar.
2 2. . Click the Local Disk (C:) drive icon in the left Folders pane.
The contents of the (C:) drive appear in the right pane of My Computer, and it expands
in the left pane to show its subfolders.
3 3. . Click the plus symbol beside the Practice folder to display its contents.
The folder expands and displays all the files inside it, and the plus symbol ( ) changes
to a minus symbol. Since you can see all the files in the right pane, its much easier to
move and copy files and folders.
4 4. . Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you click and drag the Open Me file to
the Accounting folder, as shown in Figure 7-31.
It doesnt matter if you drag and drop the Open Me file to the Accounting folder in the
left pane or the right panetheyre both the same folder. The Open Me file is copied to
the Accounting folder. Move on to the next step and lets see if you can create a new
folder while the Folders pane is displayed.
5 5. . Create a new folder named 2002 in the root directory of the (C:) drive.
Need a refresher on how to create a folder? First you need to click the (C:) drive in the
left folder pane to select it and display its contents in the right pane. Next, click Make a
new folder from the File and Folder Tasks menu in the blue side bar, type 2002, and
press <Enter>.
Figure 7-31
You can move and copy
files using drag and drop
in Windows Explorer.
Figure 7-31
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 199
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Open a File or Folder:
Double-click the file or
folder.
To Move a File or Folder:
Drag the file or folder to
the desired location in
either pane of the window.
To Copy a File or Folder:
Hold down the <Ctrl> key
while you drag the file or
folder to the desired
location in either pane of
the window.
To Create a New Folder:
1. Click the disk or folder
where you want to put the
new folder.
2. Click Make a new folder
in the File and Folder
Tasks menu.
3. Type a name for the
folder and press <Enter>.
To Delete a File or Folder:
Select the file or folder
and press the <Delete>
key. Click Yes to confirm
the deletion.
To Rename a File or
Folder:
Right-click the file or
folder, select Rename
from the shortcut menu,
type the new name and
press <Enter>.
6 6. . Move the 2002 folder in the root directory of the (C:) drive to the
Accounting folder by dragging the 2002 folder from the right pane to
the Accounting folder in the left pane.
Verify that the 2002 folder was moved inside the Accounting folder.
7 7. . Click the plus symbol beside the Accounting folder to display the files
in the Accounting folder.
The Accounting folder expands and displays all the folders inside it. Try deleting a
folder using Windows Exploreryou already know the technique.
8 8. . Click the 2001 folder to select it, press the <Delete> key, and then
confirm the deletion.
It doesnt matter if you use the left or right pane to select a foldertheyre the same
folder, and you can rename, copy, move, and delete folders in either pane of the
window.
9 9. . Close the My Computer window to end this lesson.
Congratulations! Youve just about completed what is probably the most difficult chapter in
the book. Move on to the review sections and see how much youve learned.
200 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Chapter Seven Review
Lesson Summary
Understanding Storage Devices, Folders, and Files
Computers store information using files and folders, on disks drives, just like you store information
in a file cabinet.
Know the following memory terminology:
Term Size
Byte A single character such as the letter j or number 8.
Kilobyte (K or KB) 1,024 bytes a typed page.
Megabyte (MB or MEG) 1,048,578 bytes a novel.
Gigabyte (GB or GIG) Several encyclopedia sets.
Using My Computer to See Whats in Your Computer
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows Desktop displays the contents of your
computer.
Double-click a disk drive in the My Computer window to display the disk drives contents.
To View the Properties of Something: Right-click the object and select Properties from the
shortcut menu. For example, right-clicking a hard drive and selecting Properties from the shortcut
menu would display how much space is left on the hard disk.
Opening a Folder
Double-click a folder to open it and display its contents.
To Move Back or Up to the Previous Level or Folder: Click the Up button on the toolbar, click
the Back button on the toolbar, or click the Address Bar on the toolbar and select the appropriate
drive or folder.
Creating and Renaming a Folder
To Create a New Folder: Open the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder. Select
Make a new folder task from the File and Folder Tasks panel, or, right-click any empty area in
the window and select New Folder from the shortcut menu, or select File New Folder
from the menu. Type a name for the folder and press <Enter>.
To Rename a Folder: Click the folder to select it, select Rename this folder from the Files
and Folders Tasks panel, type a name for the folder and press <Enter>.You can also rename a
folder by clicking the folder to select it, selecting File Rename from the menu, typing a name for
the folder and pressing <Enter>.
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 201
Your Organizations Name Here
Copying, Moving, and Deleting a Folder
Move a Folder (Drag and Drop Method): Move a folder by dragging it to the desired location,
such as another folder or on the desktop (you might have to open another My Computer window if
you want to copy it to another folder).
Move a Folder: Click the folder to select it and click Move this folder from the File and Folder
Tasks menu, select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK.
Copy a Folder (Drag and Drop Method): Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the folder to
the desired location (you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to
another folder).
Copy a Folder: Click the folder to select it, click Copy this folder from the File and Folder
Tasks menu, select the folder or disk where you want to move the folder and click OK.
To Delete a Folder: Select the folder and press the <Delete> key. Click Yes to confirm the folder
deletion.
Opening, Renaming, and Deleting a File
Double-click a file to open the file in the program that created it.
To Rename a File: Click the file to select it, select Rename this file from the Files and Folders
Tasks panel, enter the files new name and press <Enter>. Or, right-click the file, select Rename
from the shortcut menu, type a name for the folder and press <Enter>. You can also rename a file
by clicking the file to select it, selecting File Rename from the menu, typing a name for the
folder and pressing <Enter>.
Copying and Moving a File
You can copy and move files the same as you copy and move folders.
Move a File: Click the file to select it and click Move this file from the File and Folder Tasks
menu, select the folder or disk where you want to move the file and click OK.
Copy a File (Drag and Drop Method): Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the file to the
desired location (you might have to open another My Computer window if you want to copy it to
another folder).
Copy a File: Click the file to select it, click Copy this file from the File and Folder Tasks menu,
select the folder or disk where you want to move the file and click OK.
To Copy a File or Folder to a Floppy Disk: Right-click the file or folder and select Send To
3 Floppy (A:) from the shortcut menu.
Restoring a Deleted File and Emptying the Recycle Bin
To Restore a Deleted File: Double-click the Recycle Bin to open it. Click the file to select it and
click Restore this file from the Recycle Bin Tasks menu. Or, right-click the deleted file and
select Restore from the shortcut menu.
To Empty the Recycle Bin: Right-click the Recycle Bin and select Empty Recycle Bin from the
shortcut menu.
A Closer Look at Files and Folders
There are two parts to a file: the file name, which can be up to 255 characters and the file
extension, which is three characters long and tells Windows what type of file it is.
202 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Changing how Information is Displayed
To Change How Items are Displayed: Select View from the menu and select one of the five view
modes or select a view from the View button list arrow on the toolbar.
The five view modes are Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List, and Details.
Selecting Multiple Files and Folders
By selecting multiple files and folders you can move, copy, or delete a group of files and folders all
at once.
If the files are next to each other you can click and drag a rectangle around the files you want to
select.
If the files are next to each other you can click the first file you want to select, press and hold down
the <Shift> key, and click the last file you want to select.
If the files arent next to each other you can select random files by holding the <Ctrl> key and
clicking the files you want to select.
Finding a File Using the Search Companion
To Find a File: Click the Start button and select Search from the Start menu. Use the Search
Companion to enter information (file name, size, type, text within the file, date it was last modified,
etc.) about the file youre searching for.
Using the Folders Pane (Windows Explorer)
The folders pane lets you view and manage the contents of your computer. This was a separate
program called Explorer in previous versions of Windows.
To Display the Folders Pane: Open My Computer and click the Folders button on the toolbar.
A plus symbol ( ) next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains are hidden. Click the
plus symbol to display the hidden subfolders.
A minus symbol ( ) next to a folder indicates that all the subfolders it contains are displayed. Click
the minus symbol to collapse or hide the subfolders.
No symbol next to a folder indicates that the folder does not contain any subfolders, although it
may still contain files.
To View the Contents of a Drive or Folder: Click the drive or folder in the left folder panethe
contents of that drive or folder will appear in the right pane.
To Adjust the Size of Windows Explorers Panes: Drag the bar separating the two panes to the
right or left.
File Management Using the Folders Pane
To Open a File or Folder: Double-click the file or folder.
To Move a File or Folder: Drag the file or folder to the desired location in either pane of the
window.
To Copy a File or Folder: Hold down the <Ctrl> key while you drag the file or folder to the desired
location in either pane of the window.
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 203
Your Organizations Name Here
To Create a New Folder: Click the disk or folder where you want to put the new folder, right-click
any empty area in the window and select New Folder from the shortcut menu. Type a name for
the folder and press <Enter>.
To Delete a File or Folder: Right-click the file or folder, select Delete from the shortcut menu, type
the new name and press Yes.
Quiz
1. Computers store information on which types of disks? (Select all that
apply.)
A. Floppy disks.
B. Hard disks.
C. Compact discs (CD-ROMs).
D. Removable disks.
2. Drives are named with one letter. Most computers have a floppy disk called
(A:) and a hard disk called (C:). (True or False?)
3. The purpose of your computers folders is to: (Select all that apply).
A. Lose your important files.
B. Store related files and programs in the same place.
C. Make it difficult to delete things unless you really know what youre doing.
D. Organize related files and information on your computer.
4. .TXT, .DOC, and .BMP these are all examples of:
A. Three meaningless letters with a period in front of them.
B. File extensions.
C. Types of advanced degrees in computers.
D. How confusing computers are.
5. Which program(s) can you use to view and manage the contents of your
computer? (Select all that apply.)
A. Netscape Navigator.
B. My Computer.
C. System Sleuth.
D. Windows Explorer.
6. You open a file or folder by double-clicking it. (True or False?)
7. Do this to display the contents of a certain drive or folder:
A. Right-click the drive or folder.
B. Click the drive or folder while holding down the <Alt> key.
C. Double-click the drive or folder.
D. Triple-click the drive or folder.
204 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
8. To view an objects properties, right-click the object and select Properties
from the shortcut menu. (True or False?)
9. When youre browsing the contents of your computer, do this to move back
or up to the previous level or folder. (Select all that apply.)
A. Click the Up button on the toolbar.
B. Click the Back button on the toolbar.
C. Press <Ctrl> + <Z>.
D. Click the Address Bar on the toolbar and select the appropriate drive or folder.
10. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. You can move a file or folder to a new location by dragging and dropping it.
B. You can rename a file or folder by right-clicking it, selecting Rename from the
shortcut menu, typing the new name and pressing <Enter>.
C. A plus symbol ( ) next to a folder in Windows Explorer indicates the folder is
locked and cannot be modified or deleted.
D. Holding down the <Ctrl> key while youre dragging and dropping something copies
it instead of moving it.
11. Delete a file or folder by clicking it, pressing the <Delete> key, and
confirming the deletion. (True or False?)
12. Do this to select multiple files and folders: (Select all that apply.)
A. Click and drag a rectangle around any adjacent files you want to select.
B. Select File Select Multiple Files from the menu, and then click the files you want
to select.
C. Click the first file you want to select, press and hold down the <Shift> key and click
the last file you want to select.
D. Hold down the <Ctrl> key and click the files you want to select.
13. Which of the following statements is NOT true? (Select all that apply.)
A. You can find a file on your computer by clicking the Start button, selecting Search,
enter what you want to search for using the Search Companion and click Search.
B. Open Windows Explorer by clicking the Start button and selecting All Programs
Windows Explorer.
C. To save a file in a location other than the programs default folder you have to save
the file, then use My Computer or Windows Explorer to move the file to the desired
location.
D. You can display the contents of a drive or folder using Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List,
or Details View.
14. The three-letter extension of a file is normally displayed in Windows XP.
(True or False?)
Homework
1. Open My Computer.
2. View the contents of your Local Disk (C:).
3. Create a new folder in the root directory of your Local Disk (C:).
Chapter Seven: Working with Files and Folders 205
Your Organizations Name Here
4. Name the new folder Project Files.
5. Insert a floppy disk in the (A:) drive and copy the Project Files folder there.
6. Delete the Project Files folder from the (C:) drive.
7. Open the Recycle Bin and find the deleted Project Files folder. Do you know how to
retrieve it?
8. Open Windows Explorer and view the contents of the (A:) drive.
9. Use the Windows Explorer View menu to display the contents of the (A:) drive in
List view.
10. While you're still in List view, sort the files in alphabetical order.
11. Use the Start menu's Search feature to find all the files named "readme.txt" on your
(C:) drive. Open one of these files by double-clicking it.
Quiz Answers
1. A, B, C, and D. Computers can store their information on any of these disk types.
2. True.
3. B and D.
4. B. File extensions, which are used to identify the file type.
5. B and D. My Computer and Windows Explorer both display the contents of your
computer and allow you to manage your computers files and folders.
6. True. Double-clicking a file or folder opens it.
7. C. Double-click a folder to open it and display its contents.
8. True. Right-clicking an object and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu
displays the properties of the object.
9. A, B, and D. Any of these will bring you back to the previous level or folder.
10. C. A plus symbol ( ) next to a folder in Windows Explorer means the folder
contains subfolders.
11. True.
12. A, C, and D. You can use any of these methods to select multiple files and folders.
13. C. You can easily save a file in a different location by opening the drive and/or folder
where you want to save the file and clicking Save.
14. False. File extensions are normally hidden in Windows XP.
Chapter Eight:
Exploring the
Internet
Chapter Objectives:
Understand and connect to the Internet
Find a specific Web page
Browse and search the Web
Add Web pages to Favorites
Change your Home page
Display a history of visited Web pages
Download pictures and software
Use e-mail
Unless youve been living on a deserted island for the past five years, you already know that
the Internet is the biggest thing to happen to computers since well, computers! You cant
ignore itthe Internet is not going away and its already changing the world we live in.
Fortunately, for the most part, the Internet is incredibly easy to use. Even the most
computer-phobic users seem to feel right at home on the Internet.
This chapter explains the ins and outs of the Internet. If youve ever spent a sleepless night
wondering exactly what the Internet is and how it got started, youll finally learn it all. Then
youll learn how to get your computer connected to the Internet and how to surf the Web
using the Windows XP Internet Explorer. Youll also learn some useful tips like how to search
for information, how to save your favorite Web pages so that you can easily come back to
them later, and how to change the Web page that first appears when you connect to the
Internet. Finally, youll learn how to download software, and send and receive e-mail.
; Prerequisites
How to use the mouse
to click, double-click,
drop-and-drag, and
right-click
How to start programs
in the Start Menu
How to use menus,
toolbars, and dialog
boxes
208 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-1: Introduction to the
Internet
The Internet is the largest computer network in the world. It consists of millions of computers
all over the planet, all connected to each another.
The Internet was born in the 1960s when the United States military worried that a nuclear
bomb could destroy its computer systems (there werent many of them back then). So it
placed several computers far apart from each other and connected them with some super-fast
telephone lines so that the computers could talk to each other. If a nuclear bomb blew up one
computer, another computer could instantly take over; thus, the computer network wouldnt
go down. Years passed and other organizations, such as colleges and universities, started
connecting their computers to this growing network to share information.
Although the Internet has been around a long time, it wasnt until the 1990s that someone
thought of a wonderful idea called the World Wide Web. The World Wide Web is what you
probably think of when you think of the Internet, although its really just a part of the Internet.
The Web consists of millions of documents that are stored on hundreds of thousands of
computers that are always connected to the Internet. These documents are called Web pages,
and you can find Web pages on every subject imaginablefrom your local newspaper to
online catalogs to airline schedules, and much, much more.
Web pages are stored on Web servers. A Web server is a computer, not unlike your own
computer, only bigger and faster. There are hundreds of thousands of Web servers located all
over the world. Web servers are always connected to the Internet so that people can view their
Web pages 24 hours a day.
So what can you do once youre connected to the Internet? Plenty. Error! Reference source
not found. shows just a few of the many things there are to do on the Internet.
Figure 8-1
The Internet is the largest
network in the world,
consisting of millions of
computers, all over the
world, all connected
together.
Figure 8-2
Web pages are stored on
Web serverscomputers
that are permanently
connected to the Internet.
WWW
Amazon
WWW
Error! Reference
Error! Reference
Headlines
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 209
Your Organizations Name Here
Table 8-1: What Can I do on the Internet?
Task Description
Send and Receive
E-mail
Exchanging electronic mail (or e-mail) is the most used and most popular
feature on the Internet. Just like regular paper mail, you can send and
receive e-mail with people around the world, as long as they have access
to a computer and the Internet. Unlike regular paper mail, e-mail is usually
delivered to its destination almost instantly.
Browse the World Wide
Web
The World Wide Web is what most people think of when then think of the
Internetalthough its really only a part of the Internet. The World Wide
Web is an enormous collection of interconnected documents stored on
Web servers all over the world. The World Wide Web has information on
every subject imaginable.
Join online discussions
with newsgroups
Newsgroups are discussion groups on the Internet that you can join to read
and post messages to and from people with similar interests. There are
thousands of newsgroups on topics such as computers, education,
romance, hobbies, politics, religion, and more.
Chat with other online
users
Chatting lets you communicate with people on the Internet instantlyno
matter how far away they are! Most chats are text-based, meaning you
have to type when you converse with people on the Internet. A growing
number of chats have voice and even video capabilitiesall without having
to pay long distance changes.
Download software You can download pictures, demo programs, patches and drivers for your
computer, and many other types of files and save them to your computer.
Listen to music and
watch videos
You can listen to sound on the Web, such as radio stations, or music by
your favorite artists.
210 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-2: Connecting to the
Internet
There are three things youll need to connect to the Internet:
An Internet Service Provider (ISP): An Internet Service Provider is a lot like a
phone company, except instead of letting you make telephone calls to other people, an
Internet Service Provider lets your computer connect to the Internet. Just like your
telephone company, Internet Service Providers charge for their services currently the
average rate seems to be about $20 a month for unlimited usage. Youve probably already
heard of the most famous Internet Service ProviderAmerica Online, or AOL.
A Web Browser: A Web browser is a program that lets your computer view and
navigate the World Wide Web. One of the biggest improvements in Windows XP is that it
comes with a built-in Web browserInternet Explorer. Another Web browsing program
that is very popular is Netscape Navigator.
Figure 8-3
Microsofts Internet
Connection Wizard will set
you up with an Internet
Service Provider.
Figure 8-4
The Dial-up Connection
dialog box
Figure 8-5
The Internet Start Web
page
Internet Explorer
Other Ways to Open
Internet Explorer:
Click the icon on
the Windows Quick
Launch toolbar.
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 211
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Connect to the
Internet:
1. Double-click the
Internet Explorer
icon on the desktop.
Or
Click the Internet
Explorer icon on the
Quick Launch toolbar.
2. If necessary, enter your
user name and password
and click Connect.
A Phone Line and Modem or Other Connection: A modem is your computers
very own telephone that lets it talk to other computers over the telephone line. Your
existing phone line will work just fine with your modem, although it will be tied up
whenever youre connected to the Internet. If you or someone in your home is a heavy
Internet user, you might consider getting a second phone line for your computer. If you
have the Internet at work, you might have a network connection to the Internet, which is
much, much faster than a modem and is connected to the Internet 24 hours a day.
1 1. . Double-click the Start menu and then click Internet Explorer to start
Internet Explorer.
If you have America Online, you would double-click the America Online icon, instead.
If youre already set up with an Internet provider, the Dial-up Connection dialog box
appears, as shown in Figure 8-4.
If this is the first time youve ever tried connecting to the Internet, you may be greeted
by the Internet Connection Wizard, as shown in Figure 8-3. Microsoft included the
Internet Connection Wizard to help you get connected to the Internet and find an
Internet Service Provider. If you want, you can follow the step-by-step instructions and
let the Internet Connection Wizard help find you a Internet Service Provideror you
can find your own. Ask a computer-savvy friend or an employee at a local computer
store for the name and number of a local Internet Service Provider. Once you are set up
with an Internet Service Provider, come back finish the rest of this lesson.
2 2. . Enter your User name and Password, if necessary, and click Connect.
If you have previously entered your user name and password and checked the Save
password option, the user name and password characters will already appear in their
respective text boxes. (Your password will appear masked by asterisks.)
If you listen to your computer, you should hear a dial tone, then your modem dial the
phone, and finally a screeching sound as your ISP answers the phone.
NOTE: If youre connected to the Internet through a network at work, an ISDN or
DSL line, or a cable modem, you wont hear anything at all, since these are all
digital connections. Actually, it would probably pay off if you checked if the
Internet is available in your area by cable or DSL connections. If it is, its
probably worth the extra ten or twenty dollars a month to get a connection to
the Internet that is at least ten times faster than a standard phone connection.
Plus, you dont have to worry about people getting busy signals when youre
using the Internet.
After a connection to the Internet has been established, Internet Explorer appears on
screen and displays your home page.
A home page is the page your Web browser displays when it connects to the Internet. The
default start page for Microsoft Internet Explorer is Microsofts start page (what else did you
think it would be?), but you can easily change your default start pagemore about that in
another lesson.
This icon appears on
the taskbar whenever
your computer is
connected to the
Internet via modem.
Point to the icon and
wait a few seconds to
see what your
connection speed to
the Internet is.
212 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-3: Displaying a Specific
Web Page

Web addresses are everywhereon television advertisements, in magazine and newspaper
articles, and even on business cards. These www.something.coms youve seen and heard so
much about are URLs (if you really want to know, URL stands for Uniform Resource
Locator). Just like there is a house, office, or building behind a postal address, there is a Web
page behind every Web address. Unlike postal addresses, through the magic of technology,
you can arrive instantly at a Web page by typing its Web address, or URL, into your Web
browser. Well, hopefully instantly if youve already been on the Internet for any amount of
time, you probably know that sometimes the Internet gets busy and net congestion can cause a
Web page to come up slowlyif at all! This lesson will show you how to visit the Web sites
behind all the Web addresses youve seen.
Figure 8-6
The Microsoft Web site.
Figure 8-7
When a Web page is
currently unavailable, this
screen is displayed in
Internet Explorer.
Other Ways to Enter an
Internet Address:
Press <Ctrl> <L>.
Address bar
Type the address of the Web
page you want to view here
and press <Enter>.
Figure 8-6
Figure 8-7
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 213
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Display a Specific Web
Page:
Type the Web address in
the
Address bar and press
<Enter>.
Or
Press Ctrl <L>, type
the Web address, and
press OK.
1 1. . Connect to the Internet.
It doesnt matter where you are on the Internetyou can always enter a Web address.
2 2. . Click the words in the Address bar.
The text in the Address bar becomes highlighted.
3 3. . Type the address of the Web page you want to view; in our example well
use www.microsoft.com and press <Enter>.
Web addresses are preceded by http://. For example, the address we want is
http://www.startribune.com. Technically, you dont need to add the http:// before typing
the Web addresssave yourself some time and leave it out.
NOTE: If you forget the www in front of a Web address or a .com an Internet
Explorer called IntelliSense attempts to correct the Web address by adding
the www or .com for you. Sometimes it works, sometimes it doesnt.
After a moment, youre connected to the Minneapolis Star Tribune Web site, as shown
in Figure 8-7 (though hopefully your headlines wont be as out-of-date!). Lets try
going to another Web site.
4 4. . Type www.yahoo.com in the Address bar and press <Enter>.
Possibly the most famous Web site on the Internet, the Yahoo home page, appears.
Sometimes when youre browsing the Web, youll see a screen like one in Figure 8-6. This
means the Web site is unavailable. Several things can cause a Web page not to load:
The computer where the Web page is stored is down.
Too many users are trying to view the same Web page at the same time.
Youve lost your connection to the Internet.
The Web page no longer exists, or maybe it never existed in the first place (did you type
in the correct Web address?).
For all these cases, try going to the Web site again later. Whatever was causing the problem
might be fixed a few minutes or hours later.
You can leave off the
http:// when you type
a Web page address.
For example, type
www.nbc.com instead
of
http://www.nbc.com.
Address Bar
214 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-4: Browse the Web
Luckily, the World Wide Web is remarkably easy to navigate. Its so easy, in fact, that most
users seem to have an uncanny ability to browse through Web pages without any previous
trainingeven if they have difficulty with other computer programs. This chapter explains
how to find your way through the millions of Web pages that are on the Internet. Even if you
already think you have browsing down, you should read this chapteryou might learn a trick
or two you didnt know.
1 1. . Make sure your Web browser is open so that youre connected to the
Internet.
Hopefully you know how to do this by now!
2 2. . Go to the Yahoo home page by clicking the Address bar, typing
www.yahoo.com, and pressing <Enter>.
The Yahoo home page fills the screen. Many of the underlined words and pictures you
see on the Yahoo page are actually hyperlinks. When you position the pointer over a
hyperlink, it changes to a . Clicking a hyperlink will automatically:
Take you to a different page within the same Web site.
Take you to a different page in a different Web site.
Take you to a different part of the same Web site.
Figure 8-8
The Internet Explorer
toolbar
Figure 8-9
The Yahoo home page
Back button
Tip: Instead of
repeatedly clicking the
Back and Forward
buttons, you can click
their down arrows to
display a list of
previous Web pages.
Brings you back to
the previously
viewed Web page
Brings you forward
to the next viewed
Web page
Stops loading
a Web page
Reloads or
refreshes the
current Web
page
Brings you to
your home
page
Search the
Web for
specified
information
Shows your favorite
Web pages that
you bookmarked
Find Web
pages
you've
recently
visited
Prints the
current Web
page
Opens your
e-mail program
Figure 8-8
Figure 8-9
Click the to display a list of Web
sites that you have typed in.
Brings
you to
your
media
folders
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 215
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Use a Hyperlink:
Click the hyperlink with
the pointer.
To Go Back to the
Previous Page:
Click the Back button on
the toolbar.
To Stop the Transfer of
Information:
Click the Stop button on
the toolbar.
To Refresh a Web Page:
Click the Refresh button
on the toolbar.
To Return to a Web
Address you Typed in the
Address Bar:
Click Address bars
arrow and select the
Web address.
Allow you to download a file.
Send an e-mail to a specified e-mail address.
Play a video or sound.
3 3. . Position the pointer over the Whats New icon near the top of the Yahoo
page.
The pointer changes into a anytime it is over a link. Remember, links can be either
text or pictures.
4 4. . Click the Whats New icon or text.
The Whats New Web page connected to the link appears. Notice the address bar
displays the address of the new Web page, http://www.yahoo.com/new/. You can easily
move back to the previous Web page.
5 5. . Click the Back button on the toolbar.
Youre back at the Yahoo home page. The Forward button moves forward through the
Web pages you have viewed.
6 6. . Click the Forward button on the toolbar.
You return to the Whats New Web page.
Just like a metro highway system at rush hour, the Internet often becomes congested
when too many users try to view the same Web site at the same time. When this
happens, it may take a long time for the Web page to appear on screen, or you may
even get a screen like the one shown in Figure 8-7. Here are a few strategies to try if
you are having problems displaying Web pages.
If a Web page is taking too long to display on your computer screen, you can stop
loading the page and try again later. Heres how to stop transmitting a page:
7 7. . Click the Address bar, type www.microsoft.com, and press <Enter>.
After a second or twobefore the Microsoft home page completely
loadsclick the Stop button on the toolbar.
You can also try refreshing a sluggish or difficult Web page. There are basically two
reasons to refresh a Web page:
To attempt to view a Web page that is not loading.
To update a Web page that contains information that is constantly changing,
such as headline news stories or financial information.
8 8. . Click the Refresh button on the toolbar.
Another way you can return to previously visited Web sites is to use the Address bar,
which remembers every Web address that youve manually typed into it.
9 9. . Click the Address bar list arrow.
A list of the Web addresses youve previously entered appears below the address bar.
1 10 0. . Select the http://www.yahoo.com site from the list.
You return to the Yahoo Web site.
Forward button
Stop button
Refresh button
216 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-5: Search the Web
`
The Internets greatest strength is also its greatest weakness: with so much information
literally millions of Web pagesit can be extremely difficult to find what youre looking for.
Fortunately, there are many search engines that catalog the millions of Web pages on the
Internet so that you can find Web pages on topics that interest you. There are many search
engines available on the Internetyouve probably heard of some of the more popular ones,
like Yahoo, Excite, and HotBot. In this lesson, youll learn how you can search the Web to
find information on the topics you specify.
1 1. . Make sure your Web browser is open so you are connected to the
Internet.
2 2. . Click the Search button on the toolbar.
A Search pane appears on the left side of Internet Explorer, as shown in Figure 8-10.
This is where you specify what you want to search for.
Figure 8-10
You can search the Web
with Internet Explorers
integrated search function.
Figure 8-11
You can search the Web
with Yahoo.
Search button
Enter a word or phrase you want to search for
here and click Search.
Enter a word or phrase
you want to search for
here and click search.
Figure 8-10
Figure 8-11
Your search results
appear here.
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 217
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Search the Web for
Information Using Internet
Explorer:
1. Click the Search
button on the toolbar.
2. Type the word or phrase
you want to search for in
the Search the Web for
box and click Search.
3. Click the link for the Web
page you want to look at.
4. Click the Search
button on the toolbar to
close the search panel.
To Search the Web for
Information Using a
Search Engine:
Type the Web address for
the search engine in the
Address bar and press
<Enter>. Type the word
or phrase you want to
search for in the Web
pages search box and
press <Enter>.
3 3. . Click the Search box and type in the word or phrase you want to search
for.
For better search results, use complete sentences or several keywords that describe
what youre looking for. For example, typing Where can I find a good oyster
restaurant in Chicago? would yield better results than simply oysters.
4 4. . Click Search.
The Security Alert dialog box may appear (it appears any time you send information
over the Internet, unless you check the In the future do not show the warning check
box). If it does, you can safely click OK.
Microsoft Internet Explorer returns a list of Web pages, ranked by relevance, that
contain the word or phrase you specified. You may have to scroll down to view the
entire list.
5 5. . Click the Web page you want to view.
Are you finding mostly irrelevant information in your search results? Then you may
have to refine your search. For example, a search on the word Windows may result
in links to Anderson

Windows, Stained Glass Windows, and Microsoft

Windows, while a search on the phrase Microsoft Windows will result in links to
Microsoft Windows. Some search engines will let you search within your results. For
example, you could do a search for Microsoft Windows and then further refine your
search by searching the results for the word Networking.
6 6. . Click the Search button to close the search panel.
You dont have to click Microsoft Internet Explorers search button to look for
information on the Webyou can also go directly to a search engines Web site and
specify what you want to look for there. Table 8-2: Popular Search Engines on the
Web is by no means a definitive inventory of the dozens of search engines that are
currently available on the Web, but it lists the best and most popular Web search
engines and their Web addresses.
Table 8-2: Popular Search Engines on the Web
Site Web Address Description
AltaVista www.altavista.com Operated by Digital, AltaVista claims to catalog and index more
Web pages than any other search engine.
Excite www.excite.com Excite has a powerful, highly rated search engine, and it also has
one of the best customizable home pages on the Internet.
Google www.google.com Google is consistently ranked as the best and most relevant search
engine. However, it doesnt contain many other features other than
search.
Hotbot www.hotbot.com Though not as popular as some of the others, HotBot consistently
ranks as one of the best, most relevant search engines.
Lycos www.lycos.com Lycos is another powerful search engine, especially if youre
looking for information in formats other than Web pages, such as
MP3 sound files.
Yahoo www.yahoo.com The mother of all Web pages, Yahoo is actually more of a directory
service than a search engine, but it makes it very easy to find
topics, especially if youre new to the Internet.
Search Box
218 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-6: Adding a Web Page to
Favorites and Changing your Home
Page
You have finally found a Web page about hippopotamus food, and you want to return back to
it later. What should you do? Well, you dont have to write down the Web address on a Post-It
note and stick on your monitoryou can add the Web page to Internet Explorers Favorites
feature so you can always quickly return back to any Web page in the list! In this lesson,
youll learn how to add your favorite Web sites to Internet Explorer. Youll also learn how to
change your home page (also called a start page)the Web page that appears each time you
start Internet Explorer.
1 1. . Make sure your Web browser is open so that youre connected to the
Internet.
2 2. . Go to a Web page that you visit frequently and want to add to your
Favorites list.
It doesnt matter how you get to the Web sitetype the pages Web address in the
Address bar (if you know it) or navigate there by clicking a hyperlink from another
Web site. When the desired Web page appears on your screen, you can add it to your
Favorites so you can always easily return to it later.
Figure 8-12
The Add Favorites dialog
box
Figure 8-13
Click the Favorites button
to display a list of your
favorite Web pages.
Figure 8-14
The General tab of the
Internet Options dialog
box. You can change your
home page here.
Figure 8-15
The Organize Favorites
dialog box
Other Ways to Add a
Web Page to Favorites:
Right-click anywhere on
the Web page and
select Add to
Favorites from the
shortcut menu.
Click the Web page you want
to visit. If the Web is in a
folder, click the folder ( ).
Figure 8-12
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
The name of the Web
page appears here.
Figure 8-15
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 219
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Add a Web Page to
Your List of Favorites:
Go to the Web page,
select Favorites Add
to Favorites from the
menu and click OK.
Or
Go to the Web page,
right-click anywhere on
the Web page and select
Add to Favorites from
the shortcut menu.
To Go To a Favorite Web
Page:
Click the Favorites button
on the toolbar and select
the Web page from the
left side of Internet
Explorer. Click the
Favorites button when
youre finished.
Or
Select Favorites from the
menu and select the Web
page.
To Change Your Start
Page:
Go to the Web page,
select Tools Internet
Options from the menu
and click the Use Current
button.
To Organize Favorites:
Select Favorites
Organize Favorites from
the menu.
3 3. . Select Favorites Add to Favorites from the menu.
The Add Favorites dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-12. The name of the Web
page appears in the name boxif you want, you can replace the Web pages default
name with one that is more meaningful to you. Clicking the Create In button lets you
add shortcuts to a folder.
4 4. . Click OK to add the Web page.
A shortcut to the Web page is added to your list of favorites.
Heres how to display your favorite Web sites:
5 5. . Click the Favorites button on the toolbar.
A list of your favorite Web pages appears in a panel on the left side of Internet
Explorer, as shown in Figure 8-13.
6 6. . Click the favorite Web page you want to view.
If your favorite Web page is in a folder, just click the folder ( ) and then the favorite
Web site. The Web page you clicked appears in the right panel of Internet Explorer.
Is there a Web page that you really like and use almost every time youre on the
Internet? You might consider making that Web page your Home pagethe Web page
that appears each time you start Internet Explorer. Some of the search engines we
discussed in the previous lesson make excellent home pages. Heres how to make a
Web page your home page:
7 7. . Go to a Web page that you want to set as your home page and select
Tools Internet Options from the menu. Click the General tab, if
necessary.
The Internet Options dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-14. The address of your
current home page appears in the box in the Home page section.
8 8. . Click Use Current button to set the Web page that is displayed on your
screen as your new home page.
9 9. . Click OK.
The Internet Options dialog box closes. The next time you start Internet Explorer, the
Web page you selected will appear as your start page.
If youve added a lot of Web pages to your list of favorites, it can be difficult to find a
specific Web page out of all those entries. You can organize your favorites list by
creating subfolders to keep related Web pages togetherfor example, you might create
a folder called Travel to keep all your travel related Web pages together, and another
folder called Financial to hold your financial and investment related Web pages.
Heres how to organize your list of favorites:
1 10 0. . Select Favorites Organize Favorites from the menu.
The Organize Favorites dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-15. We dont need to
go in detail hereyou can organize your favorites using the same Windows file
management techniques you already know (if you dont, review the file management
chapter). The Organize Favorite dialog box even provides you with several handy
buttons to move, rename, and delete files and shortcuts.
1 11 1. . Close the Organize Favorites dialog box.
Favorites button
Other Ways to View
Your Favorite Web
Pages:
Select Favorites from
the menu and select the
Web page.
220 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-7: Displaying a History
of Visited Web Pages
Cant find your way back to that that really neat 101 Lutefisk Recipes Web site you were
looking at yesterday? Dont worryInternet Explorer keeps track of the Web pages youve
visited during the past 20 days. You can use Internet Explorers history feature to easily return
to any of these sites, and thats the topic of this lesson.
1 1. . Make sure your Web browser is open so youre connected to the Internet.
2 2. . Click the History button on the toolbar to display a list of the Web pages
you have recently visited.
A history of all the Web pages youve visited recently appears in the left side of
Internet Explorer. The history is grouped chronologicallyall you have to do it click
the day or week you viewed the Web page that you want to view again.
3 3. . Click the day or week you viewed the Web page that you want to view
again.
If you cant remember the day or week off hand, dont worry. Finding the Web page
you want to view in the history may take a bit of trial and error, because who really
remembers the exact day when they visited a specific Web page?
When you click a day or week, the Web sites you viewed during that day or week
appear. A (Web site) symbol appears by each Web site.
4 4. . Click the Web site you want to revisit.
The Web sites individual Web pages appear, each with a (Web page) symbol beside
them.
5 5. . Click the Web page you want to view.
The Web page appears.
Figure 8-16
Internet Explorer displays
a history of previously
visited Web sites.
History button
Figure 8-16
Select the Web
site ( ) then the
specific Web
page ( ).
Select the day or
week when you last
viewed the Web
page
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 221
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Display a History of
Visited Web Pages:
1. Click the History
button on the toolbar.
2. Click the day or week you
viewed the Web page.
3. Click the Web site you
want to revisit.
4. Click the specific Web
page you want to view.
5. Click the History button
on the toolbar when
youve finished working
with your history of
recently view Web pages.
6 6. . Click the History button on the toolbar when youve finished working
with your history of recently view Web pages.
The History panel disappears.
222 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-8: Saving Pictures and
Files to Disk (Downloading)
Another common way people use the Internet is to download files from a Web server on the
Internet and save them onto their local hard drive. Some of the most common types of files
people download from the Internet include:
Images: You can save any picture that you see on a Web page, print it, use it as your
Windows wallpaper, or anything else you can think of.
Programs: Many software companies have demo versions of their programs available
on the Internet that you can download and evaluate. In addition, thousands of shareware
programs are available for you to download for free!
Patches, Fixes, and Drivers: One of the great things about the Internet is how you
can find and download bug fixes for your programs, and drivers for your hardware
devices, such as a driver for a discontinued foreign printer.
Music: A new file format called MP3 is revolutionizing the music industry. MP3 files
are sound files that you can listen to on your computer. They have digital CD quality
sound, but use compression so that they are 11 times smaller than the CD equivalent and
small enough to be easily downloadable from the Internet.
Viruses: Just kiddingthe last thing the world you want to download from the Internet
is a computer virus! Since you wont always know where a program or file you want to
download comes from, you should make sure your computer has a virus protection
program installed before you download anything from the Internet.
Figure 8-17
There are many files and
programs on the Internet
that you can download
onto your computers hard
drive.
Figure 8-18
Specify where on your
hard drive you want the
downloaded file to be
saved.
Figure 8-19
Windows displays the
progress of a download.
Figure 8-17
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 223
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Save an Image on a
Web Page to Disk:
1. Right-click the image you
want to save and select
Save Picture As from the
shortcut menu.
2. Navigate to the drive and
folder where you want to
save the image, give the
image a different name if
you want, and click OK.
To Download a File:
1. Right-click the file you
want to download, select
Save Target As from the
shortcut menu.
2. Navigate to the drive and
folder when you want to
save the file, give the file
a different name if you
want, and click OK.
Other than the slight risk of contracting a virus (if you dont have virus protection software
installed), the only other downside of downloading files off the Internet is how long it can
takeespecially if youre downloading a huge file over a 33.6 modem connection to the
Internet!
In this lesson, youll learn how to download files and images from the Internet and save them
to your hard disk. When you come across a picture or image on the Internet that you really
like, heres how you can permanently save it to your computers hard drive:
1 1. . Right-click the image you want to save and select Save Picture As from
the shortcut menu.
Windows asks where you want to save the image by presenting you with the Save As
dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-18.
2 2. . Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the image, give
the image a different name (if you want), and click OK.
Windows saves the image to the specified drive and folder.
The procedure for downloading and saving programs and other files from the Internet
is almost the same as downloading and saving an image. Heres how to do it:
3 3. . Find the file you want to download, right-click it and select Save Target
As from the shortcut menu.
You can usually also simply click a file you want to download, but doing this will
sometimes open the file in Internet Explorer instead of saving it to your computer. As
with images, you have to specify where you want to save the file.
4 4. . Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the file, give the
file a different name if you want, and click OK.
Windows will download the file and save it to the drive and folder you specified. It
may take several minutes or several hours to download the file, depending on the files
size and how fast your connection to the Internet is. Windows displays a dialog box
that shows the progress of the download, as shown in Figure 8-19.
NOTE: Make sure you remember where you save your downloaded files! Many
people download software without thinking about where theyre saving it,
only to be unable to find the file once its finished downloading. It makes
sense to create and use a folder called Downloads or something similar
when you can save your downloaded files.
One more note about downloading files and programs off the Internet: a large percent of the
programs you can download off the Internet are stored in ZIP files. ZIP files package
programs and files together and make them must easier to download.
ZIP files do two things:
Compress Information: Instead of downloading a 2 MB file, you can download a
1 MB file in half the time.
Store multiple files together in a single ZIP file: Instead of downloading 20 or so
files that a program requires to run, you only have to download a single ZIP file.
Once you have downloaded a ZIP file, Microsoft Windows XP should unzip it for you. If it
doesnt, there is another program that will unzip files called WinZIP. You can find and
download the WinZIP program at www.winzip.com.
Internet Explorer
shortcut menu
A ZIP file
224 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-9: Introduction to
E-mail
Do you really need a definition of e-mail? You already know that you can use e-mail to send
messages to the staff at the office or to people all over the world. You probably also know that
e-mail is fast (almost instantaneous) and economical (many e-mail accounts are completely
free!).
Just like you need to know a persons street address if you want to send them a letter, you
need to know a persons e-mail address if you want to send that person an e-mail message.
Figure 8-23 is an example of what a typical e-mail address looks like.
Windows XP comes with an e-mail program called Outlook Express. Outlook Express is a
stripped-down version of Microsofts full-featured e-mail program Outlook, which comes
with Microsoft Office. Outlook Express allows you compose, send, and receive e-mail
Figure 8-20
Microsoft Outlook Express
is the e-mail program that
is included with Windows
XP.
Figure 8-21
Outlook Expresss toolbar
Figure 8-22
Many people prefer to use
Web-based e-mail, such
as Hotmail, since you can
use it anywhere on any
computer that has a
connection to the Internet.
Figure 8-23
An Internet e-mail address
consists of two parts: a
user name and a domain
name, separated by the @
symbol.
Figure 8-21
Figure 8-23
[email protected]
User Name
This is the name of the persons
e-mail account. It is similar to the
persons name on an envelope.
Domain Name
This is the location of the persons
account on the Internet. It is similar to
the address on an envelope.
Figure 8-22
E-mail folders:
see Table 8-3:
E-mail Folders
for their
descriptions
Toolbar
Click the task
you want to
perform here
Compose a new
E-mail message
Figure 8-20
Sends any messages youve
composed, and downloads
any new messages
Opens the
address book
Finds people,
messages, or
text
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 225
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Start Outlook Express:
Click the Outlook
Express button on the
taskbars Quick Launch
toolbar.
messages over the Internet. The remainder of the lessons in this lesson will show you how to
accomplish these tasks.
Move on to the one and only step in this lesson and well take a quick look at Outlook
Express before we move on and learn how to compose, send, and receive e-mail.
1 1. . Open Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook Express button on the
taskbars Quick Launch toolbar.
The main screen of Outlook Express appears, as shown in Figure 8-26. Notice the
folders in the left pane of Outlook Express? These folders categorize your messages
and work just like the In and Out boxes youve seen at the office. Table 8-3: E-mail
Folders describes each of these folders.
Although well be working in Microsoft Outlook Express throughout the remaining lessons in
this chapter, Outlook Express is by no means the only program you can use to send and
receive e-mail. There are many, many different e-mail programs available, such as
GroupWise, Lotus Notes, and even America Online that can also send and receive e-mail. In
fact, if youre connected to the Internet and have a Web browser, you dont even need an e-
mail program at all to send and receive e-mailyou can do it right from the Web! Web based
e-mail is usually free, and it allows you to compose, send, and receive e-mail using a Web
page instead of an e-mail program. Many people actually prefer using Web-based e-mail
instead of an e-mail program because its free and can be accessed anywhere there is a
computer with an Internet connection. Hotmail, shown in Figure 8-22, owned by Microsoft
(who else?) is the largest Web based e-mail program in the world.
Table 8-3: E-mail Folders
Folder Description
Inbox
Stores the messages youve received
Outbox
Temporarily stores any messages that youve composed that have not been
sent
Sent Items
Stores copies of messages you have sent
Deleted Items
Stores messages that youve deleted
Drafts
Stores draft messages that you havent completed yet
Outlook Express
button
Other Ways to Start
Outlook Express:
Select Go Mail from
Internet Explorers
menu.
226 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-10: Composing and
Sending E-mail
Heres a quick explanation on how to compose and send an e-mail message:
1 1. . If its not already opened, start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook
Express button on the taskbars Quick Launch toolbar.
The Outlook Express program appears.
2 2. . Click the Create Mail button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
The New Message window appears, as shown in Figure 8-24, ready for you to write
your e-mail message. The first thing you have to do is specify the recipients e-mail
address in the To: field. You can either type this address in the To: box, or you can click
the Select Recipients from a list button that appears immediately to the left of the To:
box.
If the recipient of your e-mail isnt in the Address Book or if you want to type out their
address in the To: field,move on to the next step. If you want to select your recipients
name from the Address Book (providing that they are in the address book), skip to Step
4.
3 3. . Type the recipients e-mail address in the To: field.
If you need to send a message to more than one person, simply enter all the recipients
e-mail addresses, making sure you separate them with a comma (,) like this:
[email protected], [email protected]. Skip to Step 7 when youre finished.
4 4. . If the recipient is in your Address Book, click the Select recipients from
a list button to the left of the To: field.
The Select Recipients dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-27.
Figure 8-24
The New Message
window
Figure 8-25
The New Message toolbar
Outlook Express
button
Create Mail
button
Other Ways to Compose
a Message:
Select Compose
New Message from the
menu.
Press <Ctrl> + <N>.
Select Recipients
from List button
To: Enter the recipient(s) of the message
Cc: Send a copy of the message to these recipients
Subject: Enter the subject of the message
Body: Type your e-mail message here, as you
would using a word processor
Formatting Toolbar: Use to apply font and paragraph
formatting to your message, and to insert lines, pictures,
and hyperlinks to Web pages
Send the
message to
the Outbox
Undo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Check names
for errors
Attach a
file
Digitally sign
message
Encrypt
message
Figure 8-24
Figure 8-25
Spell
check
Set as a
priority
Work
offline
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 227
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Compose a Message:
1. Open Outlook Express.
2. Click the Create Mail
button on the Outlook
Express toolbar.
3. Type the recipients
address in the To: field.
Or
Click the Select
recipients from a list
button to the left of the To:
field, click the name of the
recipient in the Name list,
then click the To: button.
Click OK when youre
finished.
4. Click the Subject field
and enter the messages
subject.
5. Click the pointer in the
lower pane and type the
message.
6. (Optional) Check the
spelling of your message
by selecting Tools
Spelling from the menu.
7. (Optional) Attach a file by
clicking the Attach button
on the toolbar and then
selecting the file in the
Insert Attachment dialog
box.
8. Click the Send Message
button on the toolbar to
send the message.
5 5. . Click the name of the recipient in the Name list and click the To: button.
If you need to send a message to more than one person, you can repeat Step 5 to add
the other recipients. When youre finished, move on to the next step.
6 6. . Click OK.
The Select Recipients dialog box closes and the recipient(s) appear in the To: field.
7 7. . (Optional) To send a copy of a message to someone, click in the Cc: field
and/or the Bcc: field and Repeat Steps 3-6 to enter their e-mail
addresses, only click the Cc: or Bcc: button instead of the To: button.
Table 8-4: Ways to Address an E-mail Message gives a description of carbon copies
(Cc) and Blind Carbon Copies (Bcc). Next, you have to enter the subject of the
message so your recipient(s) will know what your message is about. The subject will
appear in the heading of the message in the recipients inbox.
8 8. . Click the Subject field and enter a subject for the e-mail.
Now you can type an actual e-mail message.
9 9. . Click the pointer in the body of the message, in the lower pane, then type
the message as you would in a word processor.
Keep in mind that all the generic Windows programs commands youve learnedsuch
as cutting, copying, pasting, and formatting textwill work in Outlook Express.
1 10 0. . (Optional) To check the spelling of your message, select Tools
Spelling from the menu.
Outlook Express checks the spelling in your message, flags each word it cant find in
its dictionary, and suggests an alternate word. To replace an unknown word with a
suggestion, select the suggestion in the Change To list and click the Change button. To
ignore a word the spell checker doesnt recognize, such as the name of a city, click
Ignore All.
1 11 1. . (Optional) To send a file or picture along with your message click the
Attach button on the toolbar and then select the file in the Insert
Attachment dialog box.
1 12 2. . When youre finished with the message, click the Send Message button
on the toolbar.
The message is sent to the Outbox folder, and will be sent the next time you click the
Send and Receive button. Go to Step 13 if you want to send the message immediately.
1 13 3. . Click the Send and Receive button on the Outlook toolbar.
Outlook sends all the messages that are stored in the Outbox folder and retrieves any
new e-mail messages it finds on the e-mail server.
Table 8-4: Ways to Address an E-mail Message
Address Description
To Sends the message to the recipient you specify (required)
Carbon Copy (Cc) Sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly involved,
but would be interested in the message
Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) Sends a copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else
knowing that they received the message
Attach button
Send and Receive
button
228 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-11: Adding a Name to
the Address Book
Unless you only write to two or three people, its almost impossible to memorize the e-mail
addresses of everyone you correspond with, especially when they have e-mail addresses that
look something like [email protected]. Fortunately, if you use the
Windows Address Book, you dont have to. Simply enter the peoples name and e-mail
addresses to whom you regularly send messages, and youll never have to remember another
obscure e-mail address again. This lesson will show you how to add an e-mail address to the
Address Book.
1 1. . If it isnt already open, start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook
Express button on the taskbars Quick Launch toolbar.
The Outlook Express main program screen appears.
Figure 8-26
The Address Book window
Figure 8-27
The Select Names window
Figure 8-28
The Contact Properties
dialog box
Address Book
button
Other Ways to Open the
Address Book:
Press <Ctrl> + <B>.
Add to
To: list
Add to
Cc: list
Add to
Bcc: list
Select the recipient(s)
Figure 8-26 Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 229
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Add a Name to the
Address Book:
1. Start Outlook Express.
2. Click the Address Book
button on the Outlook
Express toolbar.
3. Click the New Entry
button on the Windows
Address Book toolbar.
4. Choose Internet Mail
Address and Personal
Address Book.
5. Type the recipients first
and last name and enter
the recipients e-mail
address.
6. To add additional
information about the
recipient, click on other
tabs in the New Internet
Mail Properties dialog
box.
7. Click OK, then close the
Address Book.
2 2. . Click the Address Book button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
The Address Book window appears, as shown in Figure 8-26. Two types of items
appear in the Windows Address Book:
Contacts: Contacts are the individual recipients in your Address Book.
Groups: A group allows you to send messages to a group of recipients.
3 3. . Click the New button on the Windows Address Book toolbar.
The New Entry dialog box appears with the Personal tab in front, as shown in Figure
8-28. Choose what type of entry youd like to create, and where you want to put it.
4 4. . Choose Internet Mail Address in the Select the Entry Type box, and
select Personal Address Book from the Put This Entry box. Select OK.
The New cc:Mail Address Properties dialog box appears.
5 5. . Type the recipients first and last name in the appropriate fields.
6 6. . Enter the recipients name in the Display Name box, then enter the e-
mail address
You can also click on the other tabs in the New Internet Mail Address Properties dialog
box to add additional informationsuch as phone numbers and addressesabout the
recipient.
7 7. . Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
You return to the Windows Address Book window, where the new contact appears.
8 8. . Click the Address Windows Close button to close it.
New Contact
button
230 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Lesson 8-12: Receiving E-mail
This lesson explains how to receive and read your e-mail messages with Outlook Express.
Youll find its a lot easier to retrieve and read e-mail messages than it is to sort through and
read postal mailno envelopes to rip open, no scribbled handwriting to decipher, no junk
mail to go through well thats not quite true. Unfortunately, the online world is plagued
with junk mail, called Spam, just like the postal world. Oh well.
1 1. . If it isnt already open, start Outlook Express by clicking the Outlook
Express button on the taskbars Quick Launch toolbar.
The Outlook Express main program screen appears.
2 2. . Click the Inbox folder in the left pane of the Outlook Express window.
The contents of the Inbox folder appear in the upper-right pane of the Outlook Express
window, as shown in Figure 8-29. Lets check and see if you have any new e-mail.
3 3. . Click the Send and Receive button on the Outlook Express toolbar.
Normally, Outlook Express automatically checks your mail server for new messages
every 30 minutes. If it finds any new messages on your mail server, it downloads them
and saves them to your computer. You can force Outlook to check for new messages by
clicking the Send and Receive button. If you connect to the Internet with a modem
connection, Outlook Express will automatically dial out and connect to the Internet to
establish a connection with your mail server.
Figure 8-29
Outlook Expresss Inbox
folder
Figure 8-30
Outlook Expresss Inbox
toolbar
Inbox folder
Send and Receive
button
Other Ways to Send and
Receive Messages:
Press <Ctrl> + <M>.
Compose a new
E-mail message
Reply to the author
of a message
Reply to all the recipients
of a message
Forward a message
to someone else
Delete the
message
Open the
address book
Figure 8-30
This area displays the
messages in the highlighted
folder. Click or double-click the
message you want to read.
Messages that have not been
opened appear in bold and
have a closed envelope ( ). A
paper clip ( ) indicates an
attached message.
The contents of the selected
message appear in this area.
Figure 8-29
Send or receive a
message
Find a contact
or message
Print a message
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 231
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Receive and Read
E-mail Messages:
1. Start Outlook Express
and click the Inbox folder.
2. Click the Send
and Receive button on
the Outlook Express
toolbar.
3. Click or double-click the
message you want to
read.
To Open an Attached File:
Follow the above steps to
read the message, then
click the paper clip icon,
and then click the file you
want to open from the list
that appears from the
paper clip.
To Print a Message:
Follow the above steps to
read the message, then
select File Print from
the menu, or press
<Ctrl>+ <P>. Click OK to
print the message.
Your new messages are saved in the Inbox folder. Any new, unread messages appear in
bold and have a closed envelope icon ( ) next to them. Heres how to open and read a
message.
4 4. . Click the message you want to read.
The contents of the message appear in the lower-right pane of Outlook Express, and the
From and Subject information appear at the top of this pane. You can also open a
message its own windowthis is especially helpful when you want to read a long
message. Simply double-click the message you want to read. The message appears in
its own window. You can close the messages window when youre finished reading it
by clicking the windows close button.
If a message has one or more files attached to it, a paper clip will also appear in this
area. If a message contains an attachment, go to Step 5 to open it. If not, skip ahead to
Step 6.
5 5. . (Optional) To open any files attached to a message, click the paper clip
icon and then click the file you want to open from the list that appears
from the paper clip.
Sometimes youll want to print a copy of a message. Heres how to do it:
6 6. . (Optional) To print a message, select File Print from the menu, or
press <Ctrl> + <P>. Click OK to print the message.
Paper Clip
232 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quick Reference
To Reply to a Message:
1. Find and open the
message you want to
reply to.
2. Click the reply option you
want to use: Reply to
Author or Reply to All.
3. Type your reply and click
the Send button on the
toolbar when youre
finished.
Lesson 8-13: Replying to a
Message
You can reply to a message, just like you would answer a letter. This lesson explains how to
do it.
1 1. . Find and open the message you want to reply to.
You learned how to open and read messages in the previous lesson. Next, you need to
decide who you want to respond to. You have two choices:
Reply to Author: Sends the reply only to the author of the message.
Reply to All: Sends the reply to everyone who received the message.
2 2. . Click the reply option you want to use: Reply to Author or Reply to All.
A window appears where you can type your reply.
3 3. . Type your reply and click the Send button on the toolbar when youre
finished.
You can use special characters to express emotion in your e-mail messages, in chat rooms, or
elsewhere on the Internet. Table 8-5: Expressing Emotion in Your Messages has some of the
more common ones. Some of them resemble a face if you turn them sideways.
Table 8-5: Expressing Emotion in Your Messages
Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description
: ) or : - ) Smile FAQ Frequently asked questions
: ( or : - ( Frown IMHO In my humble opinion
; ) or ; - ) Wink LOL Laughing out loud
: )~ or : - )~ Sticking tongue out ROTFL Rolling on the floor laughing
: O or : - O Surprise FWD Forwarded message
Figure 8-31
You can reply to a
message.
Reply to All
button
Reply to Author
button
Outlook Express fills in the
address and subject fields
for you.
Type your reply here.
A copy, or quote, of the
original message is
included to help the reader
know which message you
are replying to.
Figure 8-31
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 233
Your Organizations Name Here
Quick Reference
To Forward a Message:
1. Find and select the
message you want to
forward and click the
Forward Message button
on the toolbar.
2. Enter the recipients e-
mail address in the To:
field.
3. (Optional) Enter your own
comments in the
message body area.
4. Click the Send button on
the toolbar.
To Delete a Message:
Select the message you
want to delete and press
the <Delete> key.
Lesson 8-14: Forwarding and
Deleting a Message
After youve read a message, you can add your own comments and forward it to someone
else. Besides the typical business correspondence, many people especially like to forward e-
mails that contain jokes or words of wisdom.
1 1. . Find and open the message you want to forward.
2 2. . Click the Forward Message button on the toolbar.
A window appears with the message you are forwarding. You need to specify to whom
you want to send, or forward, the message.
3 3. . Type the recipients e-mail address in the To: field or use the Address
Book to enter the recipients address.
You can also add your own comments about the message you are forwarding.
4 4. . (Optional) To add your own comments to the message, click the message
body area and type your comments.
Youre ready to send the forwarded message.
5 5. . Click the Send button on the toolbar to forward the message.
Remember that clicking Send normally only sends it to the Outbox folder. Youll have
to click the Send and Receive button to actually send the message.
When you no longer need a message, you can delete it to prevent your Inbox folder
from becoming cluttered with dozens of messages. Deleting a message is very, very
easy. Heres how to do it:
6 6. . Select the message you want to delete and press the <Delete> key.
The message is removed from the current folder and is placed in the Deleted Items
folder.
Figure 8-32
You can forward a
message.
Forward Message
button
Type the e-mail address of the
recipient you want to receive the
forwarded message.
Type any comments you want to
add to the message here.
The original message appears
here.
Figure 8-32
234 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Chapter Eight Review
Lesson Summary
Introduction to the Internet
The Internet is the largest computer network in the world, with millions of computers all over the
world connected to each other.
Web pages are stored on Web servers, which are always connected to the Internet so that people
can view their Web pages 24 hours a day.
Some of things you can do using Internet include sending and receiving e-mail, browsing the World
Wide Web, posting and reading newsgroup messages, chatting with other Internet users, and
downloading software.
Connecting to the Internet
To connect to the Internet you need an Internet Service Provider (ISP), a Web browser program,
and a phone line and modem or other connection to the Internet.
To Connect to the Internet: Double-click the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop or click
the Internet Explorer icon on the Quick Launch toolbar. If necessary, enter your user name
and password and click Connect.
Displaying a Specific Web Page
To Display a Specific Web Page: Type the Web address in the Address bar and
press <Enter>.
Sometimes a Web page may not be available for viewing. This can be caused by a Web server
being down where the Web page is stored, by Internet congestion, or by the Web page no longer
existing. Try returning to the Web page later.
Browse the Web
A hyperlink is a link to another Web page or file. The pointer changes to a whenever it is
positioned over a hyperlink.
To Use a Hyperlink: Click the hyperlink with the pointer.
To Go Back to the Previous Page: Click the Back button on the toolbar.
To Stop the Transfer of Information: Click the Stop button on the toolbar.
To Refresh a Web Page: Click the Refresh button on the toolbar.
To Return to a Web Address you Typed in the Address Bar: Click Address bars arrow and
select the Web address.
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 235
Your Organizations Name Here
Search the Web
To Search the Web for Information Using Internet Explorer: Click the Search button on
the toolbar, type the word or phrase you want to search for in the Search the Web for box and
click Search, then click the link for the Web page you want to look at. Click the Search button on
the toolbar to close the search panel.
To Search the Web for Information Using a Search Engine: Type the Web address for the
search engine in the Address bar and press <Enter>. Type the word or phrase you
want to search for in the Web pages Search box and press <Enter>.
Adding a Web Page to Favorites and Changing your Start Page
To Add a Web Page to Your List of Favorites: Go to the Web page, select Favorites Add to
Favorites from the menu and click OK or right-click anywhere on the Web page and select Add to
Favorites from the shortcut menu.
To Go To a Favorite Web Page: Click the Favorites button on the toolbar and select the
Web page from the left side of Internet Explorer, then click the Favorites button when youre
finished. You can also go to a favorite Web page by selecting Favorites from the menu and
selecting the Web page.
To Change Your Start or Home Page: Go to the Web page, select View Internet Options
from the menu and click the Use Current button.
To Organize Your Favorites: Select Favorites Organize Favorites from the menu.
Displaying a History of Visited Web Pages
To Display a History of Visited Web Pages: Click the History button on the toolbar and
click the day or week you viewed the Web page. Click the Web site you want to revisit and then the
specific Web page. Click the History button on the toolbar when youve finished.
Download Software
To Save an Image on a Web Page to Disk: Right-click the image you want to save and select
Save Picture As from the shortcut menu, navigate to the drive and folder when you want to save
the image, give the image a different name if you want, and click OK.
To Download a File: Right-click the file you want to download, select Save Target As from the
shortcut menu, navigate to the drive and folder when you want to save the file, give the file a
different name if you want, and click OK.
Many programs and files on the Internet are stored in compressed ZIP files and need to be
unpacked using a program called WinZip.
Introduction to E-mail
To Start Outlook Express: Click the Outlook Express button on the taskbars Quick Launch
toolbar or select Go Mail from Internet Explorers menu.
Composing and Sending E-mail
To Compose a Message: Start Outlook Express, click the Create Mail button on the
Outlook Express toolbar, type the recipients address in the To: field or click the Select recipients
from a list button to the left of the To: field, click the name of the recipient in the Name list, then
click the To: button and OK when youre finished. Click the pointer in the lower pane and type the
message. Click the Send Message button on the toolbar to send the message.
236 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
To Check a Message for Spelling Errors: Before you send the message, select Tools
Spelling from the menu.
To Attach a File to a Message: Before you send the message click the Attach button on the
toolbar and then select the file in the Insert Attachment dialog box.
You can address a message using To which sends the message to the recipient you specify
(required), Carbon Copy (Cc) which sends a copy of the message to a recipient who is not directly
involved, but would be interested in the message, and Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) which sends a
copy of the message to a recipient without anyone else knowing that they received the message.
Adding a Name to the Address Book
To Add a Name to the Address Book: Start Outlook Express, click the Address Book button on
the Outlook Express toolbar, and click the New Contact button on the Windows Address Book
toolbar. Choose Internet Mail Address and Personal Address Book. Type the recipients first
and last name in the appropriate fields and enter the recipients e-mail address in the Add New box
in the E-Mail Addresses section. To add additional information about the contact, click on other tabs
in the New Internet Mail Properties dialog box. Click OK, and then close the Address Book.
Receiving E-mail
Outlook Express checks your mail server for new messages every 30 minutes, but you can also
check for new messages on-demand by clicking the Send and Receive button on the
Outlook Express toolbar.
To Receive and Read E-mail Messages: Start Outlook Express and click the Inbox folder, click
the Send and Receive button on the Outlook Express toolbar, and click or double-click the
message you want to read.
To Open an Attached File: Follow the above steps to read the message, then click the paper clip
icon and then click the file you want to open from the list that appears from the paper clip.
To Print a Message: Follow the above steps to read the message, then select File Print from
the menu, or press <Ctrl>+ <P>. Click OK to print the message.
Replying to a Message
To Reply to a Message: Find and open the message you want to reply to, click the reply option
you want to use: Reply to Author or Reply to All. Type your reply and click the Send button on
the toolbar when youre finished.
Forwarding a Message
To Forward a Message: Find and select the message you want to forward and click the
Forward Message button on the toolbar, enter the recipients e-mail address in the To: field, enter
your own comments in the message body area, and click the Send button on the toolbar.
To Delete a Message: Select the message you want to delete and press the <Delete> key.
Chapter Eight: Exploring the Internet 237
Your Organizations Name Here
Quiz
1. A Web server is:
A. The worlds largest supercomputer that contains and runs the Internet.
B. A computer that stores Web pages and that is always connected to the Internet.
C. A computer that acts as a gateway between your office network and the Internet.
D. A waiter at a restaurant for spiders.
2. A Home page is the first Web page you see when you connect to the
Internet. (True or False?)
3. Which button on Internet Explorers toolbar brings you back to the page
you last viewed?
A. Home
B. Stop
C. Refresh
D. Back
4. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. Internet Explorer keeps a history of visited Web pages for 20 days.
B. A search engine lets you search for Web pages for topics that interest you.
C. Eudora is an e-mail program that comes with Windows XP.
D. You can download and save images from a Web page onto your computer.
5. When youve finished writing a letter in Outlook Express, clicking the Send
button on the toolbar will instantly send the message to its destination
(True or False?)
6. Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. When you reply to a message, Outlook Express includes the content of the original
message to make it easy for the recipient to know which message youre replying to.
B. E-mail messages can contain files, such as pictures and word processing documents
called attachments.
C. You can send anonymous e-mail using the Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc) field.
D. You can save a list of Web pages you visit frequently in Internet Explorers Favorites
list.
Homework
1. Get a subscription to the Internet.
2. Open Internet Explorer.
3. Go to the Yahoo Web site (www.yahoo.com).
4. Search the Internet for information on Russia.
5. Spend at least 30 minutes browsing the Web on whatever topics you want.
238 Computer Basics
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Quiz Answers
1. A. A Web server is a computer that holds Web pages and is connected to the Internet
24 hours a day so that people can view those Web pages.
2. True.
3. C. The Back button returns you to the Web page you just left.
4. C. Eudora is a popular e-mail program, but it doesnt come with Windows XP.
Outlook Express is the answer you want.
5. False. This was a trick questionwhen you click the Send button, you save the
message to the Inbox folder. In order to send any messages that are in the Inbox, you
need to click the Send and Receive button on the toolbar.
6. C. Adding a recipient to the Blind Carbon Copy field allows them to receive a
message without seeing who else received the message.
Index 239
Your Organizations Name Here
Index

2
2-Up tab...............................................314
4
4-Up tab...............................................310
A
Actions palette.....................................310
Adjustment layers................................168
Adobe Online.........................................41
Airbrush...............................................203
Annotation option..................................57
Art studio brushes..................................17
Auto color command .............................17
B
Bitmaps................................................ 112
Black color channel .............................250
Blue color channel ...............................250
Blur and Sharpen tools ........................192
BMP
defined...............................................59
Bounding boxes .....................................75
Brightness and contrast........................190
Brightness/Contrast .............................169
Brush Styles
changing ..........................................228
Brush tool ...................................... 30, 226
Burn tool..............................................195
C
Calibrating your monitor .....................144
Canvas
rotating or flipping...........................128
Canvas size
changing ..........................................126
Channel
Loading............................................254
Saving a selection as........................252
Channel Mixer..................................... 169
Channels
Channels palette .............................. 250
Character palette.................................. 178
Cleanup tool ........................................ 103
Clipping groups ................................... 262
Clone Stamp tool ................................. 202
Close an image ...................................... 19
CMYK color
compared to RGB color................... 142
Color Balance...................................... 169
Color palette ........................................ 148
Color picker......................................... 152
Color ramp........................................... 150
Color Range command.......................... 86
Color settings....................................... 146
Constraining an images proportions... 122
Contact Sheets ....................................... 15
Contrast slider...................................... 191
Create warped text button.................... 321
Creating a new file ................................ 20
Cropping.............................................. 130
Custom Brush
creating............................................ 230
Custom Shape tool............................... 224
Customized workspaces ........................ 17
Cyan color channel .............................. 250
D
Deselecting............................................ 69
Dividing a slice.................................... 316
Document dimensions ........................... 54
Document profile................................... 54
Document sizes...................................... 54
Dodge and Burn tools.......................... 194
Dodge tool ........................................... 194
Drawing................................................. 15
Drawing a perfect square (Marquee tool)
........................................................... 69
240 Index
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
E
Edge Highlighter tool.......................... 103
Edge Touchup tool .............................. 103
Edit menu.............................................. 24
Efficiency.............................................. 54
Elliptical Marquee tool ......................... 69
Embed Color Profile option.................. 57
EPS
defined .............................................. 59
Eraser tool ....................................103, 219
Expand or Contract commands............. 96
Extracting an object ............................ 102
Eyedropper tool................................... 103
F
File Browser.....................................16, 50
File menu .............................................. 24
Fill tool................................................ 103
Filter menu............................................ 24
Fit on Screen command ........................ 37
Flow.................................................... 203
Full Screen Mode.................................. 33
G
Getting Help.......................................... 41
GIF
defined .............................................. 59
Gradients
applying .......................................... 239
Grayscale ............................................ 142
Group with Previous Layers ............... 172
H
Hand tool (Extract dialog box) ........... 103
Healing Brush tool .........................16, 206
Help
Getting help....................................... 41
Help menu............................................. 24
History palette....................................... 31
Horizontal ruler..................................... 38
Horizontal Type tool ........................... 180
Hue and saturation
adjusting.......................................... 196
I
Image maps......................................... 318
Image menu .......................................... 24
Image pixels.........................................114
ImageReady
Compression quality menu ............. 315
Create Droplet................................. 315
Dither algorithm menu.................... 315
Matte menu ..................................... 315
Setting menu ................................... 315
J
JPEG
defined ...............................................59
JPEG options dialog box .......................57
L
Lasso Tool
selecting with.....................................88
Layer Mask..........................................258
moving.............................................260
Layer menu............................................24
Layer via Cut and Layer via Copy.......174
Layers
creating ............................................162
deleting ............................................164
linking..............................................166
merging............................................170
overview..........................................160
renaming ..........................................163
Layers option .........................................57
Layers Options/Style palette................310
Levels ..................................................169
adjusting...........................................200
Lifting color.........................................220
Lossy slider..........................................315
M
Macromedia Fireworks..........................14
Magenta color channel.........................250
Magnetic Lasso tool
selecting with.....................................92
Magnification box..................................36
Marquee tools ........................................68
Menus and keystroke shortcuts..............24
Metadata pane........................................50
Monitor resolution ...............................115
Move tool...............................................69
Multilingual spell checker .....................17
N
Navigator palette....................................36
O
Opacity.................................................203
Opacity Slider ........................................29
Open dialog box.....................................18
Opening and finding images ..................18
Opening files..........................................48
Optimize palette...................................315
Optimizing an image............................314
Options bar ............................................28
P
Paint Bucket tool....................34, 154, 236
Index 241
Your Organizations Name Here
Painting..................................................15
Palettes
Introduction to ...................................30
Patch tool .............................................208
Pattern maker.........................................17
PDF
defined...............................................59
Pencil tool............................................234
Photoshop screen...................................22
Pixel dimensions..................................120
Polygonal Lasso tool
selecting with.....................................90
Preview document button ....................310
Preview in Default Browser button .....310
Preview pane .........................................50
Print Dimensions
changing ..........................................124
Q
Quick Masks........................................256
R
Rectangular Marquee tool .....................68
Resize Image command.......................132
Resizing buttons ....................................33
Resolution
adjusting .......................................... 116
changing automatically.................... 118
Retouching.............................................14
Reverting ...............................................40
RGB color
compared to CMYK color ...............142
Rollovers .............................................320
Rotating a selection ...............................75
Rulers, guides, and grids........................38
S
Save an image........................................19
Save As dialog box. ...............................56
Scratch sizes ..........................................54
Screen frequency ................................. 118
Screen pixels........................................ 114
Select menu ...........................................24
Selecting an entire image.......................80
Selection
adding to............................................70
deleting ..............................................77
deselecting.........................................78
expanding or contracting ...................96
feathering.........................................100
inverting.............................................94
moving...............................................76
saving.................................................79
scaling................................................ 98
skewing or distorting......................... 99
subtracting from ................................ 72
Selection handles................................... 75
Selective Color .................................... 169
Shape and line tools............................. 222
Show Optimizesd Image tab................ 310
Single Column Marquee tool................. 69
Single Row Marquee tool ...................... 69
Slicing an image .................................. 316
Sponge tool.......................................... 198
Spot Color option .................................. 57
Standard screen mode............................ 33
Standard Screen Mode........................... 33
Swatches palette .................................... 30
T
Texture fill ............................................. 35
Thumbnails............................................ 49
TIFF
defined............................................... 59
Tiles ....................................................... 49
Timing ................................................... 54
Toggle slices visibility button.............. 321
Tool presets...................................... 17, 34
Toolbox.................................................. 26
Tree pane ............................................... 50
Type layers
modifying ........................................ 182
warping............................................ 180
Type Layers ......................................... 176
U
Unhiding channels............................... 250
Unsharp Mask filter............................. 134
Use Proof Setup option.......................... 57
V
Vectors................................................. 112
Vertical ruler .......................................... 38
View box ............................................... 36
View menu............................................. 24
View Single Gamma Only box............ 144
W
WBMP support ...................................... 17
Web publishing...................................... 15
Web transparency .................................. 17
Window menu ....................................... 24
Workspace presets ................................. 32
Y
Yellow color channel ........................... 250
242 Index
2003 CustomGuide, Inc.
Z
Zoom palette ......................................... 36
Zoom slider............................................36
Zoom tool (Extract dialog box) ...........103